Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
B3J3638
B3J3638
In This Lesson
This lesson will provide the student officer with a foundation that will allow for success in both tactical planning and execution of operations at the platoon level. This lesson prepares the student officer for later sand table and field exercises here at The Basic School, with the ultimate goal of service as a provisional Rifle Platoon Commander in the operating forces. This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Topic One: Task-Organization of a Rifle Platoon & Rifle Company Topic Two: Purposes of the Offense Topic Three: Types of Offensive Operations Topic Four: Purposes of the Defense Topic Five: Types of Defenses Operations Summary References Notes Supplemental Reading Page 4 7 7 10 10 12 12 13 14
Learning Objectives
Learning Objectives Without the aid of reference, describe types of defensive operations without omission. (MCCS-DEF-2101) Without the aid of reference, describe types of offensive operations without omission. (MCCS-OFF-2103d) Without the aid of reference, describe forms of maneuver without omission. (MCCS-OFF-2103e) Without the aid of reference, describe rifle platoon task organization without omission. (T&R-0302-OFF-1201a)
B3J3638
Company Commander
Company HQ
Executive Officer Co Gunnery Sergeant First Sergeant Police Sgt Company Clerk
First Platoon
Second Platoon
Third Platoon
Weapons Platoon
Executive Officer The Executive Officer, Rifle Company carries out the orders of the Rifle Company Commander and serves as Company Commander is his absence. He ensures that the company is trained in accordance with Marine Corps standards and the company commanders guidance. He is proficient with all personal and crew-served weapons in the company. He acts as platoon commander for all company headquarters personnel. He assists the commander to deploy and tactical employ the unit. A First Lieutenant usually holds the Executive Officer billet. Company First Sergeant The Company First Sergeant assists the commander as senior enlisted Marine in the unit, and acts as principal enlisted assistant to the commander; the first sergeant may be of any MOS background. He keeps apprised of all policies of the commander, and disseminates information to the unit's enlisted personnel regarding such policies. He reports to the commander on the status of matters pertaining to the efficient operation of the command. The First Sergeant
B3J3638
B3J3638
Platoon Commander
Platoon HQ
Platoon Sergeant RTO Corpsman Guide
Platoon Sergeant The Platoon Sergeant, Infantry Platoon, carries out the orders of the Platoon Commander and Company Commander. He is capable of performing all the tasks required of an infantry unit leader and assumes the position of the Platoon Commander in his absence. He advises the Platoon Commander on the discipline, appearance, control, conduct, and welfare of the platoon. He assists the Platoon Commander in training of the platoon in performance of tasks which support assigned training objectives. He coordinates and supervises the embarkation/debarkation, maintenance, condition, and care of the platoons weapons and equipment including accountability, communication equipment, and if applicable, maintenance, and upkeep of the platoon's assigned vehicles. He advises the Platoon Commander and works
B3J3638
B3J3638
Movement to Contact Movement to contact seeks to gain or regain contact with the enemy and develop the situation. Movement to contact helps the commander to understand the battlespace. It allows him to make initial contact with the enemy with minimum forces, thereby avoiding an extensive engagement or battle before he is prepared for decisive action. When successfully executed, it allows the commander to strike the enemy at the time and place of his choosing. A movement to contact ends when the commander has to deploy the main bodyto conduct an attack or establish a defense. (MCDP 1-0, Marine Corps Operations, Pg. 7-7) (Here at TBS, this is taught in a separate class B3N4638 Movement to Contact) Attack An attack is an offensive operation characterized by coordinated movement, supported by fire, conducted to defeat, destroy, neutralize or capture the enemy. An attack may be conducted to seize or secure terrain. Focusing combat power against the enemy with a tempo and intensity that the enemy cannot match, the commander attacks to shatter his opponents will, disrupt his cohesion, and to gain the initiative. If an attack is successful, the enemy is no longer capable ofor willing to offermeaningful resistance.
B3J3638
Deliberate Attack: A type of offensive action characterized by pre-planned and coordinated employment of firepower and maneuver to close with and destroy the enemy. They usually include the coordination of all available resources and thorough reconnaissance of the enemy. Deliberate attacks are used when the enemy cannot be defeated with a hasty attack or there is no readily apparent advantage that must be rapidly exploited. Spoiling Attack: A tactical maneuver employed to seriously impair a hostile attack while the enemy is in the process of forming or assembling for an attack. It is usually an offensive action conducted in the defense. Counterattack: A limited objective attack conducted by part or all of a defending force to prevent the enemy from attaining the objectives of his attack. It may be conducted to regain lost ground, destroy enemy advance units, and wrest the initiative from the enemy. It may be a precursor to resuming offensive operations and can be conducted when the an enemy tactical error exposes him to effective counteraction. A counterattack is normally conducted with the reserve or least engaged unit. Feint: A limited objective attack made at a place other than that of the main effort with the aim of distracting the enemys attention away from the main effort. It is a supporting attack that involves contact with the enemy. A feint must be sufficiently strong to confuse the enemy as to the location of the main attack. Ideally, a feint causes the enemy to commit forces to the diversion and away from the main effort. Demonstration: An attack or show of force on a front where a decision is not sought. Its aim it to deceive the enemy. A demonstration is a supporting attack that does not make contact with the enemy. The commander executes a demonstration by an actual or simulated massing of combat power, troop movements, or some other activity designed to indicate the preparations for or beginning of an attack at a point other than the main effort. Reconnaissance in Force: A deliberate attack made to obtain information and to locate and test enemy dispositions, strengths, and reactions. It usually develops information more rapidly and in more detail than other reconnaissance methods. Raid: An attack, usually small scale, involving penetration of hostile territory for a specific purpose other than seizing and holding terrain. It ends with the planned withdrawal upon completion of the assigned mission. Raids require detailed planning, preparation, and special training. At The Basic School, the focus of instruction will be on hasty and deliberate attacks. Exploitation Exploitation is an offensive operation that usually follows a successful attack and is designed to disorganize the enemy in depth. The exploitation extends the initial success of the attack by preventing the enemy from disengaging, withdrawing, and reestablishing an effective defense. The exploitation force expands enemy destruction through unrelenting pressure thus weakening his will to resist.
B3J3638
10
B3J3638
Mobile Defense: A mobile defense is the defense of an area or position in which maneuver is used together with fire and terrain to seize the initiative from the enemy. The mobile defense destroys the attacking enemy through offensive action. The commander allocates the bulk of his combat power to mobile forces that strike the enemy where he is most vulnerable and when he least expects attack. Minimum force is placed forward to canalize, delay, disrupt, and deceive the enemy as to the actual location of our defenses. Retaining his mobile forces until the critical time and place are identified, the commander then focuses combat power in a single or series of violent and rapid counterattacks throughout the depth of the battlespace. This type of defensive operation is normally conducted by a division sized force or larger.
MOBILE DEFENSE
11
B3J3638
POSITION DEFENSE At The Basic School, the instruction will be focused on the position defense.
12
B3J3638
Summary
Every Marine Officer should be able to clearly define the task organization of a rifle company and its platoons. Through the examination of the purposes of offensive and defensive operations, and different types of each, the basic officer should gain an understanding of doctrinal concepts. However, this alone cannot and will not ensure mission accomplishment. An understanding of the tactical concepts needed for success will be provided in follow on classes.
13
B3J3638
References
Reference Number or Author MCDP 1 MCDP 1-0 MCDP 1-3 MCRP 5-12A MCWP 3-1 MCWP 3-11.1 NAVMC DIR 3500.87 Reference Title Warfighting Marine Corps Operations Tactics Operational Terms and Graphics Ground Combat Operations Marine Rifle Company/Platoon Infantry Training and Readiness Manual
Notes
14
B3J3638
The following article illustrates the absolute connection between the offense and the defense and how, during operations at any level, leaders must identify the importance of their connectivity and when to transition from one to the other. ATTACK OR DEFEND? By LtCol Michael D. Wyly, published in the Marine Corps Gazette, June 1983. Whether Marines should charge inland upon hitting the beach or dig into a solid defensive position has been argued in recent issues of the Marine Corps GAZETTE (*1). I hope that the debate has not degenerated into an argument over whether offensive or defensive is better. Warfare has far more dimensions than two, and both the offensive and defensive modes are as indispensable now as they always have been. Too often, we fail to see the crucial connection between the two and the great advantage gained by the force that can make the transition from one to the other with finesse. It is that connectivity, how it can be used, and how important it is, that is the more appropriate subject for serious students of war. Essential to any discussion about the defensive and offensive and their relationship to one another is the concept of initiative. In fact, whether the landing force retains or cedes the initiative is far more important than whether it assumes the offensive or defensive. The defensive posture should not connote ceding the initiative to the other side. You choose where to defend. In that way, you choose where to fight. The initiative, therefore, is yours. You give it up if your defense ties you to the terrain or an installation in a way that denies you the option of switching back to the offensive. Retention of initiative, then, is always essential. If we have the initiative, the enemy is reacting to us. Unless he knows precisely what we are about, he is at a disadvantage. For if he must react to us and he misunderstands what we are doing, he will react incorrectly. There can be little argument, then, that it is desirable to have the initiative, whether we gain it by attacking or defending in some advantageous position. The great advantage of the amphibious force is that so long as it is at sea, it has all the initiative. The enemy has to try to guess when and where it will land. The unfortunate thing about an amphibious force that lands and settles into a static beachhead is not that it has gone on the defense. The defense can indeed be the stronger form of war. But the force that seizes the beach and stops, at once cedes all the initiative to the enemy. Where before our confused enemy was anxiously trying to guess when and where we would land, now we, ensconced on our beachhead, are anxiously trying to guess when and where the enemy will attack our perimeter. If, however, our defense not only includes but focuses on a violent counterattack, and if we can shift totally to an offensive mode at the time of our choosing, then we have not given up the initiative after all. We may, in fact, trap the enemy into thinking we have given up the initiative-a belief that could lead all the more swiftly to his destruction. But no defense can be permanent. It is no more feasible to remain in a defensive position continuously than it is to remain continuously on the offensive. The important thing is that we be able to make the transition from one to the other. Both defense and offense alike are temporary statuses to be adopted when appropriate. The essence of the art of war emerges as the ability to know when to make the transition from one posture to the other. It is certain that the necessity of switching over will occur. Therefore, the ability to make the transition effectively when the time arises becomes the most important talent that a fighting unit must possess. It was no mere whim that caused Napoleon's 19th maxim to read: "The passage from the defensive to the offensive is one of the most delicate operations of war." Some common misunderstandings pertaining to both the defense and the attack need clearing up before returning to the subject of the transition between the two. "To trap and destroy hostile forces" is one out of a list of seven possible purposes of the defenses given in FMFM 6-3, and it receives insufficient attention. It is not mentioned until fifth, after four passive uses for the defense, none of which deserves the attention that is due the one quoted above. The primary purpose for the defense ought to be the defeat of the enemy. Seldom in our exercises in the FMF or in our schools are defenses designed with this purpose in mind. Even the counterattack, according to Marine Corps
15
B3J3638
doctrine, is said to be for the purpose of regaining lost portions of the "battle area," to destroy the enemy that happens to be "within the penetration" (see FMFM 6-3, page 290, but not, primarily, to be a means of defeating his total force. FMFM 6-3 misses the point. The most useful purpose for setting up a defense, especially for an amphibious force, is to defeat the enemy. The defensive can be one of the best ways of getting at him. In order to use it in this way, we must recognize that the defensive posture, once assumed, is temporary only. No matter how we fortify ourselves, if we stay in the same position, our adversary is going to work towards dislodging us until he finds a way to do so. But if we can choose some terrain that is for some reason dear to the enemy, and entice him into coming to us, destroy him in a counterattack, and then go on the offensive, moving somewhere else, we can turn the defensive tactic to great advantage. And, we can hold the initiative. A well-designed defense endeavors to force the enemy to commit himself irrevocably. Its design should be such that when committed the enemy's forces are in a disadvantageous situation relative to ours. Committed thusly, the enemy loses options. When he attacks irrevocably, he literally casts away the initiative as his options disappear. If we, the defenders, have a counterattack plan and the ability to switch totally to the offensive at the time of our choosing, the initiative is ours. Attacking to new locations that are void or nearly void of the enemy and moving on again was the way the Prussians fought throughout their victorious war of 1870 in which they totally defeated the French. Though the technique was by no means new in the 19th century, it became standard in the Prussian Army. Its reemergence in 1870 was the result of the Prussians' realization of how best to use the breechloading rifle. The Prussians were rightfully enamored with the ability the weapon gave the infantryman to reload and fight while lying down. To use it in this way, of course, meant that the rifleman had to be on the defensive. Indeed, in this way, a few men could hold off many. Recognizing that they could not defeat anybody if they remained on the defensive all of the time, or most of the time, the Prussians sought a solution. The synthesis was a combination of the offensive and defensive. Viewed at the operational level, a study of the Franco-Prussian War shows the Prussian armies on a fast-pace, aggressive offensive that gave the French no rest. But, if we select out the tactical battles, the actual clashes between forces, the Prussians, on the contrary, seem always to be defending while the French are attacking them. It is no coincidence that it appears this way for this was Moltke's strategy. The Prussian Army had gained an appreciation of this all important interconnection that is the subject of this article: the transition from defense to offense and back again, and the art of how and when to effect it. Though the technique flowered in Prussia's defeat of France, the Prussians did not invent it. Ironically, its most decisive application in modern history was provided by the French. Napoleon's decisive victory over the Austrian and Russian armies at Austerlitz was a classic application of the defensive-offensive. Using the utmost in wile, he most purposefully enticed his allied adversaries to attack what he had made appear to be the weak flank of a defensive position. They fell for it and no sooner did they commit themselves to the offensive than Napoleon went on his own offensive. He so totally confused the situation for his enemies that they abandoned the whole war effort. What was left of their defeated armies fled in disorder, leaving thousands of dead and wounded behind. Enough said about antiquity. Let us turn to the 20th century and our own country. While studying at the National Achives one day, I came across a thick, dusty document by Gen Franz Halder, formerly of the German Army. He had completed it in 1953. Since then, it was little read. He produced the work for the American Army. Halder had, along with his countrymen, suffered the consequences of bad strategy, corrupt politics, and defeat. As a professional who had studied warfare all his life yet seen the finest soldiers he had served with go down in defeat, he endeavored to extract the things that they had done right, to leave a legacy to the Americans. It was Halder, more than anyone, who convinced the defeated German generals to be cooperative with their American captors. In Halder's view, it would be left to Americans to carry the baton as the Soviet Union's main military opponent. The subject of his treatise was the U.S. Army's Field Service Regulations, FM 100-5. He did not tear it apart or lambaste its authors. Many parts of it, he thought were quite good. But he was highly critical of the way it dealt with the defense. In reserving the defense as a less attractive form of war, to be used only to gain time, hold ground, etc., the Americans, in Halder's opinion, had missed the whole point of what that mode of warfare is all about. The defense, like any other form of war, according to the Germans, has to do with destroying the enemy. It is another means in the repertoire of how to get at him. A cover letter on the old document, signed 30 years ago by an American Army colonel, stated that Gen Halder's comments contained much
16
B3J3638
of relevance, of which all officers should take heed. Yet, Halder could write the same critique of the Marine Corps' view of defensive warfare today, for it is little changed. Some of the terminology has changed. What was the main line of resistance (MLR) when I went through The Basic School is now the forward edge of the battle area (FEBA). This is disturbing, however, in that battles are not bound by areas. They have no forward edges. And, if we impose such artificial limitations on our tactics and our thinking, we do to ourselves exactly what Halder criticized us for. Our defense ceases to be a means of defeating the enemy. It becomes a structured "holing up" in which we constrain our forces and impose on ourselves the very difficulty of changing back to the offensive which Napoleon warned us of in his 19th maxim, cited above. The defensive posture is a most versatile one. It need not involve a perimeter, a FEBA, or continuous interlocking bands of steel. It is seldom justified to defend forward slopes because of the inviting target presented to enemy artillery as well as direct fire weapons. The defense can be the integration of several strongpoints, a screen, and a counterattack force. Variations are unlimited. Any force employed to counter an anticipated enemy attack is in the defense, whether its positions are static or mobile. This opens the door to a wealth of ideas, depending on the type of terrain available. Given this viewpoint, our practice of the defense is flawed. It seldom incorporates a design to defeat the enemy. It ignores too many of the options that could be utilized to advantage. Conventional wisdom regarding the offense is equally flawed and some reflection on it is called for here. Any force that moves to engage an enemy force or to seize terrain is attacking. Here we begin to see a merging of the offensive and defensive modes. The distinction becomes less and less clear. Well it should, for all warfare is ultimately directed at the enemy's defeat. As in the case of defending forces, attacking forces may be employed in myriad ways. Their repertoire extends well beyond facsimiles of Pickett's charge. Too often, though, imaginations only conjure up visions of headlong assaults. Thus, the outcry that we can only attack if we greatly outnumber the enemy. Thus, the ridiculous formulas dictating amazing force ratios said to be required for the attacker over the defender. Would-be tacticians continually are producing the most astonishing figures. The attacker, they say, will, in the next war, have to outnumber the defender 3 to 1, 4 to 1, 12 to 1. All this is meaningless. Most often, the especially high ratios, attacker to defender, result from confusion over what is meant by the attack, as differentiated from the assault (*2). The assault is one of the many potential actions that fall under the broad heading of attack. The assault is where you physically move upon the enemy, himself. It is the ultimate commitment. The issue was somewhat clearer when I went to The Basic School, before they changed the name of the "assault position" to the "final coordination line." The difference between attack and assault seemed clear, put in terms of the control measures that governed them. The attack position was (and still is) the last covered and concealed position before crossing the line of departure. The assault position (now the final coordination line) was the last position before initiating the assault itself, the position where supporting fires ceased or were shifted and final coordination between assaulting elements was completed. Even the assault, however, is frequently misunderstood in the Marine Corps. The assault, to be an assault, need not mean lining up and walking forward in the face of the enemy. The assault is where you physically move upon the enemy, himself, but in no way does this require the assaulting force to line up and walk. Running forward might be better, but still, there is no requirement to line up and move forward in unison. To do so makes you an easier target. The assault can be an advance by fire and movement. It can be some walking, some running, some crawling; advancing by bounds; infiltrating the enemy's lines at night and turning on him by surprise, as the Royal Marines did in the Falklands. If we only think of the long, slow-moving line of walking infantry whenever we hear "assault"-or, much worse, whenever we hear "attack"-no wonder such amazing ratios for attacker to defender are formulated. Gen Hermann Balck also recounted that on one occasion, fighting the Russians in Hungary, his division was so badly outnumbered that he had no alternative but to attack. In other words, the attacker need not outnumber the defender. For Balck to have defended in the position that he found himself in would have spelled inevitable doom, for the Soviets had sufficient forces to surround him many times over. When he speaks of attacking, however, he is not describing a broad frontal assault on the enemy's strongpoints. To us, who were in Vietnam, the decision to attack, though outnumbered, should not seem so strange. The Viet Cong and North Vietnamese found themselves outnumbered, locally, most of the time, yet they did not abandon the attack or the assault. They adapted their methods of assault to the situation, assaulting
17
B3J3638
in small groups on narrow fronts, infiltrating at night, doing everything possible to make themselves less of a target. The Israelis typically fight an offensive battle, yet they are normally outnumbered. They cannot withdraw into the hinterlands, as the Russian Army has traditionally done, for a retreat away from the Egyptians is an attack on the Syrians. The smallness of their country forces them to the offensive. Outnumbered, they attack, and they succeed. I hope that the foregoing discussion, first of the defense, then of the offense, demonstrates that the two forms are very general categories, each offering a broad range of options. Understanding them in this way, can better prepare the combat leader to combine the two and to decide when to shift from one to the other. Some may say that this is a lot of esoteric philosophy that does not apply to training Marines, to students at The Basic School, or to NCOs. True esoteric philosophy, with little usefulness on a real battlefield, however, comes in the form of memorizing principles of war and the other lists that appear throughout the FMFMs. The ability to decide when to attack and when to defend is essential knowledge for every combat leader. Small units are often dispersed, as in Vietnam, and small unit commanders must make independent decisions. The question of whether to set in and fight on a given piece of terrain, or go out after the enemy, or get in behind him, is one that leaders of patrols and smaller units must be prepared to answer. In Vietnam, some were able, some were not. All needed to be. Few had been consciously prepared in their stateside training, and this included officers, to make the decision whether to attack or defend. Training courses and schools gave instruction and exercises designed to prepare the student to set up a defense if told to defend. They had learned to plan and execute an assault, if told to attack. This is necessary training. But no courses and no stateside training seemed to require NCOs or officers to decide, based on a given situation, whether to attack or defend, or when to shift from one mode to the other. Though the former type of training is necessary, so is the latter, and, the latter question requiring more thought, demands the most education. Therefore, learning to decide whether to attack or defend is the aspect which should be dealt with more thoroughly. We presently put way too much emphasis in our training on how to attack and how to defend. In so doing, we limit the methods which we prepare our Marines to adopt. The defense is almost invariably a forward slope area defense, fixed to a FEBA, focusing on interlocking bands of fire. With the counterattack directed towards restoring the FEBA, we have a defense oriented towards keeping the enemy out of an area rather than trapping him where we can take him apart. Similarly, the attack is almost invariably an assault, whether frontal or flanking, directed against enemy strongpoints. The student of tactics is not likely to begin to consider the whole spectrum of methods available for attack and defense unless he has been required to consider which form is more appropriate in a given situation. FMF commanders, as well as instructors, should exercise the minds of their subordinates by giving them missions that dictate neither attack nor defense. They should require subordinates to decide which posture to assume initially and when to change from one to the other. Once freed from the structured atmosphere of laying out a FEBA between this point and that, or getting troops on line at a given final coordination line, subordinates will begin to consider variations. They will have ideas that combine the offensive with the defensive and need not be categorized into a form described in a paragraph of the FMFM. Some suggestions for missions that give this kind of latitude: For the platoon-Prevent guerrillas from entering Hoa An Village and harassing the populace. For the company-Draw the enemy's attention to the north to enable rapid passage of our main forces to the south of him. For the battalion-Protect the flank of our main force. For the regiment-Force the enemy to abandon his position on the high ground in order to draw him into the swamps where our infantry can harass and destroy him. For the division-Prevent the enemy from using his main supply route in order to cut off his supplies and disrupt his communications. These are only a few examples. The solutions to each problem could entail some form of maneuver nowhere addressed in our manuals. So, what manuals can you study? The Marine Corps Association has recently reprinted Infantry in Battle, replete with reallife combat experiences to draw on. It is excellent. John Langdon-Davies' Invasion in the Snow tells how the Finns again and again applied the defensive-offensive against the Russians, 1939-1940. Read how the Boers used the defensive-offensive to defeat the British at Colenso in 1899. Study Austerlitz. Commanders with
18
B3J3638
Vietnam experience can reconstruct small unit experiences from their own recollection. Food for great ideas of this nature abounds, and officers should seek it out. Certainly, fundamentals of soldiering must be taught. How to live in the field, stalk the enemy, care for equipment, throw a grenade, shoot, employ mortars, operate a radio, read a map-these are the things that the British could do so much better than the Argentines in the Falklands. They are important. Training in the FMF, at the Amphibious Warfare School, and at the Command and Staff Collge, however, should be conducted at a higher level. We should be able to presuppose that such basics are already mastered. I realize that we find that our young Marines and even some of our officers have not mastered these essentials. But they should master them at The Basic School, and during initial training at recruit depots and infantry training schools. Tactics, practiced in the FMF and at AWS, should be at least on the level of sophistication discussed in this article. If Marines are found wanting in the basics, the solution to this problem should not be lowering the level of education later in an individual's career. It should mean intensifying courses in fundamental soldiering at the earliest stage of that career (*3). Educating men for war takes work and years of time. It takes study. Of all the things that the profession of arms is, it is not plain commonsense. It never has been. There seems to be in the minds of some Marines a Utopian idea that somehow ours is the one profession in which a lot of academic study is not required, that commonsense is enough. It would be nice, indeed, if that were all there were to it, if all we had to do was go to the field and practice applying commonsense. I am in favor of practice, lots of it. But practice in the field in peacetime, with no real enemy, can lead us to believe that we can do all kinds of things that would be impractical, even ridiculous, on a real battlefield. Without some study of the realities of war, we would be like doctors, espousing a commonsense approach, ignoring medical theory, practicing on artificial dummies, cutting, tying off artificial vessels, succeeding in every way-until they worked on you and encountered the surprise of gangrene. "Lieutenant, it's all commonsense" is not very good advice. Did Lee use commonsense when he split his forces at Chancellorsville? Did Rommel use commonsense when he sent his tanks across the Somme over the narrow track of a railroad trestle under fire? Did MacArthur use commonsense when he chose Inchon as the point of landing? Was it commonsense that caused John Buford to recognize Cemetery Ridge as terrain worth fighting for and to commit his two small cavalry brigades to the risk of holding the Confederates until the Union Army could be guided into positions there? None of this was commonsense. It was uncommon genius. Commonsense produced the repeated headlong frontal assaults of World War I. Years went by without anyone questioning seriously whether hurling more men and more firepower directly against the enemy was the best solution. Obviously, what the French, British and Germans were doing to each other in the trenches made sense to most people, universally. The decisions were made by officers who would have told you that they acted on instinct, on good old-fashioned horse sense, and certainly in accordance with "conventional wisdom" of the time. More recently, the Argentines applied commonsense in the Falklands by defending Port Stanley, applying exclusively the "stronger form of war." Commonsense for the British might have dictated a direct assault on the Argentine positions; however, an indirect approach produced the effect desired. Did Brigadier Julian Thompson simply apply commonsense? It seems apparent that, instead, he applied an intimate knowledge of warfare, and some genius. It is intimate understanding and constant practice in decision making that enables a commander to decide whether he should be moving towards a new position or digging in. He never gets to rest his mind once he has assumed one posture or the other, because the situation is always subject to change, so long as the enemy is still intact. All is fair. Nothing is sacred. There are no rules. Though it seems one day that to dig in on the reverse slope is clearly the answer, the situation that night may dictate an attack the next morning, perhaps even as assault. There is no issue worth arguing, then, over whether the landing force should attack or defend. Leaders on the ground must be prepared to make that decision based on the situation. Units must be able to respond rapidly to changes in posture. The important issues are how fluid and responsive the landing force is and how mobile it is relative to the enemy and the conditions imposed by the terrain.
19
B3J3638
The idea of landing and setting up static defense immediately, right on the littoral, is not usually very attractive; historically it has a poor track record. While we should not categorically exclude that or any other option, defending with one's back to the wall, or to the sea, is not usually sparked by genius. The reason for this was discussed at the beginning of this article. It is initiative that is important. Backed up against the sea, having just violated somebody's sovereignty, with everything your opponent can muster coming at you, you do not leave yourself many options for initiative. The defense offers many ingenious opportunities to defeat the enemy. But an offensive option should always be kept open. Land and back him up to the wall. Get in deep where he never planned on finding you and push him into the sea. A little uncommon sense can go a long way. *1 See MCG articles/commentaries by Maj J.D. Burke, Sep82, pp.67-71; Maj E.J. Robeson IV, LtCol L.G. Karch, Capt R.S. Moore, LtCol M.D. Wyly, Maj J.D. Burke, Dec82, pp.24-26; Maj K.W. Estes, Jan83, p.11; LtCol M.D. Wyly, Jan83, pp.34-38; Maj E.J. Robeson IV, Apr83, p.24. *2 Clausewitz wrote about this tendency to confuse the two terms 150 years ago (see Chapter 5, Book Six,) however, it warrants reiteration from time to time. *3 See Maj S.W. McKenzie's comment on the Royal Marines' 30-week basic training course for enlisted Marines in MCG, Aug82, p.70. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction or distribution is prohibited without permission. Marine Corps Association
Notes
20
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3J3718
Importance
The offense is one of the principles of war and one of the most important concepts in maneuver warfare. Offense allows initiative, which lets us dictate the terms of battle and bend the enemy to our will. The better our offensives are planned and executed, the longer they can be sustained and the more likely they are to result in decisive success.
In this Lesson
This lesson will give the student officer an understanding of the tactics, techniques, and procedures necessary to conduct a successful attack at the provisional rifle platoon level. This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Types of Attack Preparation Phase/Begin Planning Arrange/Make Reconnaissance Complete the Plan Issue the Order Supervise Conduct Phase/Movement to the Objective Actions on the Objective Consolidation Phase References Notes Page 5 5 9 14 18 18 18 20 23 23 24
B3J3718
B3J3718
B3J3718
Types of Attack
Hasty MCDP 1-0 defines a hasty attack as an attack when the commander decides to trade preparation time for speed to exploit an opportunity. A hasty attack is used when a fleeting opportunity must be rapidly exploited. There is minimal time for planning and coordination, so many of the detailed planning considerations used for deliberate attacks will be abbreviated or eliminated altogether. Hasty attacks rely on intuitive vice analytical decision-making, and orders are usually brief and sometimes even given over the radio. To be successful, hasty attack plans must be simple and flexible, and execution will rely heavily on unit SOPs and battle drills to replace the lack of detail in the order. Realistic training and experience will greatly increase a units proficiency at hasty attacks. Deliberate MCDP 1-0 defines a deliberate attack as a type of offensive action characterized by pre-planned and coordinated employment of firepower and maneuver to close with and destroy the enemy. Deliberate attacks are used when there is no need to rapidly exploit an enemy weakness, or when a hasty attack will not defeat the enemy. Deliberate attacks rely on analytical decision-making for detailed planning that coordinates all available resources to allow the unit to close with and destroy the enemy. Even in detailed planning there will be no 100% solutionthere is still a need to maintain the tempo of the offense and execute the plan before changes on the battlefield render it obsolete. Commanders must continue to train and gain experience that will make their planning more timely, efficient, and effective. This lesson will deal with the planning and execution of a platoon deliberate attack.
Preparation Phase
BEGIN PLANNING
Planning begins when the commander receives the warning order or operations order from higher. The commander analyzes his mission and highers intent to determine what he is doing and, more importantly, why. The commander looks for both specified tasks (deliberately stated in the order) and implied tasks (not stated in the order, but necessary to accomplish the mission and/or intent). For example: At 1200, 1st Platoon destroys the enemy squad guarding the bridge at 873 341 IOT allow the battalion to continue its attack to the north. In this case
5 Basic Officer Course
B3J3718
Frontal Attack
A frontal attack is used to rapidly destroy a weak enemy force, or to fix an enemy in place to support a flanking attack. The frontal attack is simple and easy to control, but attacks the enemys strongest point. Frontal attacks utilize fire and movement, as demonstrated on R5. In fire and movement, one buddy suppresses the enemy in order to allow the other buddy to move closer to the enemy. Marines use the 300 mil rule to avoid fratricide. A flanking attack uses fire and maneuver in order to gain a position of advantage against an enemy vulnerability. A flanking attack usually uses a support by fire position that diverts attention away from the main effort and uses fires to fix the enemy in place, preventing them from reorienting on the main effort. This can also be accomplished by fire support assets, which is a case where a platoon could conduct a flanking attack without a support by fire position. A support by fire position makes a flanking attack more complex than a frontal attack, and requires more planning and coordination to avoid fratricide. Fire and maneuver is different from fire and movement. In fire and maneuver, one unit (such as a squad support by fire) and/or fire support agencies (such as mortars or artillery) uses FIRES to fix the enemy, preventing him from moving or reorienting his forces. This allows another unit to MANEUVER to a position of advantagei.e. the enemy flank. Once in a position of advantage, the maneuver unit finishes the assault using fire and movement. The commander uses fire support coordination measures, tactical control measures, and the signal plan to avoid fratricide.
ACHIEVING A DECISION
After his initial estimate of the situation, a platoon commander must develop a tentative plan, based off of the EMLCOA that is derived from the Tactical Planning Process (METT-TC). This decision will drive the leaders reconnaissance and rehearsals that are conducted prior to crossing the line of departure, and its suitability for the mission is essential to a units success. Sound, tactical decision-making is one of the most important responsibilities of a Marine Rifle Platoon Commander, and the reason that we emphasize this so heavily at The Basic School. The foundation of a Platoon Commanders tactical thought must be based upon:
B3J3718
This initial decision-making will allow a commander to choose a form of maneuver and task organization, which is enough information to issue a warning order. The warning order allows subordinate leaders to begin their own planning while the commander writes the full order. They can build a terrain model, prepare mission-essential gear, or conduct rehearsals that apply to the situation, mission, task organization, and chosen form of maneuver listed in the warning order. Utilizing this time will allow subordinates to focus better on the specific details when the commander briefs the full order.
B3J3718
B3J3718
Arrange/Make Reconnaissance
COC Coordination
COC coordination can provide updates to all aspects of a commanders METT-TC analysis, but is especially useful for completing the picture on Troops and Fire Support Available. COC coordination will likely be conducted at least twice: before the commander writes his order, so he can update his METT-TC and plan more realistically, and after the commander writes his order, when his detailed planning has identified more clearly the support his unit needs to accomplish the mission. The following are a few items to consider when planning COC Coordination: S-2. Ground, signal, and human intelligence sources may be able to provide information on the terrain and enemy. Check debriefs from units that may have patrolled the area before for information on terrain. UAVs can recon the route and the objective and provide real-time information on terrain and enemy. The intelligence officer can better support you if he or she knows what information you need to plan your mission. S-3. If available and requested, aviation assets can recon the route and objective to provide real-time information on terrain and enemy. The battalion may also use aviation assets as part of preparatory fires. Submit list of targets to support leaders recon. Submit list of targets to support the attack. Confirm the locations and missions of adjacent and supporting units, to include CASEVAC assets, reinforcements, and fire support. S-4. Request logistics necessary to accomplish the mission, to include ammunition, chow, water, specialized equipment such as breach kits, transportation, fuel, etc. Try to anticipate what missions might follow the attack and what logistics they might require. Carry extra logistics into the attack or coordinate a resupply to be delivered immediately on consolidation if follow-on missions are known. S-6. Get updated CEOI and challenges/passwords. Check fills and timing on encrypted radios. A platoon will need a minimum of two radios (one for support by fire, one for maneuver) to ensure the best command and control in a flanking attack.
B3J3718
Priorities of recon should work from the enemy back to friendlypicking an assault position first is a waste of time if the patrol discovers later that the enemy is in a different location or has a different orientation. The following is a sample priority of recon: Confirm location and orientation of enemy defense, crew-served weapons, obstacles, and security. Identify the enemy critical vulnerability. Identify an assault position that will best allow the ME to exploit the enemy critical vulnerability. Identify a support by fire position that will best support the ME Identify routes and tactical control measures that will best support the scheme of maneuver.
When choosing a support by fire position, the commander should consider the following: The support by fire position should ideally be located on the enemy frontage (see Diagram 1 above). This allows the support by fire element to effectively fix and suppress the entire enemy defense, whereas if it is located on a flank it may only be able to effectively fix and suppress that flank. Additionally, if the support by fire element is located on the frontage of the enemy defense, it allows the maneuver element to attack from a flank. The support by fire positions direction of fire should ideally be
10 Basic Officer Course
B3J3718
located 90 degrees offset from the maneuver elements direction of assault (see Diagram 1 above). This allows the maneuver element to advance as close to the enemy as possible under friendly suppression without the risk of fratricide. The closer to 0 or 180 degrees offset the position is, the sooner there is a risk of fratricide, meaning the maneuver element will have to cover a greater distance using only its own fire and movement. Should have cover and concealment. This protects the support by fire element and promotes an occupation by stealth vice force: o Stealth. An occupation by stealth is when the enemy does not observe the occupation. The enemy is not aware of the support by fire position until they open fire. This method promotes surprise and protects the support by fire element. o Force. The enemy observes the occupation, or currently occupies the planned support by fire position. In this case, the maneuver element or fire support assets would isolate the position (by suppressing any enemy that could reinforce or fire on the position) in order to allow the support by fire element to seize the position and commence fire on the objective. An occupation by force requires better timing than an occupation by stealth because, unlike an occupation by stealth, the support by fire position must establish fire superiority on the objective immediately upon occupation. Since the enemy is aware of the support by fire occupation, the commander should not occupy the support by fire position until he is ready for their fires. This promotes surprise, protects the SBF element, and conserves ammunition.
Some Tactical Control Measures that will be useful in controlling a platoon attack are listed below. See the sample scheme of maneuver in the COMPLETE THE PLAN section of this lesson for examples of their use. Boundary: A line which delineates surface areas for the purpose of facilitating coordination and deconfliction of operations between adjacent units, formations, or areas. (Army) - 1. A control measure used to define the right, left, rear, and forward limits of an area of operation. 2. A control measure normally drawn along identifiable terrain features and used to delineate areas of tactical responsibility between adjacent units and between higher headquarters to the rear of subordinate units. Within their boundaries, units may maneuver within the overall plan without close coordination with neighboring units unless otherwise restricted. Direct fire may be placed across boundaries on clearly identified enemy targets without prior coordination, provided friendly forces are not endangered. Indirect fire also may be used after prior coordination. Assembly Area: An area in which a command is assembled preparatory to further action. Attack Position: The last position occupied by the assault echelon before crossing the line of departure. Line of Departure: In land warfare, a line designated to coordinate the departure of attack elements. Checkpoint: Predetermined point on the ground used to control
11 Basic Officer Course
B3J3718
movement and tactical maneuver. Phase Line: A line used for control and coordination of military operations, usually a terrain feature extending across the zone of action. Units normally report crossing PLs, but do not halt unless specifically directed. Release Point: A well-defined point on a route at which the elements composing a column return under the authority of their respective commanders, each one of these elements continuing its movement toward its own appropriate destination. Target Reference Point: An easily recognizable point on the ground (either natural or man-made) used to initiate, distribute, and control fires. TRPs are designated by maneuver leaders from platoon through battalion to define battalion, company, platoon, section, squad, or individual sectors of fire and observation usually within an engagement area. TRPs can also designate the center of an area where the commander plans to distribute or converge the fires of all his weapons rapidly. TRPs are designated using the standard target symbol and numbers issued by maneuver commanders. Once approved by the battalion fire support officer, TRPs can be designated as indirect fire targets using the standard target symbol with letters and numbers issued by the fire support officer. Assault Position: That position between the line of departure and the objective in an attack from which forces assault the objective. Ideally, it is the last covered and concealed position before reaching the objective. Objective: The physical object of the action taken (for example, a definite terrain feature, the seizure or holding of which is essential to the commander's plan, or, the destruction of an enemy force without regard to terrain features). Limit of Advance: An easily recognized terrain feature beyond which attacking elements will not advance. Linkup Point: An easily identifiable point on the ground where two forces conducting a linkup meet. When one force is stationary, linkup points normally are established where the moving force's routes of advance intersect the stationary force's security elements. Linkup points for two moving forces are established on boundaries where the two forces are expected to converge.
The commander will usually issue his operations order before departing on the leaders recon. This allows subordinates to conduct detailed planning and rehearsals during the leaders recon. When the commander returns, he can brief any changes to the plan resulting from information gained on the leaders recon.
12
B3J3718
LU 1
ASLT POS 1 2 3
WEST CREEK
RP 3
100 meters
Diagram 2 depicts the tactical control measures for the example scheme of maneuver.
13
EAST CREEK
LO A
PL GREEN
B3J3718
14
B3J3718
A detailed fire support plan will support the scheme of maneuver. Fires in the attack are broken into three categories: Preparatory fires. Conducted before the platoon steps into the attack, usually at the battalion level or higher. These fires isolate the objective by targeting enemy command and control, logistics, fire support, reinforcements, etc. Fires in support of conduct. These fires are used by the platoon commander to support the platoons movement to and actions on the objective. The platoon commander should target the enemy security plan (LP/OPs, patrol routes), the enemy main defense (objective), and likely reinforcement routes. When suppressing the main defense to allow the platoon to close with the objective, the platoon commander should echelon fires. Echeloning fires is a technique by which a commander uses multiple fire support agencies in succession to achieve continuous suppression on an objective, allowing the maneuver element to close. This economy of fires uses the minimum amount of ammunition necessary to effectively fix and suppress the enemy. For example: o The maneuver element will be exposed to the enemy 800 meters from the objective. Artillery begins firing on the objective when the maneuver element is 800 meters from the objective. In this situation, 400 meters is as close as the commander wants to get to the artillery fires in order to avoid fratricide. o At 500 meters from the objective, the commander initiates 81mm mortar fire on the objective. This allows the mortars to be on target and effectively suppressing when the artillery fire on the objective ceases. o At 400 meters, the artillery ceases or shifts to a deeper target (such as enemy reinforcements or withdrawing units). 60mm mortar fire begins on the objective. o At 300 meters, 81mm mortar fire ceases or shifts to a deeper target. o At 250 meters, the support by fire element begins suppression on the objective. The support by fire element will achieve effective suppression faster than indirect fires because they do not have to rely on a forward observer. o At 200 meters, 60mm mortar fire ceases or shifts to a deeper target. o At 50 meters, support by fire suppression ceases or shifts to deeper targets, and the maneuver element finishes the assault using fire and movement. Fires in support of consolidation. These fires target likely enemy withdrawal and counterattack routes.
15
B3J3718
Tasks
Tasks provide subordinate units with their missions. Tasking statements should include an appropriate tactical task and a clear purpose for what the commander intends the unit to accomplish. Avoid overloading tasking statements with implied tasks (ensure your radios work before stepping off) or coordinating instructions (you will be first in the order of movement). Ensure that supporting effort tasking statements are worded so that supporting efforts understand how they support the main effort. For example: 1st Squad: ME. O/O, destroy the enemy on the southern half of Co Obj A IOT allow the company to continue its attack to the north. o The ME is the platoons bid for success and, as such, will accomplish the platoons mission (destroy enemy IOT allow the company to continue its attack north). 2nd Squad: SE 1. O/O, destroy the enemy on the northern half of Co Obj A IOT prevent the enemy from withdrawing from or interfering with the ME attack. BPT assume the ME mission. o In a flanking attack, the ME squad is probably the only one destroying the enemys main defensive line. SE 1 will be destroying enemy behind the main defensive line; this may be enemy withdrawing from the ME attack (enemy attempting to retreat or move to alternate or supplementary positions), or enemy interfering with the ME attack (enemy supporting assets such as communications or logistics, or enemy reinforcements). Since this will probably involve less fighting than the ME, the commander may shift this effort to the ME mission to maintain tempo if the ME is significantly slowed by heavy fighting. 3rd Squad: SE 2. O/O, suppress the enemy on Co Obj A IOT allow the ME to close with the enemy right flank. o SE 2s suppression will fix the enemy in place, preventing them from reorienting or effectively firing on the ME attack.
Tasks (Continued)
Coordinating Instructions
Detailed coordinating instructions support the rest of the order. They coordinate actions between two or more units, and include any of highers coordinating instructions that pertain to your unit. They include, but are not limited to, the examples provided in your Combat Orders Student Handouts.
16
B3J3718
Ensure the platoon has enough ammunition, chow, water, batteries, special equipment, transportation, fuel, etc. to accomplish the mission and plan resupply for any known follow-on missions. Have a plan to deal with casualties and EPWs during any part of the attack.
Some additional signals necessary for an attack using a support by fire are: Commence: When to begin firing. If occupying by force, this will also be the signal to seize the position. Remember: o Original: the signal will not be confused with other events on the battlefield. If the commander tells the support by fire element to occupy when mortar suppression begins, what happens if the enemy fires mortars or the maneuver element has to use fire support moving to the assault position? o Appropriate: the signal should be received by the intended unit in a timely manner. A smoke grenade is not an appropriate signal for a night attack because it is not visible. It is also not an appropriate signal for commence or cease fire, because it takes time to billow up and be recognized. o Redundant: Radio is usually the primary signal, but the commander should have back-up signals in case the radio does not work. Just because there is a redundant signal does not mean it should be usedremember that part of the intent of a support by fire is to draw enemy attention away from the maneuver element so that they can achieve surprise. If the commander fires a pop-up to tell the support by fire element to occupy, he has revealed the maneuver elements location to the enemy. Shift (sometimes): When the maneuver element reaches the objective, the support by fire element may still able to safely suppress deep targets or another part of the objective. Cease: When support by fire element can no longer support the maneuver element without the risk of fratricide, or when their fires are no longer needed. Displace: Tells the support by fire element to execute the displacement criteria, usually briefed in scheme of maneuver and/or the support by fire elements task. Sample displacement criteria can be found in the example scheme of maneuver above. Displacement criteria are: o Method: By unit or by echelon. By unit means the whole unit will pick up and displace at once, which is ideal for speed. By echelon means the unit will split and one half will move while the other covers their movement, which may be used if security is more important than speed. o Objective: Where the unit is going. o Route: Most direct or most covered and concealed. Most
17 Basic Officer Course
B3J3718
direct is simply the fastest route, and may not necessarily translate to a straight line (instead of fording a river, the support by fire element may detour a little bit to cross a bridge). Most covered and concealed is used when security is more important than speed. Time: The displacement signal.
Supervise
Supervision that the commander should conduct in the preparatory phase includes, but is not limited to: Rehearsals: Rehearsals ensure that the commanders plan is both valid (realistic and within the units capabilities) and understood by subordinates. Pre-Combat Checks: This is an individual Marine responsibility. Based on criteria (checklists or guidance) provided by the commander, Marines will ensure that missionessential gear is present and functional. Pre-Combat Inspections: This is a unit leader responsibility. Leaders at all levels are responsible for ensuring that their Marines have completed the pre-combat checks.
Supervision in the conduct and consolidation phases involves the commander ensuring that subordinates are adhering to his orders and intent.
Conduct Phase
MOVEMENT TO THE OBJECTIVE
During movement to the objective, terrain is the primary cover. The platoon commander controls the unit using formations and tactical control measures, reporting progress and any significant changes to the situation or scheme of maneuver to higher. Fires are used as necessary to clear or bypass enemy security elements, but should be avoided if possible to achieve surprise. Formations during movement to the objective are based on METT-TC, and will reflect the relative importance of speed/control versus security/deployability. The order of movement in the formation should protect the main effort until the unit is ready to conduct actions on the objective.
18
B3J3718
Column
Column provides the best speed and control, and is ideal when conducting night operations or moving through thick vegetation and canalizing terrain. Column provides the best security and deployability to the flanks, but the worst to the front.
Wedge
Wedge is a flexible formation that provides good speed and control and good all-around security and deployability. It is used when the enemy situation is uncertain.
Echelon
Echelon is slower and more difficult to control than many formations. It provides excellent security and deployability to the front and in the direction of the echelon. It is typically used to guard an exposed flank.
Vee
Vee is slow and difficult to control because there are two lead elements. Security is excellent to the front and good to the flanks. Vee is typically used when the enemy is to the front or when crossing a large open area.
19
B3J3718
Line
Slowest and most difficult to control. Excellent security and deployability to the front, but poor to the flanks. Line is typically used in the assault once oriented on a known enemy.
Only EFFECTIVE fires allow maneuver. A commander achieves this by: Ensuring that rounds are on target and suppression is adequate before exposing a maneuver unit in an area where they could be engaged by the enemy. Ensuring proper distribution of fires across the objective. If everyone focuses their fires on one machinegun, suppression overall will not be effective. Distribute fires by using target reference points and ADDRACs to guide subordinates fires. For indirect fires, consider using linear targets (if enemy location and orientation is known in advance). Ensuring targets are prioritized. If the entire enemy force cannot be effectively suppressed, focus fires on the highest priority targets. For example, crew served weapons and enemy positions with the best fields of fire on the maneuver element. If the maneuver element is attacking the enemys right flank, it is more important that those positions be effectively suppressed than the left flank positions (unless the enemy attempts to maneuver his left flank for a counterattack).
20
B3J3718
Rates of fire typically used by the support by fire position are sustained and rapid, and the capabilities and limitations of each are listed below: Sustained: The sustained rate of fire provides average suppression and conserves ammunitionin most cases, a round on target every five seconds will keep the enemys head down as effectively as two or three rounds every five seconds. The sustained rate of fire will not overheat weapons, and should be the default rate of fire unless a higher rate is needed to achieve effective suppression. Rapid: The rapid rate of fire provides more suppression, but uses double the ammunition. This will cause weapons to overheat and malfunction more often, and begins to affect soldiers loada machinegun squad will go through 14 pounds of ammunition per minute at the rapid rate. The rapid rate can be used to achieve fire superiority when commencing fire, when the maneuver element slows because of effective enemy fire, or when the maneuver element is about to reach the objective.
The commander must take time/distance into account when planning for the assault. During the assault, the commander and the support by fire element leader are both responsible for maintaining situational awareness on how much ammunition remains in the support by fire position versus the maneuver elements distance from the objective: ASM A is ammunition, S is suppression, and M is maneuver S = Weapons firing average rate of fire (in rounds per minute) M = Distance to objective (in meters) average rate of movement (in meters per minute) For example, a support by fire squad has 9 M16s and 3 M249s. The commander estimates the M16s will have an average rate of fire of 20 rounds per minute and the M249s will have an average rate of fire of 150 rounds per minute (between the sustained and rapid rates). The maneuver element has 200 meters of open ground to cover to reach the objective, and the commander estimates the maneuver element can move at 50 meters per minute with effective suppression. The M16s need at least (920) (20050) rounds, or 720 rounds. The M249s need at least (3150) (20050) rounds, or 1800 rounds. Once in the assault, the amount of ammunition and distance to the objective are constants. Weapons firing, the rate of fire, and rate of movement are variables. That means that if the maneuver element is moving more slowly than planned, the commander has three options: o Reduce the overall rate of fire. o Reduce or cease fires on lower priority enemy, such as the opposite flank from the maneuver element (reduce the amount of weapons firing). o Increase the rate of movement for the maneuver element. This may require temporarily increasing the rate of fire if effective enemy fires are slowing the maneuver element.
21
B3J3718
Where to place leadership and automatic weapons in the support by fire position is another consideration: Automatic weapons. Placing automatic weapons on the flank the maneuver element is assaulting provides better suppression on targets that affect the maneuver element most, as well as better geometries of fire. Distributing them across the support by fire position provides better overall distribution of fires. Leadership. Placing the support by fire element leader in the center of the position provides the best overall control of fires; however, the flank the maneuver element is assaulting is the point of friction. From that flank, the support by fire element leader can more effectively direct the fires that will support the maneuver element most, as well as have a better perspective on the geometries of his fires as they affect the maneuver element.
During actions on the objective, the platoon commander has several responsibilities: Control fire support and the support by fire element. The platoon commander must ensure that the objective is effectively suppressed and isolated before exposing his maneuver element to the enemy fields of fire. This will involve calling for and adjusting fires and ensuring that timing between agencies is correct when fires are echeloned. The platoon commander must also track geometries and rates of fireslowing rates of fire to conserve ammunition, raising them to increase suppression, or ceasing them to prevent fratricide. Control the maneuver element. To do this, the platoon commander will use his base unit. Remember that the base unit is not always the main effort or the center squad; it is the unit that best allows the platoon commander to control the formation. The base unit may be the lead element in the platoon column for movement, or a unit that will advance along a guiding feature in the assault. The base unit may not be the same throughout the entire attack. The platoon commander controls maneuver element fires by giving TRPs and ADDRACs to his squad leaders in order to ensure proper distribution of fires. The platoon commander controls movement by issuing specific direction to his base unit. Shift left and shift right invariably leads to a slinky effect, where everyone overcorrects in one direction and then the other. The platoon commander should pick identifiable objects ahead of the base unit where he wants the base unit to be: 1st Squad, left flank on that dead tree, right flank on that bunker. The base unit shifts to between those objects and the other unit(s) adjust off its movement. Coordinate with higher and adjacent. This may involve requesting casualty evacuation or reinforcement, or updating them on a changing situation (such as enemy withdrawing into an adjacent unit AO).
22
B3J3718
Consolidation Phase
During consolidation, the platoon commander will go through his ACE criteria. Some items will be running concurrently; obviously the aid and litter teams and corpsmen will be collecting and treating casualties while the platoon is setting security and redistributing ammunition. Casualty evacuation and equipment accountability should not be started until the platoons security is set: Ammunition. Redistribute ammunition and prepare for counterattack. Casualties. Collect and evacuate casualties, EPWs, and intelligence. Reassign key billets vacated by casualties. Equipment. Account for weapons, equipment, ammunition, fuel, batteries, water, and chow.
The platoon commander should also submit reports to higher; at the minimum, this should include a SITREP. It may also include specialized reports as required, as well as any resupply requests that the platoon needs to accomplish follow-on missions. At this point, the platoon commander should planexecute pre-plannedfollow-on operations. Follow-on operations may be offensive, defensive, or retrograde.
References
Reference Number
FMFM 2-7 MCDP-1 MCDP 3-11.1A MCRP 3-11.1B MCRP 3-11.2A MCRP 3-16A MCRP 3-16C MCWP 3-1 MCWP 3-11.1 MCWP 3-11.2 MCWP 3-11.3
Reference Title
Fire Support in MAGTF Operations Warfighting Commanders Tactical Handbook Small Unit Leaders Guide to Weather and Terrain Marine Troop Leaders Guide Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process Support for the Combined Arms Commander Ground Combat Operations Marine Rifle Company/Platoon Marine Rifle Squad Scouting and Patrolling
23
B3J3718
Notes
24
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3J3778
Importance
B3J3778
In This Lesson
This lesson will give you a framework of how to make sound tactical decisions and begin to understand the tactical decision-making process in the defense at the platoon level. This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Characteristics of the Defense Types of Defensive Operations Forms of Defensive Maneuver Sequence of the Defense Planning Phase Preparation Phase Execution phase Summary Annex A: Defensive Op Order Example Annex B: Fire Plan Sketch Construction References Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Notes Page 6 10 11 14 14 31 39 41 42 45 50 51 52
B3J3778
B3J3778
B3J3778
B3J3778
B3J3778
B3J3778
B3J3778
MOBILE DEFENSE
10
POSITION DEFENSE
Basic Officer Course
B3J3778
Enemy
b. Strongpoint: A fortified defensive position designed to deny the enemy certain terrain as well as the use of an avenue of approach. It differs from a battle position in that it is designed to be occupied for an extended period of time. It is established on critical terrain and must be held for the defense to succeed. A strongpoint is organized for all-around defense and should have sufficient supplies and ammunition to continue to fight even if surrounded or cut off from resupply.
CSS
11
B3J3778
d. Reverse-Slope: A reverse slope is any slope which descends away from the enemy. A reverse slope defense is organized so that the main defensive positions are masked from enemy observation and direct fire by a topograhipical crest. A reverse slope aids the defender in bringing massed surprised fires to bear against an attacking enemy. While the crest is not occupied in strength, control of the crest by fire and employment of obstacles is key to success.
12
B3J3778
f. Linear: This technique allows interlocking and overlapping observation and fields of fire across the units front. The bulk of the units combat power is well forward. Sufficient resources must be available to provide adequate combat power across the frontage to detect and stop an attack. The unit relies on fighting from wellprepared mutually supporting positions. It uses a high volume of direct and indirect fires to stop the attacker. The main concern when fighting a linear defense is the lack of flexibility and the difficulty of both seizing the initiative and seeking out enemy weaknesses. When the enemy has a mobility advantage, a linear defense might be extremely risky. Obstacles, indirect fires, and contingency plans are key to this maneuver. The unit depends upon surprise, well-prepared positions, and deadly accurate fires to defeat the enemy. Contingency plans for the least engaged unit must be thoroughly rehearsed. g. Non-Linear: The nonlinear defense is the most decentralized and dynamic position defense conducted infantry units. It is frequently used when operating against an enemy force that has equal or greater firepower and mobility capabilities. This type of defense is almost exclusively enemy-oriented and is not well suited for retaining terrain. To be successful, this defense depends on surprise, offensive action, and the initiative of small-unit leaders. It is a very fluid defense with little static positioning involved. An infantry company or larger force will normally conduct a non-linear defense.
13
B3J3778
14
B3J3778
+200
AA 1
2. Determine likely enemy schemes of maneuver Once the possible enemy routes towards an area are developed, the platoon commander uses them to develop likely enemy schemes of maneuver. The platoon commander identifies the ways in which the enemy can use the terrain along the respective routes to their advantage in order to accomplish their overall goals. The enemys equipment, order of battle, weapons employment considerations, and capabilities at this time on the battlefield assist the leader during this step. This analysis enables the platoon commander to look at the advantages and disadvantages associated with each possible enemy scheme of maneuver.
15 Basic Officer Course
AA 2
B3J3778
SOM 1
- Sqd secures +200, observes fires on BP. Plt(-) crosses bridge -3 Sqd Online frontal assault on BP.
+200
16
SOM 2
- Sqd secures crossing site to E. - 2 Sqd online frontal assault with 1 Sqd SBF on flank.
B3J3778
3B. SOM 2 1. Enemy is concealed while crossing river 2. Speed while crossing river decreased due to lack of bridge at crossing site. 3. Control more difficult due to dispersed units.
EA Reaper
17
B3J3778
4. Emplace weapons
TL BLUE
A2
A1
A3 A4
A5
TL WHITE
A. Develop sqd sectors of fire which support EA Reaper. B. Emplace MGs Designate PDF or FPL which support defensive SOM. B6
+200
C. Designate TRPs (A1-A5, B6) which will help mass / distribute fires at appropriate locations within EA Reaper. D. Designate trigger lines (Red,White,Blue) based on enemy avenue of approach to help synchronization of defensive SOM. E. Develop supplementary position sectors of fire to cover possible alternate enemy avenue of approach. F. Alternate positions designated.
TL RED
18
B3J3778
-X X-X-X-X-X-X -X -X-X -X-X-X-X -X -X-X -X X -X -X-X -X-X -X -X-X -X-X X-X -X -X-X XXXX -X -X-X -X-X X-X XXXX XXXX X XX XXXX TL BLUE XXXX XXXX X =X XX XX XX X= =X XX X X= XX XX A2 XX XX X= XX =X XX XX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A1
XX XX XX A3 XX XX X XX X X XX X= XX =X X XX =X XX XX
A5 A4
TL WHITE
B6
-Obstacles should be placed based on their desired effect. -A. Tactical wire is emplaced to achieve desired effect -B. Supplementary wire emplaced to disguise desired tactical wire effects.
+200
TL RED
19
B3J3778
-X
X X-XX-X-
XX =X X= XX
X -X-X X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X X- X- X -X-X-X X- X- X X-XXX-XXX-XXX XX-XXXXX X-XXX -XXXXX X XXXX X XXXX TL BLUE XXX XXXX X =X XX XX X= XX X X XX A2 =X XX XX XX = XX XX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
204 AE5
AE5202
XX XX X
A1
A3 XX XX XX X X XX XX X= XX =X X XX =X XX X X
A5 A4
TL WHITE
AE5203
B6
-AE5201: Suppress IOT disrupt approach. -AE5202: Suppress En main body IOT isolate advance party in EA -AE5203: Suppress En recon elements IOT allow patrols to break-contact
+200 AE5201
TL RED
20
B3J3778
B3J3778
SE2
ME
22
B3J3778
Target Reference Points: Easily recognizable points on the ground (either natural or man-made) used to initiate, distribute, and control fires. Fire team and squad leaders must all understand their respective TRPs to ensure proper distribution of fires. Trigger Lines: A designated linear feature (selected along identifiable terrain) in an engagement area used to commence massed fires at a predetermined range. Trigger lines assist in synchronizing the defensive plan to maximize weapons effects in the engagement area. Units and weapon systems should understand which trigger line is used to commence their respective fires. Engagement Criteria: Normally associated with trigger lines or specific enemy elements, engagement criteria allows Marines to engage enemy targets at the proper time in accordance with the platoon commanders overall scheme of maneuver. Simplified, engagement criteria tells Marines WHEN to engage. Engagement criteria facilitates decentralized execution and proper synchronization to maximize weapons effects in the
23 Basic Officer Course
B3J3778
24
B3J3778
25
B3J3778
26
B3J3778
27
B3J3778
Least engaged unit Company level and above units utilize a reserve. At the platoon level, the least engage unit allows the platoon commander to incorporate offensive action in the scheme of maneuver once the enemy has
28 Basic Officer Course
B3J3778
29
B3J3778
30
B3J3778
Preparation Phase
B. Preparation Phase Once the initial planning phase and leaders reconnaissance has been conducted, the platoon can move to and begin preparing their defensive position. Defensive operations are LABOR INTENSIVE and require effective use of time to maximize the defenders advantages prior to the engagement with the enemy. a. Occupation of the position: The platoon commander utilizes occupation methods in order to facilitate control while the platoon moves into position. Also, a poorly planned and orchestrated occupation will make the platoon vulnerable to enemy attack due to a low security posture. There are three techniques which can be used to occupy a position: Crows Foot: This technique utilized squad and fire team release point to move units into position while the units are oriented in the direction in the enemy. The advantage of the Crows foot is the forward security posture which each element maintains during occupation, allowing for immediate reaction to premature enemy contact. However, due to the multiple release points, this technique is more difficult to control and demands that unit leaders at every level know the exact location of all release points. Using guides and marking release points can increase the control when using this method.
Bent L: This technique allows the platoon to remain centrally located throughout the occupation of the position. Utilizing an anchor point, the platoon moves in a column until the location of primary positions, then turns perpendicular to the direction of enemy approach and moves into position. The bent L technique increases the direct control by the platoon commander. However, the platoon is more vulnerable to attack until all elements have reached their primary positions.
31
B3J3778
Combination: The combination technique uses a hybrid of both previous techniques to achieve a balance between control and security. Release points are identified until a certain point where the units move into position using the bent L.
The platoon commander must choose the occupation technique which facilitates the best control and deployability based on the enemy situation and terrain. b. Sectors of Fire and Position development Once the primary positions have been occupied, the platoon commander, along with the squad leaders, should confirm the sectors of fire developed during the leaders reconnaissance. Once confirmed, all fire teams and above can begin to develop the positions which cover their respective sectors of fire. At the individual level during an enemy attack, the maintenance of sectors of fire are adhered to through sectors bags. Sector bags are seen in the diagram below. Sector bag construction will be covered in more depth at the Defensive Tactical Exercise Without Troops (TEWT)
32
B3J3778
Sandbag Configurations
Base Bags
E N E M Y
1 3
(Shoot an Azimuth) -Continually improve position Space for Bipods -Insert stick as PDF aiming stake
-Bags are listed in order of emplacement -Do not overfill bags -Make sure bags 4-7 align with your field of fire
4 1 3 2
6 4
Half fill to allow for Ammo Drum
1 3
5 6
PDF Stake
Parapet
Parapet
Fighting positions enable the defender to capitalize on preparation time, maximizing cover from enemy weapons effects. A skirmishers trench and two man fighting position can be seen in the diagrams below. Their construction will be covered in more depth at the defensive TEWT.
Skirmishers Trench
33
B3J3778
B3J3778
35
B3J3778
B3J3778
37
B3J3778
38
B3J3778
Execution Phase
C. Execution Phase Up to this point, the focus of this class has been planning and preparing during defensive operations. The planning phase consisted of all actions prior to crossing the line of departure by the platoon. The preparation phase began after occupation of the primary defensive position, focusing on effectively utilizing time and the terrain to prepare for the engagement with the enemy. Ultimately, all of the platoons actions must be focused toward defeating an enemy attack. The execution phase describes the actions conducted during the engagement with the enemy. While preparing the defensive position is labor intensive and will take a large amount of the platoons time, the platoon commander must realize that these actions are only worthwhile if they lead towards effectively defeating the enemy in contact. The execution phase can be thought of using the following steps: a. Gain and Maintain Enemy Contact: Gaining and maintaining contact with the enemy despite their efforts to destroy friendly reconnaissance elements is vital to the success of defensive operations. As the enemys attack begins, the platoon commanders first concerns are to confirm the committed enemy units positions and capabilities, determine the enemys intent and direction of attack, and gain time to react. The platoon commander accomplishes these elements through the platoons patrolling effort forward of the engagement area. The platoon commander uses the available information, in conjunction with his military judgment, to determine the point at which the enemy is committed to a course of action. The platoon commander must plan for the actions of the patrolling effort once contact with the enemy is made, specifically prior to the platoons primary positions beginning their fires. Detailed and well rehearsed plans will mitigate any potential for fratricide during this moment. b. Disrupt the Enemy: After making contact with the enemy, the platoon commander seeks to disrupt his plan, his ability to control his forces, and his ability to employ supporting arms. Ideally, the results of the platoon commanders shaping operations should force a disorganized enemy, whose ability to synchronize its elements has been degraded, to conduct a movement to contact against prepared defenses. Actions during this step should force the enemy into avenues of approach which lead them into the engagement area. These actions destroy the enemys cohesion and disrupt the tempo of his approach. Properly planned long range defensive fires and the forward elements of the obstacle plan help to facilitate this step. The platoon commander must understand the importance of timing during these actions. The enemy cannot be allowed to recover from their effects prior to the decisive point in the engagement area.
39 Basic Officer Course
B3J3778
40
B3J3778
Summary
This class has covered the doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures of platoon level defensive operations. Platoon commanders must always remember that the offense and defense must co-exist. A good leader is able to transition seamlessly between the two. While the defense is labor and resource intensive, the platoon commander must remember the overall goal of defensive operations: An integrated and synchronized plan in which the effects of all resources are maximized in the engagement area to defeat an enemy attack. Annexes A. Defensive Operations Order Considerations B. Platoon Fire Plan Sketch
41
B3J3778
I have four pre-planned targets: AE 5202 (UT 1234 5678). Suspected enemy avenue of approach. Suppress the enemy IOT turn the enemy platoon towards Engagement Area Reaper. The LP/OP will be the observer and will contact L 3/11 over the artillery conduct of fire net when the enemys lead elements cross trigger line red. L battery will fire HE/PD.
42
B3J3778
B3J3778
44
B3J3778
45
B3J3778
10
11
Draw and number Target Reference Points (TRPs) and trigger lines Are TRPs recognizable? Do they make sense? Do all the Marines know their respective TRPs/trigger lines? Annotate targets (maintain grids to targets on another piece of paper) ensure FPF target is drawn with boxes. Each box is labeled with a number that corresponds to a gun on the gun-line. Annotate whether or not the FPF has been registered. Annotate obstacles. This includes both existing and reinforcing obstacles. (Maintain grids to obstacles on another sheet of paper; this includes early warning devices) Draw Passage Points for patrols Draw Check Points for patrols if applicable Draw LP/OPs
12
Complete the marginal information Create a copy of the fire plan sketch. You will keep one and turn the other one over to your company commander. Ensure to update as required.
13
x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-xx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
3 1 2
-x-xx
-x-xx
15
10
YE 2002 01 8
1 sq = 20 m
3
Made By: Unit: Map Data: Date/Time Group:
46
B3J3778
PLATOON FIRE PLAN SKETCH CHECKLIST 1. Significant terrain annotated on the sketch? a. Streams? b. High Ground? c. Trails? 2. Left and Right Grids and Sector Limits for Squads (Magnetic Azimuths) a. Primary Positions? b. Alternate Positions? c. Supplementary Positions? 3. Center Grid for the Squad position? 4. Left and Right Grids and Sector Limits for the Platoon (Magnetic Azimuths) a. Primary Positions? b. Alternate Positions? c. Supplementary Positions? 5. Center Grid for the Platoon positions? 6. Final Protective Fires for MGs (Principle Direction of Fire PDF, or Final Protective Line FPL) and Rockets/ Missiles (Hot/ Cold Positions) a. SAW has magnetic azimuths? b. M240G has magnetic azimuths for PDF/FPL? i. Length of Dead Space annotated? ii. Have you attached copies of the Range Cards to the Sketch? iii. Do you have a copy of the Range Card at the CP? c. Mk153 hot/cold positions marked? i. Have you attached Range Cards to the sketch? ii. Do you have a copy of the Range Card at the CP? d. Vehicles/other attachments marked? i. Grids to positions? ii. Sectors of Fire/PDFs/FPLs marked? iii. Have you attached Range Cards to the sketch? iv. Do you have copies of the Range Cards at the CP? 7. Target Reference Point (TRP) Grids and Descriptions? a. Are TRPs recognizable? b. Do they make sense? c. Marked in Additional Information? 8. OP/LP positions marked? a. Grids? i. Primary? ii. Alt? 9. Targets annotated on sketch? Grids to targets? FPLs noted for all fire support agencies (60mm, 81mm, Arty, NGF) 10. Wire, Natural Obstacles, Claymores, Booby Traps, Trip Flares, etc.? a. Annotated on map in relation to terrain? b. Grid marked in marginal info?
300m
75m
300m
MG FPL
Claymore
MG PDF AT Minefield SAW PDF SAW AP Minefield XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Tactical Wire X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X-X Protective Wire XX=XX=XX=XX=XX=XX=XX=XX Supplementary Wire
TOW
Javelin
M203 Single Strand Concertina M240G Double Strand Concertina Triple Strand Concertina M2 .50 Cal Command Post
AT-4 or SMAW
60mm Mortar
81mm Mortar
LP/OP
PP 1
Passage Point
Alt LP/OP Check Point Alt/Supp Pos Target Ref Point (TRP)
LU 1
Link Up Point
Contact Point
Point Target Anti-Tank Ditch Early Warning Device Linear Target Mortar FPF Trip Wire
48
References
Reference Number or Author FMFM 2-7 JP 1-02 MCDP 1 MCDP 1-0 MCRP 3-11.1A MCRP 3-11.1B MCRP 3-11.2A MCRP 3-16A MCRP 3-16C MCRP 5-2A MCWP 3-1 MCWP 3-11.1 MCWP 3-11.2 MCWP 3-11.3 MCWP 3-15.1 MCWP 3-15.5 MCWP 3-16 MCWP 3-17 Reference Title Fire Support in MAGTF Operations Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms Warfighting Marine Corps Operations Commanders Tactical Handbook Small Unit Leaders Guide to Weather and Terrain Marine Troop Leaders Guide Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for the Combined Arms Commander Operational Terms and Graphics Ground Combat Operations Marine Rifle Company/Platoon Marine Rifle Squad Scouting and Patrolling Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Antiarmor Operations Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element Engineering Operations
B3J3778
CASEVAC CFF COC COG CCP CP CSS CV EA EMLCOA EN EPW FEBA FEX FLOT FPF FPL FSP IA IOT KIA LP/OP MBA ME METT-TC MLG NLT MLG OAR PDF Recon SAW SE SOM
50
B3J3778
Notes
51
Notes
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3J3838
Importance
In This Lesson
B3J3838
Success in a night attack depends largely upon direction, control, and surprise. -FMFRP 12-2, Infantry in Battle
B3J3838
ADAVANTAGES OF LIMITED VISIBILITY OPERATIONS Darkness can conceal the movement of large forces Physical and psychological factors favor the attacker (shock, disorientation, and isolation are easier to achieve) Increase the element of surprise Defender cannot deploy his least engaged unit (or reserve) as quickly as he can during the day Compensate for inferior combat power Avoid heavy losses
DISADVANTAGES OF LIMITED VISIBILITY OPERATIONS Command and control are more difficult Terrain is more difficult to traverse The attacker loses momentum because he attacks at a reduced speed in order to maintain the coherence of the unit Land navigation is more difficult at night The enemy can reposition or emplace obstacles at night without being detected Attacking units are easier to ambush Adjusting indirect fires is difficult at night Units will require significantly larger quantities of signal ammunition to develop a signal plan Locating and evacuating casualties The risk of fratricide Communication upon consolidation Segregating and marking EPWs
Consolidation
B3J3838
ADAVANTAGES OF FLANKING ATTACK Your able to gain the element of surprise Attacks a perceived gap in the enemy
DISADVANTAGES OF A FLANKING ATTACK May not employ all of the commanders forces
B3J3838
ILLUMINATED ATTACK Utilizes illumination from organic weapons (M203) or supporting arms (mortars, artillery, air) Resembles a daylight attack Is supported by continuous illumination Could be used when: o Friendly units lack NVG capability o Enemy has NVG capability and we have no tactical advantage o Poor ambient illumination creates poor visibility with NVGs o Multiple friendly units on the battlefield and commander wants to reduce confusion The visibility resulting from illumination determines the degree to which daylight techniques are employed; under ideal illumination, a night attack could use all the tactics of a daylight attack Used when speed is essential Should be placed beyond the objective to silhouette the objective Used to confuse the enemy about the location of attack
NON-ILLUMINATED ATTACK Conducted by stealth to maintain secrecy and achieve surprise. A complete fire support plan is developed, including illumination, but not used until the enemy discovers the attack. This helps to ensure that tactical surprise is maintained until contact is made. Normally requires accurate and detailed knowledge of the location of Enemy positions Obstacles Security measures Which is gained during the Leaders Recon. Use of NVDs improves our ability to: Move Navigate Reconnoiter Identify enemy positions Adjust fires Some units may not have enough optics to issue one to every Marine. Therefore, priority of issue should go to: Key Leaders Automatic Weapons Lead trace/reconnaissance units Know the enemy: If he has good night vision capabilities, consider an illuminated attack to degrade this. Its a two-way street!
B3J3838
120 60 40 40
What is a PLD?
Similar to an assault position, a PLD is a tactical control measure (TCM) that we use under limited visibility conditions to identify where our unit will deploy prior to beginning its assault. It provides a platoon with direction, by facilitating the transition to an online formation in front of the enemy. Usually perpendicular to the direction of attack, it is a line on the ground (either natural or man-made) that can be the last covered/concealed position prior to the objective and forward of the LOD. Where the unit leader plans to complete final deployment of his forces. Close enough to the enemy positions so the distance moved in the assault is relatively short and the amount of obstacles are limited. Ideally, is set on terrain that shields it from discovery by the enemy. It is the unit leaders responsibility to confirm the direction of attack and the unit orientation at the PLD.
B3J3838
The patrol takes the minimum number of Marines necessary to accomplish its mission. At a minimum, the patrol should have a patrol leader (platoon commander), one Marine per squad, and two additional Marines who can remain at the PLD for security once reconnaissance is complete. A sample organization of a PLD patrol and its tasks can be found in the Appendix of this student handout.
If no natural features exist to use as a PLD, we can emplace a man-made one with a patrol. PLD patrol can be separate from leaders recon patrol, though at a minimum, the PLD should be identified during the recon. Once near the objective, the patrol leader moves forward to locate the objective. After establishing security, he supervises the guides as they locate and mark the necessary control measures. A small element should remain behind to maintain security on the PLD while the patrol returns to link up with the platoon. PLD should be marked at dusk, loaded in the dark. Directional or IR chemlights can be used to lead unit to PLD in the dark.
Ultimately, the decision is up to the unit leader, but there are several things that must be considered before the decision is made to establish a support by fire position. If the platoon commander does decide to use an SBF for a night attack, it is one of the greater command-andcontrol challenges that can be faced at the platoon level.
SUPPORT BY FIRE CONSIDERATIONS Does the terrain support establishing a support by fire position? What is the level of training for my unit? Does the situation require us to gain fire superiority from the flank to be successful? Do we need to minimize the number of Marines in the maneuver element? What is the risk of fratricide? What communications assets does my platoon possess? What pyro do I have remaining to use for a detailed signal plan? What is the No comm. plan and has the unit been informed? What unit leader will I place at the SBF position?
B3J3838
Formations
Choose the formation to facilitate speed and control. This generally means a column formation in the early stages of the attack. The unit should transition to a more linear formation at the PLD or just prior to contact with the enemy. Other formation considerations: Rate of march should be slow to facilitate control and stealth, which gives us surprise. Leaders should be positioned near the front of their units. Squad leaders and platoon commanders may move at the front of their squads and platoons. This enhances the leaders situational awareness and control, and facilitates the decision-making process. All personnel should know the locations and markings of small unit leaders.
Communications
Because the night attack relies on surprise, maintain radio silence prior to contact with the enemy, when at all possible. At a minimum, use brevity codes. Messengers are also an option for communications. Key personnel, in addition to unit leaders, can be subtly marked to help identify them at night. Night attacks may not always be executed as planned. Leaders must prepare alternate plans and plan for unexpected developments. Plans must be flexible and allow for initiative by subordinate leaders.
Contingency Plan
B3J3838
Preparation Phase: Complete the Plan & Issue the Order (Continued)
Tactical Control Measures
Control measures are generally more restrictive than during daylight and therefore must be easily recognizable. In addition to the PLD that was discussed earlier, the table below lists specific considerations for employing tactical control measures during a night attack. Assembly Area Usually required to conduct the extensive preparations for a night attack.
Attack Azimuth A magnetic azimuth that gives the direction from the PLD to the objective. Determined during leaders reconnaissance and briefed to Marines prior to crossing the line of departure. Time of Attack If the night attack is launched to seize favorable terrain for a succeeding daylight attack, it is usually launched during the final hours of darkness. Conversely, attacks launched during the early hours of darkness permit the attacker to take advantage of a long period of darkness to consolidate his position or to exploit the enemy's confusion and loss of control. In either case, attacking units must avoid setting patterns. Objective Rally Point The objective rally point (ORP) is located nearest the objective where the patrol makes final preparations prior to approaching the objective. The objective rally point is a point out of sight, sound, and small-arms range of the objective area. The ORP is tentative until the objective is pinpointed. Actions at or from the ORP include: reconnoitering the objective, issuing a FRAGO, disseminating information from the reconnaissance, making final preparations before continuing operations Squad Release Point A TCM that may be used, depending on the method utilized to load the PLD. Established on the friendly side of the PLD, it is the point at which squads separate from the platoon to facilitate loading the PLD. Rally Points Designated for link-up if the enemy repulses the attack.
10
B3J3838
Limit of Advance Is a terrain feature easily recognized in the dark (stream, road, edge of woods, etc.) beyond which attacking elements will not advance. Aids in consolidation after the assault.
Preparation Phase: Complete the Plan & Issue the Order (Continued)
Marking To facilitate control at night, we mark key leaders for identification in the dark. The following are ways we can do this: Cat Eyes Illumination tape Engineer Tape IR Strobes (Dependent on the capabilities of the enemy) Chemical Lights Colored lights Infrared (ex. 1 = FTL, 2 = SL, 3 = PC, etc.) By marking terrain, a platoon commander can enhance his units direction while closing with the enemy. Engineer tape to mark control measures like the PLD Keep personnel ON LINE Chemical lights prepped in advance Colored Not visible to enemy (directional technique / use tape) Used during training Infrared If enemy does NOT have IR detection capability Must train to this standard with NVGs
11
B3J3838
LZ Marking Kits
Rehearsals
Rehearsals are vital for success in a night attack because they: Reinforce techniques Decentralize control Evaluate strengths and weaknesses of the plan Enhance coordination
The unit leader should rehearse his plan of attack over ground as similar as possible to the terrain over which the attack will be conducted. If possible, the unit leader should conduct daylight, dusk, and dark rehearsals.
12
B3J3838
13
B3J3838
Consolidation/Re-Organization Phase
There are a few extra considerations for consolidating at night that we do not necessarily have during the day. The platoons limit of advance must be easily recognizable in the dark. Immediately thereafter, just like with a day attack, the unit must quickly transition to security on the objective, utilizing the priorities of SAFE. Once security is established, the unit begins putting their automatic weapons on the likely enemy avenues of approach as well as establishing fields of fire. As the commander you need to ensure that the subordinate element leaders are giving their units fields of fire that are easily identifiable at night. The Enemy Prisoners of War (EPW) and Casualty Collection Points (CCP) should be marked using chemlights or other devices that are visible to Marines in the dark.
Summary
14
B3J3838
The night attack is a difficult operation that requires a detailed yet simple plan, realistic and recognizable control measures, and discipline of individual Marines. The ability to operate successfully at night is not guaranteed by simply being able to operate during daylight hours. For units to be successful at night, they must undertake a thorough and intensive training plan that prepares Marines to operate in the darkness. At the platoon level, platoon commanders must ensure that their units are properly trained, properly supervised, and that the proper planning is done prior to ever crossing the line of departure.
References
Reference Number MCDP 1-3 MCWP 3-1 MCWP 3-11.1 FMFRP 12-2 MCWP 3-11.3 Reference Title Tactics (Chapter 3) Ground Combat Operations Marine Rifle Company / Platoon Infantry in Battle Scouting and Patrolling
Notes
15
B3J3838
16
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3L3998
Importance
In This Lesson
Learning Objective
Enabling Learning Objective 0302-OFF-1201h Without the aid of references, describe the four functional areas of combat engineering without error.
B3L3998
Engineering Mission
Introduction. Engineering provides a unit commander with the tactical ability to manipulate the existing terrain and/ or structure within an area of responsibility thereby increasing the combat effectiveness of the fighting force. The mission of the combat engineering field of the MAGTF is accomplished through the following four functions: Mobility operations. Mobility is the quality or capability of military forces that permits them to move from place to place while retaining the ability to fulfill their primary mission. The objective of mobility operations is to maintain freedom of movement for maneuver units. Counter-mobility operations. Counter-mobility is the reinforcement of the terrain through the construction of obstacles to disrupt, delay, or destroy the enemy. The primary objective of counter-mobility operations is to: o Slow or divert the enemy o Increase Time for target acquisition o Weapon effectiveness without impairment to the movement of friendly forces Survivability operations. Survivability is the ability of personnel, equipment, and facilities to continue to operate within the wide range of conditions faced in a hostile environment. Survivability includes all aspects of: o Protecting personnel, weapons, and supplies o Employing good tactics, frequent unit moves, deception, camouflage, and emission security o Constructing fighting and protective positions Survivability operations will not completely eliminate vulnerability to fires on the modern battlefield or the effects of weather. It can, however, limit losses by reducing exposure to enemy weapons and the weather. General engineer operations. General engineering, the combat service support function, is characterized by: o High standards of design and construction o Detailed planning and preparation o Normally serves the whole MAGTF and is characterized as force sustainment. Summary. As a combat multiplier, engineers focus on maintaining the ground combat elements (GCEs) freedom of maneuver and attacking the enemy's ability to maneuver on the battlefield.
B3L3998
Engineer Organization Organization. Engineer units are: Organic to each of the subordinate elements of the MAGTF Uniquely manned and equipped to provide required engineer support Able to reinforce one another when one unit is tasked beyond its means
Additionally, engineer officers are assigned as special staff officers to the MAGTF commander as well as to division, wing, and group general staffs. If the command element (CE) or any element of a MAGTF does not have a dedicated engineer officer, the senior Marine engineer commander normally assumes this as a collateral duty. External engineer support is available to the MAGTF commander from various sources. The diagram below is a composite diagram of all engineer assets available to the MAGTF commander. The MAGTF commander employs these assets to create a combined arms effect in deep, close, and rear operations. Engineers are employed throughout the depth of the battlefield and are essential to each element of the MAGTF's combined arms team.
MWSG MWSS
MAGTF
CIVILIAN CONTRACTOR
Primary MAGTF Engineer Assets (in white) and External Assets (in gray)
B3L3998
Engineer Organization (Continued) Combat Engineer Battalion (CEB). (See diagram below.)
Combat Engineer Battalion Mission. The CEB mission is to: o Enhance the mobility, counter-mobility, and survivability of the Marine division through close combat engineer support o Provide limited general engineering support to the Marine division Concept of Employment. The combat engineer battalion is organized to provide one combat engineer company in support of an infantry regiment and associated task elements. For smaller MAGTF operations, the combat engineer battalion will provide reinforced units to the GCE. Normally, a reinforced combat engineer platoon will support a battalion landing team. Combat engineer units are most effective when employed in direct support because the capability of the whole unit is higher than that of its component parts. Dividing a combat engineer unit, especially below the platoon level, significantly degrades the platoon's capability and forfeits much of the laborsaving support that engineers provide. Individual squads do not perform the command and control, training, and other functions performed by the platoon headquarters. Individual maneuver companies within the GCE can still have the benefit of combat engineer advice and assistance by assigning a combat engineer NCO to serve as an advisor to the maneuver company commander. Tasks and Capabilities. Engineer functions accomplished by the CEB encompass both combat support and minimal combat service support tasks. The primary task is in the combat support role--to ensure the mobility, counter-mobility, and survivability of the GCE. CEB training and equipment capabilities are focused on these
B3L3998
Engineer Organization (Continued) missions. Their work is of a very rough and expeditious nature to ensure the momentum of the fluid battlefield is retained in our favor. The CEB is responsible for the following mission essential task list (METL): Conducting engineer reconnaissance Obstacle breaching from the high-water mark inland Providing expedient repair and reinforcement of existing bridges Constructing expedient, short-span bridges from local materials Providing temporary repair of existing roads, limited new construction, and maintenance of combat roads and trails to support combat operations o Planning, organizing, and coordinating construction of simple and complex explosive and non-explosive obstacle systems o Performing demolition missions beyond the ability of other division units o o o o o Combat Engineer Company. (See diagram below) Each of the combat engineer companies consists of a company headquarters and three combat engineer platoons. Each platoon consists of (1) platoon commander, (1) platoon sergeant, (1) platoon guide, and (3) nine-man squads.
Company Headquarters
Engineer Platoon
B3L3998
Company Headquarters
Equipment Platoon
Utilities Platoon
The engineer support company consists of o A company headquarters o An engineer equipment platoon, which has all the heavy equipment such as bulldozers, graders, forklifts, and armored combat earthmovers o A utilities platoon, which provides the bulk of the combat service support functions of the battalion, including the provision of potable water, mobile electric power, and hygiene services o A motor transport platoon
B3L3998
Engineer Organization (Continued) Engineer Support Battalion (ESB). (See diagram below.)
Engineer Company
Engineer Support Battalion Mission. The mission of the ESB is to increase the combat effectiveness of the MAGTF by accomplishing general engineering missions of a deliberate nature. The ESB: o Improves on the hasty engineer work performed by the GCE to enhance the mobility, survivability, and sustainability of the MAGTF o Is particularly strong in construction of roads, buildings, airfields, and fortifications o Is the only source of fixed and floating bridge assets in the MEF Concept of Employment. The ESB initially provides general support to the landing force by providing composite engineer units/detachments to the combat service support element (CSSE) of the MAGTF. Upon consolidation of the Marine Logistics Group (MLG) within the amphibious objective area (AOA), the battalion would regain operational control of most of its committed engineer assets (except fuel and water). Under centralized control, the battalion gives depth to the overall engineering effort. Tasks and Capabilities. The general engineering tasks performed by the ESB are o Vertical and horizontal construction o Facilities maintenance o Utilities support
B3L3998
The battalion also provides CSS and lends depth and flexibility to the overall engineer effort by performing general engineering tasks for the entire MAGTF. The battalion possesses a heavy capability to provide water purification, electrical power production, and bulk fuel storage. The ESB or any of its detachments have the additional mission of reinforcing the CEB or Marine wing support squadron (MWSS.) The ESB must be capable of combat support as well as CSS tasks to execute this mission. Engineer Company. (See diagram below) The engineer company provides general engineering support of a deliberate nature to the MAGTF. When suitably augmented by elements from other companies in the battalion, the engineer company is capable of performing engineer tasks for the battalion, except installation of bulk fuel systems.
Company Headquarters
Equipment Platoon
Engineer Platoon
B3L3998
Utilities Platoon
Maintenance Platoon
Company Headquarters
The engineer support company is responsible for providing o o o o o o Engineer equipment Heavy equipment Utilities support Portable drinking water Water supply and hygiene equipment Augmentation personnel to the GCE and aviation combat element (ACE) engineer support elements
Utilities Platoon
Construction Platoon
10
B3L3998
Engineer Organization (Continued) Mission. The Marine wing support squadron is organized to provide the full range of engineer support to the aviation combat element. Concept of Employment. The engineer operations company operates under the staff cognizance of the operations department (S-3). Tasks and Capabilities. The engineers in support of the aviation combat element have the primary task and responsibility of providing special support to airfield operations. Their training and equipment are focused on the missions of survivability and general engineering. Their heavy capabilities are in the area of o o o o Expedient runway construction and repair Vertical construction Fortification construction Material handling
Additionally, they have a heavy capability in the utilities field such as Electrical generation Water production and storage Hygienic equipment operation Bulk fuel storage and distribution
However, unlike the CSSE engineer assets, these capabilities will be localized at the airfield rather than mobile throughout the area of operations (AO). The ACE engineers will perform very little work in the areas of mobility and counter-mobility once the airfield is established. Naval Construction Forces (NCF). The mission of NCF units (more frequently referred to as SeaBees), when assigned to a MAGTF, is to ensure the sustainment of MAGTF operations by providing deliberate construction support, including major construction and repair to existing facilities. NCF equipment and training are strongly oriented toward the deliberate engineering role. They have little-to-no capability in the roles of mobility or counter-mobility as it applies to maneuver forces. Both I and II MEF have access to a naval construction regiment (NCR) (see diagram on next page) that will more than double the amount of engineer personnel and equipment within the MEF. This NCR includes: One regimental headquarters Three naval mobile construction battalions One naval construction force support unit
Smaller, task organized elements of the NCR can be established to support different sized MAGTFs.
11
B3L3998
The NCRs organizational relationship within the MAGTF is based on the mission and is established and initiated by the MAGTF commander. Roughly two-thirds of an NCR is composed of reservists, highly skilled in their mobilization billets. NCRs also receive tactics and weapons instruction as part of their annual training. To accomplish this, a Marine gunnery sergeant is assigned to each construction battalion.
12
B3L3998
Engineer Organization (Continued) Interrelation of Engineer Units and Missions. All unrestricted engineer officers receive the same MOS training at the basic engineer officer's course and may be assigned to any of the above Marine Corps engineer units. Task-organized elements of each are found within the organization of the MAGTF. While the specific efforts and equipment of each engineer unit differ slightly to accommodate their particular area of responsibility (GCE, ACE, or CSSE), all possess the skills necessary to support MAGTF units in mobility, counter-mobility, survivability, and general engineering efforts.
Interface between these units is common as they can and do support each other when the mission of one calls for particular skills and equipment inherent to another. Additionally, cross-training between engineer units and the augmentation of one by another are not at all uncommon. Examples of this interaction between engineer units include: The augmentation of combat engineer battalions during Desert Shield/Storm with members of the engineer support battalions. This act was vital in the successful effort to field enough breaching detachments for the assault into Kuwait. The augmentation of an airfield engineer unit by members and heavy equipment of the engineer support battalion in order to successfully complete a large project such as the construction of a new runway.
Elements of the naval construction forces, or Seabees, can be found in larger MAGTF organizations. Although a naval engineer unit, they too can augment, support, and/or improve the efforts of Marine Corps engineers with their expertise in general engineering and abundance of heavy equipment. This is a snapshot of what engineer organization would be responsible for constructing different stages of a road in a combat zone:
CEB knocks down the trees, cuts through ditches, and gets the GCE to the fight. ESB thoroughly clears the land, grades the surface and installs drainage features, adds gravel and stabilizes the soil. Any bridges needed would be constructed. This road will resemble a two-lane application trail called a combat road. Engineer Operations Division in the MWSS travels down the road to assist in the preparation of forward operating bases. NCR adds gravel and fines, compacts and paves it, (puts up the guardrails, paints the lines, etc.)
13
B3L3998
Summary
As can be seen, the mission of combat engineering is a tremendous force multiplier. It is solely responsible for the effective movement and survivability of friendly forces while possessing the capability to manipulate and hinder enemy effects against friendly forces.
Appendix
Engineer Capabilities. The capabilities listed in the table on the next two pages are resident, to varying degrees, in every engineer unit within the MAGTF.
NOTE: The task priority and capability codes used in the table are First letter P Primary task and responsibility S Secondary task N Not a task Second letter H Heavy capability M Medium capability L Light capability N No capability
Tasks Mobility Tasks (Combat Support) Conduct engineer reconnaissance Breach obstacles Construct pioneer roads Assault bridging Clear mines Clear helicopter landing sites Improve beaches Employ specialized demolitions Provide technical engineer advice Fight as infantry Counter-mobility Tasks (Combat Support) Conduct engineer reconnaissance Place mines Plan/install obstacles and barriers
CEB
PM PH PH PL PH PM PH PH PH SM
PM SM SH SL SH PH SH SH NH NL
PL NL SL NN SL SL NN NL PH NN
PM PH PH
PM SH SH
PL SL SL
NL NN NM
14
B3L3998
Employ specialized demolitions Provide technical engineer advice Survivability Tasks (Combat Support) Construct field fortifications Employ specialized demolitions Provide technical engineer advice General Engineering Tasks (Combat Service Support) General engineering Conduct engineer reconnaissance Surveying and drafting Improve beaches Construct standard and nonstandard bridges Improve unpaved roads, airstrips, and marshaling areas Perform rapid runway repair Build expedient airfields (matting) Plan and estimate projects Soil stabilization Construct aircraft revetment/dispersal sites Repair airfield damage Construct semi-permanent camps Perform vertical construction (including concrete) Construct logistical support bases Construct air bases Construct and repair port/waterfront structures Employ specialized demolitions Conduct non-explosive demolition and debris removal Provide technical engineer advice Utilities support Provide tactical water/hygiene services Provide tactical electrical supply Develop sewage and water systems Bulk fuel support Provide tactical bulk fuel storage and dispensing
PH PH PH PH PH
SH SH PH PH PH
NL PH PM NL PH
NL NN SH NL NL
SM SL SL SL SL NN NN PH SL NL NL NL NL NL NN NL NH NL NL SL SL NN
PM PM PH PH PH SM PH PH PH SH PH PH PM PH PH NM PH PH PH PH PH NL
PL PL NL NN SL PM SL PM PL PM PM SL PL NL NN NL NL ML PM PM PM NL
PM PH PH PH PH SM PH PH PH SH PH PH PH PH PH PH PH PH PH NN NN PM
NN
PH
PM
NN
15
B3L3998
References
Reference Number or Author FM 20-32 FM 5-100 FM 5-101 FM 5-102 FM 5-103 FM 5-250 FM 5-34 MCWP 3-17 Reference Title
Mine/Countermine Operations Engineers in Combat Operations Mobility Countermobility Survivability Explosives and Demolitions Engineer Field Data MAGTF Engineer Operations
Notes
16
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3L4038
Importance
In This Lesson
Learning Objectives
Terminal Learning Objectives MCCS-DEF-2203 Given a unit, a barrier plan, and material needed to emplace obstacles, direct obstacle emplacement to achieve the effect desired by the commander. Enabling Learning Objectives MCCS-DEF-2203a Without the aid of reference, identify obstacle types without error.
B3L4038
B3L4038
Engineer battlefield functions in the defense are the same as in other military operations. Engineers perform the following battlefield functions: Counter-Mobility. Survivability. Mobility. General engineering.
Counter-Mobility
The primary intent of counter-mobility operations is to deny the enemy's ability to execute his plan by: Disrupting his combat formations. Interfering with his command and control. Creating a vulnerability that friendly forces can exploit.
The secondary intent is to destroy or disable his vehicles. Engineers conduct the following counter mobility tasks in the defense: Development of the obstacle plan to support the maneuver commander's concept of operations. Assist in the installation and recording of minefields. Provide technical assistance and supervise the construction of specific obstacles.
B3L4038
Mobility
Mobility support assists forces to move rapidly, mass, disperse, and be resupplied. Engineers conduct the following mobility tasks in the defense: Prepare counterattack routes clear of obstacles and/or have prepared breaches. Prepare combat trails for counterattacks and lateral movement between battle positions. Prepare lanes and gaps through obstacle zones and belts. Reduce obstacles created by enemy fires and sabotage. Clear landing zones for resupply and medical evacuations (MEDEVACs).
B3L4038
An obstacle is any obstruction that stops, delays, or restricts movement or maneuver. The two general categories of obstacles are: Existing. Reinforcing.
Existing Obstacles
Existing obstacle are those obstacles already present on the battlefield and not placed through military effort. They may be: Natural o Drainage features. o Soil trafficability. o Slope and relief. o Vegetation. o Climate and weather. Cultural o Cities/towns. o Dikes, dams, canals. o Drainage ditches, embankments, cuts, and fills. o Hedgerows and orchards. o Roads and railroads.
B3L4038
Slope
Vegetation
Bearing <8 psi pressure Soil type and moisture 30 % 45% 60% Tree 20.5 cm diameter With 3 to 5 m tree spacing
Exceeds tanks self-bridging capability Exceeds tanks ability to step Exceeds most armored vehicle launch bridges (AVLBs) Cannot be forded without special equipment Hinders tracked and wheeled vehicle movement Affect trafficability Stops most wheeled movement Delays most tank movement Stops tank movement Stops wheeled vehicles Delays tracked vehicles Delays tracked and wheeled vehicles
Notes: 1. Many terrain features can significantly slow cross-country movement even though they may not stop an individual tank. Examples of such features are ditches narrower than 2.5 m, stone walls, trees spaced closer than 25 cm, and slopes less than 45 percent. 2. The combined effect of two or more factors can create a significant obstacle at a lower value. For example, even a slight uphill slope will stop a tank from pushing over trees smaller in diameter than 25 centimeters. Reinforcing Obstacles Reinforcing obstacles are those obstacles placed on the battlefield through military effort, which are designed to extend or improve the effectiveness of existing obstacles. A reinforcing obstacle must force the enemy to react, thereby influencing his scheme of maneuver (SOM). Reinforcing obstacles are an integral part of the defensive scheme of maneuver (DSOM). The five types of reinforcing obstacles are: constructed, demolitions, mines/minefields, contamination, and expedient.
B3L4038
Demolitions: created by the detonation of explosives. Examples include: o o o Road craters. Abatis. Landslides.
Mines/Minefields: the only reinforcing obstacle capable of killing or destroying enemy personnel and equipment. Contamination: nuclear or chemical in nature. Expedient: The potential of expedient obstacles is unlimited. By their nature, expedient obstacles substitute locally available materials and manpower for a logistical requirement.
A commander has several options in organizing the defense. He plans his defensive scheme based upon his mission analysis and situational estimate (METT-T). Organizing the defense must be carefully matched to the terrain. As the principal element in reinforcing the terrain to best complement the maneuver commander's plan, the engineer is responsible for developing the obstacle plan. The use of reinforcing obstacles is the principal method of terrain reinforcement (see following table). Obstacles have three primary purposes: Enhance the effectiveness of friendly fires. Delay the enemy's advance, upset his timing, disrupt and canalize his formations into designated engagement areas, and delay or destroy follow-on echelons. Enhance friendly economy of force measures.
B3L4038
Craters
Embankments, cuts and Craters, ditches, and cuts on slopes fills on roads and railroads Terraces and dams Abatis
Cultivated or seeded forests, orchards, and hedgerows Buildings, towns, fences, and retaining walls
Built-Up Areas Demolished buildings, rubble, and wire obstacles Demolitions Mines/minefields Contamination
B3L4038
10
B3L4038
Engagement Area
Protective Obstacles
Tactical Obstacles
Protective Obstacles
Protective obstacles are those obstacles employed to protect the defending force from the enemy's final assault; as such, they are key components of survivability operations. Protective obstacles are: Close to defensive positions. Tied in with the final protective fire (FPF) of the defending unit. Emplaced by units normally without the engineers assistance.
Protective obstacles are normally wire entanglements and/ or hasty protective minefields.
11
B3L4038
Tactical entanglements extend across the entire front of a position but are not necessarily continuous. Protective. Protective wire entanglements are located to prevent surprise assaults from points close to the defensive position. As in the case of all antipersonnel obstacles, protective wire entanglements are close enough to the defensive position for day and night observation but are beyond hand grenade range. Supplementary. Supplementary wire entanglements in front of the forward edge of the battle position are used to conceal the exact line of the tactical wire. To the rear of the forward positions, supplementary wire is used to enclose the entire defensive position by connecting the protective wire entanglements. Legend for diagram: XXXXXXX = Tactical wire = = XX = = XX = Supplementary wire X X X = Protective wire
protective obstacles
X
=x x= X=
tactical obstacles
x xx xx xx xx x xx xx xxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxx x xxx xxx xx xxx xxx xxx
==
x xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx x xx xxxx xxx xxxx xxx xxxx xxx xxxx xxx xxxx xx xxxxxx xxxx xxxxx x xxxx xxx xxxx xxx x X
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx x
= xx
...
X X
X
= xx
=x x=
=x x=
==
X
X
xx xx xx xx x xx xx xx
xx =
==
EA
= xx
==
xx
==
xx
x= =x
x= =x
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx x xx xx xx x
x= =x
x= =x
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx x
12
== xx == xx ==
xx == xx == xx ==
...
X
x= =x
xx
==
RAIDER
...
B3L4038
Each obstacle effect has a specific impact on the enemy's ability to maneuver, mass, and reinforce. Obstacles also increase the enemy's vulnerability to friendly fires. Obstacle effects support the friendly scheme of maneuver by manipulating the enemy in a way that is critical to the commander's intent and scheme of maneuver. The diagram below shows the operational symbols for tactical obstacles.
Disrupt
Turn
Fix
Block
enemy direction of attack
13
B3L4038
Turn
A turn effect manipulates the enemy's maneuver in a desired direction: First the obstacle must have a subtle orientation to entice the enemy to maneuver rather than breach the obstacle. Second, the bypass must be easily detected to entice the enemy to it.
Fix
A fix effect slows the enemy within a specified area so that he can be killed with fires. The term does not mean to stop an enemy advance but rather to give the defender time to acquire, target, and destroy the attacking enemy throughout the depth of an engagement area or avenue of approach.
Block
A block effect is designed to stop an enemy's advance along a specific avenue of approach or allow him to advance at an extremely high cost. Blocking obstacles are complex and integrated with intense fires.
14
B3L4038
XX
III
XX
III
III
XX
Example of Engagement Area Using Tactical Obstacles
15
B3L4038
Conventional minefields can be either: Protective Minefields Protective. Tactical. Phony. Nuisance.
Protective minefields, like other protective obstacles, are employed to protect the defending force from the enemy's final assault. Protective minefields serve two purposes: To impose a delay on the attacker to allow the defender time to break contact. To break-up the enemy's assault to complete its destruction.
An important aspect of protective minefields is the requirement to recover them before leaving an area. Protective minefields are classified as either: Hasty protective minefields (HPMFs). HPMFs are used as part of a unit's defensive perimeter: o Mines are emplaced outside hand grenade range but within the range of small caliber weapons. o No anti-handling devices are used. o The emplacing unit picks up all mines upon leaving the area, unless enemy pressure prevents mine retrieval or the minefield is being transferred to a relieving commander o The HPMF is recorded on the DA Form 1355-1-R.
16
B3L4038
Tactical Minefields
Tactical minefields, like other tactical obstacles, are employed to directly attack the enemy's ability to maneuver and to give the defender a positional advantage over the attacker. Tactical minefields: May be employed by themselves or in conjunction with other types of tactical obstacles. Are not only used in the defense but may also be emplaced during offensive operations to: o o o o Protect exposed flanks. Isolate the objective area. Deny enemy counterattack routes. Disrupt enemy retrograde.
Phony Minefields
Phony minefields are one form of tactical minefields that are areas of ground altered to give the same signature as a real minefield and thereby deceive the enemy. Phony minefields serve two functions: First, they confuse the attacker's breach decision cycle and cause him to second-guess his breach decisions. Second, they may cause the attacker to wastefully expend breach assets to reduce mines that are not really there.
Friendly forces must regard a phony minefield as live until the tactical situation no longer warrants maintaining the deception. Emplacing even a single live mine within a phony minefield makes a live minefield.
17
B3L4038
Minefield Reporting
Report of Intention
Report of Initiation
Report of Completion
18
B3L4038
FASCAM refers to the entire inventory of scatterable mines used by United States military forces. Scatterable mines: Are laid without regard to classical pattern. Are designed to be delivered or dispensed remotely by aircraft, artillery, missile, or ground dispenser. Have a limited active life; self-destruct after their life has expired. The duration of the active life varies by the type of mine and delivery system.
Scatterable mine systems enable the tactical commander to emplace minefields in enemy-held or contaminated territory or in other areas where it is impossible to emplace conventional minefields. Some systems allow for rapid emplacement of minefields in friendly areas. As with all minefields and obstacles, scatterable minefields are an engineer responsibility.
19
B3L4038
With this information and thorough understanding of available systems, the engineer recommends the type minefield to be emplaced (conventional or scatterable). If a scatterable minefield is selected, the engineer recommends the delivery system and coordinates with the appropriate staff officers. General Capabilities Speed. Scatterable mines can be emplaced more rapidly than conventional mines to adjust for a changing battlefield. Increased mobility. Upon expiration of the self-destruct time, the minefield is cleared; the commander can move through an area that was previously denied enemy or friendly forces. Efficiency. Scatterable mines can be emplaced by a variety of delivery methods. Extensive manpower, equipment, or tonnage is not required for their emplacement as they are much smaller and lighter than their conventional mine counterparts. Increased lethality. Most scatterable AT mines utilize a self-forging fragment (SFF) warhead designed to produce a K-Kill. Scatterable AP mines are tripwire activated and utilize a blast/fragmentation type kill mechanism.
20
B3L4038
Per presidential decision directive, Hand emplaced AP mines are no longer authorized. FASCAM (self destruct) and AT mines are allowed.
21
B3L4038
In offensive operations, engineers normally work and fight well forward with the maneuver elements as an integral part of the combined arms team. Decentralization of control is required to provide necessary close engineer support to forward elements in offensive operations. Therefore, combat engineers are best employed in direct support roles with attachment of appropriate engineer elements to specific supported units as dictated by mission. The combat engineer squad is the smallest unit assigned direct support missions and must be at least as mobile and survivable as the unit they are supporting.
The primary role of engineers in offensive operations are to: Ensure uninterrupted movement of friendly forces maintaining momentum of the attack. Provide flexibility to the supported maneuver unit. Degrade the enemys ability to maneuver.
Engineer battlefield functions in the offense are the same as in other military operations. Engineers perform the following battlefield functions:
22
B3L4038
23
B3L4038
Counter-Mobility
While mobility of the force is the first priority in offensive operations, counter-mobility operations are vital to help isolate the battlefield and protect the attacking force from enemy counterattacks. Obstacles will be used in offensive operations to: Block or inhibit enemy movement. Obstacles can: o Help secure the flanks and rear of the attacking force during the initial phases of the attack. o Also impede enemy counterattacks by preventing the enemy from reinforcing weak areas under attack and denying the use of critical routes. Concentrate combat power. Obstacles enable friendly forces to control or defend an area with fewer men and assets (economy of force), thus making more combat power available for the main effort (ME).
Obstacle employment must be coordinated to prevent any interference with mobility requirements of the attacking force.
24
B3L4038
Obstacle breaching is the employment of a combination of tactics and techniques to project combat power to the far side of an obstacle. Breaching is a synchronized combined arms operation under the control of the maneuver commander. To understand breaching theory and breaching tactics requires knowledge of key terms defined in the table below.
Marking`
Bulling through
Bypass
Definition The physical creation of a lane through or over an obstacle. The lane can be created by making or finding a way through the obstacle. The total elimination or neutralization of an obstacle. Clearing operations are not conducted under fire and are usually conducted by follow-on engineer forces. Verifying that a lane is free of mines by passing a mine roller or other mine-resistant vehicle through as the lead vehicle. Proofing should be done when time, threat, and mission allow. A good marking system allows a force to quickly pass through a breached lane thereby maintaining momentum, giving confidence in the safety of the lane, and helping to prevent casualties. Not a breaching operation, but a desperate decision made when a commander must react immediately to extricate his force from an untenable position within an obstacle and no other breaching operations are possible. A route that avoids the obstacle. When a unit bypasses an obstacle, it physically changes its direction of movement to avoid the obstacle.
25
B3L4038
Intelligence
A commander needs to "see the battlefield" to be successful. In operations where enemy obstacles can interfere with friendly maneuver, obstacle intelligence (OBSINTEL) becomes a priority. As the experts on obstacles, combat engineers should be incorporated with other human intelligence gathering forces to conduct engineer (obstacle) reconnaissance. Specific OBSINTEL requirements include: Obstacle location. Obstacle orientation. Presence of wire. Gaps and bypasses. Minefield composition: o Conventional or scatterable. o Types of mines. o Depth. o Anti-handling devices. Location of enemy direct-fire weapons.
26
B3L4038
Breaching Tactics
The commander organizes the force with the necessary assets to accomplish SOSR breaching fundamentals quickly and effectively.
27
B3L4038
28
B3L4038
Synchronization
Breaching Operations
29
B3L4038
Obstacle reduction techniques are the means by which lanes are created during breaching operations. Breach forces will seldom employ only one technique against any single obstacle. The techniques are: Mechanical. Involve the use of mine plows, mine rollers, bulldozers, bridging equipment, fascines, or any other heavy equipment assets. Explosive. Use the overpressure produced by the detonation of the explosives to activate single-impulse mines. Explosive means include both mounted and hand-emplaced explosive techniques
Mounted systems include the M58 mine-clearing line charge (MICLIC) or the Mk1 triple-shot Amphibious Assault Vehicle (AAV), which consists of three MICLICs mounted in the rear of the AAV. Manual systems are the Bangalore torpedo, the APOBS (antipersonnel obstacle breaching system), and any other type of hand-emplaced explosive charge. Additionally, fuel air explosives (FAE) delivered by aircraft or artillery can also be used against minefields. Manual. Include probing, grappling hooks, bolt cutters, assault ladders, and any other expedient method that may be used to breach the obstacle. Electronic. Through the use of mine detectors.
30
B3L4038
Step Action 1 Indirect fire and offensive air support provide suppression. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ground units in support force provide direct suppressive fire. Breach and assault forces move into position. Smoke obscures enemy view of breach site. Obstacles are reduced and cleared lanes are marked. Suppressive fire shifts beyond objective. Assault force attacks through breached lane. Breached lanes handed off to follow-on forces. Resupply. Reorganize to continue mission
Support force Breach force Assault force Support force Breach force Support force Assault force Breach force As required As required Can also be done by support force. Coordinated with assault force. Breach and assault forces prepare to execute tasks.
31
B3L4038
Obstacle Encountered
Minefield 4 M Lane
Resources Available Grapnel Hook Pioneer Kit Chain Saw Probe Mine Detector/ Probe Blade (Dozer/ ACE) AVLB Towed Assault Bridge Mine Roller Mine Plow Bangalore Explosives MICLIC Direct Fire Soft Material Fascines Lumber
Surface
Buried
Wire
Steel Obstruction
Walls
Abatis
Log Obstacle
Bunker
Rubble
5 6 7
3 5 4 5 4
* *
* *
2 3
3 2 5 1
3 2 4 1 2 4 7 1 8 4 5
3 2
3 2
2 1
1 = Most desirable
10 = Least desirable
*Probe and/or mine detector combination are used together with the grapnel hook for explosive minefield breaching.
32
B3L4038
Summary
During most offensive operations, demand for combat engineer support will exceed available resources. Maneuver commanders, with the advice of their engineer commanders, must prioritize the engineer effort. Combat engineer support, like other ground support assets, is task-organized in response to the anticipated threat and mission of the supported unit.
References
Reference Number or Author FM 20-32 FM 5-100 FM 5-101 FM 5-102 FM 5-103 FM 5-250 FM 5-34 MCWP 3-17 Reference Title Mine/Countermine Operations Engineers in Combat Operations Mobility Countermobility Survivability Explosives and Demolitions Engineer Field Data MAGTF Engineer Operations
33
B3L4038
FPF FPL HPMF LOC LZ MAGTF ME MEDEVAC METT-T MICLIC MSR OBSINTEL PDD SFF SOM SOSR
Notes
34
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3L4118
Importance
In This Lesson
B3L4118
Enabling Learning Objectives MCCS-IED-1001a Without the aid of reference, identify the types of IEDs and their indicators. MCCS-IED-1001b Without the aid of reference, identify the types of IED initiation methods. MCCS-IED-1002a Without the aid of reference, describe the six tenets of the IED defeat framework. MCCS-IED-1002b Without the aid of reference, describe the actions to be taken upon contact of a suspected IED.
B3L4118
IED Defined Introduction. IEDs are a dangerous and effective weapon system that military forces face. IEDs can be made from almost anything with any type of material and initiator. They are an improvised device that is designed to cause death or injury by using explosives alone or in combination with other materials, to include projectiles, toxic chemicals, biological toxins, or radiological material. IEDs can be produced in varying sizes and can have different types of containers, function, and delivery methods. IEDs can use commercial or military explosives, homemade explosives, or military ordnance and ordnance components. IEDs are primarily conventional high-explosive charges, also known as homemade bombs. A chemical and biological (CB) agent, or even radiological material, may be included to add to the destructive power and the psychological effect of the device. They are unique in nature because the IED builder has had to improvise with the materials at hand. Designed to defeat a specific target or type of target, they generally become more difficult to detect and protect against as they become more sophisticated. IEDs are becoming increasingly sophisticated and can be fabricated from common materials. IEDs may range in size from a cigarette pack to a large vehicle. The degree of sophistication depends on the ingenuity of the designer and the tools and materials available. IEDs of today are extremely diverse and may contain any type of firing device or initiator, plus various commercial, military, or contrived chemical or explosive fillers. Cached or stockpiled munitions within the current theater of operations may provide the explosive materials to would be enemy bombers. Definitions: Improvised Explosive Device. A device placed or fabricated in an improvised manner incorporating destructive, lethal, noxious, pyrotechnic, or incendiary chemicals and designed to destroy, incapacitate, harass, or distract. It may incorporate military stores, but is normally devised from nonmilitary components. Also referred to as an IED. (JP 1-02) Booby Trap. An explosive or non-explosive device or other material, deliberately placed to cause casualties when an apparently harmless object is disturbed or a normally safe act is performed (JP 1-02). Mine. In land mine warfare, an explosive or material, normally encased, designed to destroy or damage ground vehicles, boats, or aircraft, or designed to wound, kill, or otherwise incapacitate personnel. It may be detonated by the action of its victim, by the passage of time, or by controlled means. (JP 1-02) Components of an IED. IEDs can vary widely in shape and form. IEDs share a common set of components that consists of the main charge, initiating system, and casing. Main Charge. The most common explosives used are military munitions, usually 122-millimeter or greater mortar, tank, and/or artillery rounds. These items are
B3L4118
IED Defined (Continued) the easiest to use and provide a ready-made fragmentation effect and they allow for relatively easy daisy chaining, which is linking multiple main charges together over long or short distances for simultaneous detonation. Other IEDs have used military and commercial explosives, such as PE4, trinitrotoluene (TNT), ammonium nitrate (fertilizer), and fuel oil (ANFO). Common hardware, such as ball bearings, bolts, nuts, or nails, can be used to enhance the fragmentation. Propane tanks, fuel cans, and battery acid can and have been added to IEDs to propagate the blast and thermal effects of the IED. Initiating System. The initiation system or fuse functions the device. It could be a simple hard wire for command detonation to a cellular telephone or remote controls to toy cars and airplanes for radio-controlled IEDs. The initiator almost always consists of a blasting cap. Batteries are used as a power source for detonators. Batteries of all types are the primary source of power for IEDs. Batteries could be as small as 9-volts, AA, and those used in long-range cordless telephones (LRCTs) to car and truck batteries. IEDs may even be wired into the local power supply of a home or office. Casing. Casings can range in size from a cigarette pack to a large truck or airplane. The container is used to help hide the IED and to possibly provide fragmentation. A myriad of containers have been used as casings, including soda cans, animal carcasses, plastic bags, and vests or satchels for suicide bombers. Initiation Methods. Most IEDs in Iraq are presently command-detonated and use electric firing circuit systems. These IEDs generally have a power source, often standard batteries or car or motorcycle batteries. Electric firing circuit systems are either "hard-wired" with a firing wire (such as speaker wire), or they use a wireless system. Wireless firing systems use radio transmissions from wireless items such as Radios Pagers Doorbell systems Light-switch devices Garage door openers Car alarm receivers/unlocking devices Toy car remote controllers
They also use cellular phone transmissions. Time. Time IEDs are designed to function after a preset delay, allowing the enemy to make his escape or to target military forces which have created a pattern. Timers used include igniferous (fire producing), chemical, mechanical, and electronic devices.
B3L4118
IED Defined (Continued) Command. Command-initiated IEDs are a common method of employment and allow the enemy to choose the optimum moment of initiation. They are normally used against targets that are in transit or where a routine pattern has been established. The most common types of command-initiated methods are with command wires or radio-controlled devices, such as LRCTs, cordless telephones, and remote car openers and alarms. Victim. A victim-actuated IED is a means of attacking an individual or group of individuals. There are various types of initiation devices, which include pull or trip, pressure, pressure release, movement-sensitive, light-sensitive, proximity, and electronic switches. Trip wires have also been used and targeted for foot mobile patrols or for turret gunners in convoys.
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs). Introduction. Coalition Forces can more effectively prevent, mitigate, and respond to IED attacks by better understanding enemy IED tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTPs). This section has three main objectives; at the end of this section, you will be able to: Understand common IED target areas Identify IED camouflage methods and hiding places Understand how IEDs are employed in attacks
Enemy IED Placement, Employment, and Target Positioning. IEDs may be emplaced anywhere that enough space exists or can be created to hide or disguise the IED. Whenever possible, devices are located where employment can exploit known U.S. patterns (such as the use of a main supply route [MSR]) or vulnerabilities (such as soft-skinned vehicles or chokepoints). Common areas of IED emplacement include, but are not limited to: Previous IED sites (past successes, laziness, exploiting Techniques, Tactics, and Procedures [TTPs]). Frequently traveled, predictable routes, such as roads leading to FOBs and along common patrol routes. Boundary turnaround points (pattern). Roadway shoulders (usually within 10 feet). Medians, by the roadside, or buried under the surface of any type of road, often in potholes and covered with dirt or reheated asphalt. Trees, light posts, signs, overpasses, and bridge spans that are elevated. Unattended vehicles, trucks, cars, carts, or motorcycles (attached or installed in them).
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) Guardrails (hidden inside) or under any type of material or packaging. Potential incident control points (ICPs). Abandoned structures (sometimes partially demolished). Cinder blocks (hidden behind), piles of sand to direct blast into the kill zone, or inside disguised concrete items (fake curbs). Animal carcasses and deceased human bodies. Fake bodies or scarecrows in coalition uniforms. Buildings. Employed at the edge of town.
The enemy may also employ lures to draw friendly forces into an IED kill zone using methods such as: Broken down motorist Person in need of medical attention Unaccompanied young child/children
Beware; booby-trapped IEDs are common, especially in weapons and munitions caches. Although the enemy puts forth a great deal of effort to keep the IED concealed from friendly forces, the exact location of the weapon must still be known to the attacker for reasons of detonating the IED at his choosing. Threat forces attempt to mark the IED in such a manner that the marker itself does not look out of place and/or does not draw unwanted attention. Some examples include: Piles of rocks Arranged sticks Paint markings Cloth or plastic strips tied to branches
IED Indicators. There are numerous means of detection that can assist in locating IEDs, however the best means of detection is your personal awareness of what is going on around you. Below are a list of indicators, common locations of IEDs, Vehicular Borne Improvised Explosive Device (VBIED) considerations, and the 5 to 25 meter checks: Primary Indicators. The primary indication of an IED will be a change in the environment (something new on the route that was not there yesterday). The enemy may leave behind visual indicators of an emplaced IED by accident or on purpose (to inform the local population). Vigilant observation for these subtle indicators can increase the likelihood of IED detection by friendly forces before detonation. Examples of possible roadside IED indicators include, but are not limited to:
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) o Unusual behavior patterns or changes in community patterns, such as noticeably fewer people or vehicles in a normally busy area, open windows, or the absence of women or children. o Vehicles following a convoy for a long distance and then pulling to the roadside. o Personnel on overpasses. o Signals from vehicles or bystanders (flashing headlights). o People videotaping ordinary activities or military actions. Enemies using IEDs often tape their activities for use as recruitment or training tools. o Suspicious objects. o Metallic objects, such as soda cans and cylinders. o Colors that seem out of place, such as freshly disturbed dirt, concrete that does not match the surrounding areas, colored detonating cord, or other exposed parts of an IED. o Markers by the side of the road, such as tires, rock piles, ribbon, or tape that may identify an IED location to the local population or serve as an aiming reference (such as light poles, fronts or ends of guardrails, and road intersections or turns). o New or out of place objects in an environment, such as dirt piles, construction, dead animals, or trash. o Graffiti symbols or writing on buildings. o Signs that are newly erected or seem out of place. Friendly forces should be especially vigilant around: o Obstacles in the roadway to channel convoys. o Exposed antennas, detonating cord, wires, or ordnance. o Wires laid out in plain site; these may be part of an IED or designed to draw friendly force attention before detonation of the real IED.
Employment Techniques. The enemy will generally employ the IED in a fashion and an area that allows the attacker to remain concealed and/or covered (such as a rooftop or window, dirt mound, vehicle [to include motorcycles], vegetation, canal, defile, alleyway, or even within a crowd) during the attack and to egress in a concealed or protected fashion. While typically being within 30-500 meters of the IED kill zone, attackers will generally locate themselves so that restrictive terrain is between them and friendly forces, thereby making it more difficult for friendly forces to over take them. There may be single or multiple IED placed in the kill zone with secondary IEDs, false kill zones, and multiple zones to further confuse friendly forces making them more vulnerable to the attack. Multiple IEDs are often daisy-chained together creating a linear target area. Below are some ways that IEDs can be used, whether they are emplaced by the enemy or used as VBIEDs. Additionally, there are some TTPs included that the enemy has used in order to hinder the mobility efforts of coalition forces. Keep in mind; TTPs
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) constantly change with the location and desired intent of the emplaced IED, threat or obstacle. The enemy has also incorporated the use of small arms fire in conjunction with the IED attack to harass forces in their attempts to conduct patrols and convoys along any given route. IEDs can be used in the following manners: Disguised static IEDs can be concealed with just about anything (trash, boxes, tires, and so forth) and can be placed in, on, or under a target or in or under unsecured vehicles. Disguised moveable IEDs (vehicle-borne improvised explosive devices [VBIEDs], suicide bomber vests or victim-actuated IEDs). Thrown or projected IEDs (improvised grenades or mortars). One example would be as a convoy travels beneath an overpass, two threat individuals on top of the bridge will attempt to drop IEDs on top of or into the back of vehicles as they pass under. (One spots the approaching convoy, times its movement, and signals the other who drops the IED as vehicles exit from the other side of the bridge.) Convoys must be aware of the 360-degree threat while traveling. Changing speeds and dispersion will help mitigate the threat to some extent. IEDs placed in, on, or under a secured/unsecured object. Often times coalition forces may want/need to clear the roads of abandoned or broken down vehicles or debris from the side of the road that could pose a threat to convoys that travel along a given route. Identifying possible enemy fighting or firing positions is paramount in order to keep all friendly forces safe while removing hauling or pushing the debris out of the way. If a remote investigative capability is available, use it to ensure that the debris being moved is not rigged with explosives. Hoax IEDs, which the enemy uses for myriad purposes, such as to learn our TTP, entrapment, non-explosive obstacle, and development of identifying complacency for future IED attacks. Hoax IEDs include something resembling an actual IED, but have no charge or a fully functioning initiator device. A TTP that has been used before is emplacing a fake IED (the distraction) along a given route that can be seen by the lead vehicle in a convoy causing the convoy to halt at a safe distance. Actually, the convoy has inadvertently stopped in the kill zone, for emplaced along the route either before or after the hoax IED (at a distance the enemy probably learned by observing repeated friendly reactions and TTPs) putting the convoy in the actual attack zone. Additional ways that IED have been employed are: o The Basic IED Attack. The enemy will place IEDs along routes on either side of the road awaiting foot patrols or convoys to approach in order to cause the most damage to personnel or vehicles. When the convoy reaches the attack or kill zone, the enemy detonates the IED. It is imperative that coalition forces be vigilant and alert at all times to identify the many different locations an enemy may possibly hide in order to trigger an IED or signal a trigger man. o The Broken Down Vehicle Attack. The attack uses a simulated broken down vehicle placed on the side of the road to cause convoys to change their intended route. The broken down vehicle is staged in the road, either side, blocking one or all of the trafficable lanes causing the convoy to be canalized between the broken down vehicle and an emplaced IED. If the convoy chooses to pass, the IED is
9 Basic Officer Course
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) detonated. Or as with the hoax IED, it has also been noted that Coalition Forces have stopped prior to the broken down vehicle and found to have stopped in the actual kill zone where a daisy chained series of IEDs is positioned on their flanks. o Tag Team Attack. Numerous threat individuals work to emplace an IED along a route, usually in an urban area. After the IED and initiation method has been emplaced, one of them will stand by out of site of the convoy and wait to give the signal to another who detonates the IED when the convoy enters the kill zone. They are usually located where they have the best escape route. o Ramming Convoys. The enemy has been known to ram their vehicle (possibly an SVBIED) into the rear or the side of a convoy as it passes in order to get the convoy to slow or come to a complete stop. As the convoy stops, an IED already placed on the side of the road or the SVBIED is detonated causing damage to personnel and equipment. The enemy has also been known to get in front of a convoy slowing their speed in order to conduct a coordinated attack with another VBIED. o Motorcycles. Used by the enemy in areas of decreased mobility in order to harass convoys and possibly throw IEDs or grenades into the rear of vehicles. Once the IED or grenade was launched at the intended vehicle, the motorist would escape using a pre-designated route that was severely restricted to trucks of larger size. Ensure personnel are constantly watching the rear and flanks of the convoy to keep this threat to a minimum. Vehicle Borne IED (VBIED). The VBIED has been successful due to its mobility and enabling the enemy to choose the time and place of the attack with much greater flexibility. VBIEDs are like any other IED, they almost never look the same (from bicycles to dump trucks) and there are countless different scenarios that can be set up by the enemy. This unpredictability makes them difficult to identify. If the driver of the VBIED is alone in the vehicle having direct control of the IED initiator, the initiator may be visible to anyone looking into the vehicle from the outside. Particulars of VBIEDs are: Driver o The presence of a lone male driver in the vehicle. This is the historical standard for VBIED operations; however, there could be any number of people in the vehicle if an unsuspecting person is driving the VBIED. Some VBIEDs have two to three people and females are sometimes used as a distraction. o Ignoring orders to stop, attempting to circumvent a security checkpoint, or attempting to maneuver too close to coalition assets. o Unusual appearance. The enemy may be uncharacteristically clean-shaven and have very short haircuts. (Cutting the hair is a part of the purifying ritual that many follow prior to an attack.) o Age in mid-twenties. The average Middle Eastern suicide terrorist is about 2425, but this may vary in your unique situation. o Driving erratically; driving too slow or too fast. o Wearing inappropriate dress for the environment.
10
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) Vehicle o Noticeable sagging of the vehicle; the top of the tire and the wheel well almost touch. o An additional antenna for radio-controlled devices. o Darkened or covered windows to conceal either vehicles contents or actions of the driver. o Recent painting of vehicle to cover body alterations. o Crudely covered holes made in the vehicle to hide explosives. o New welding marks. o No license plates. o Escorted by unusual security detail for type vehicle. o New tires on an old vehicle. o Anything unusual in factory-built compartments. o New or shiny bolts and/or screws. o Unusual scratches, possibly made by screwdrivers, wrenches, or similar tools. o Signs of tampering, such as broken parts or bent sheet metal. o Areas and components cleaner or dirtier than surrounding areas. o Wire and tape stored in vehicle.
Local Signs o Camera crew hanging out near your area. o Vehicle observed more than once. o Absence of normal routine for that area of operations (AO). o Odd traffic patterns. o Person or persons observed conducting reconnaissance. o Vehicle testing local defenses, i.e., drives at a high speed towards traffic control point (TCP) and then breaks off.
SBIEDs (Suicide Bombers). Most suicide attacks involve SBIEDs, and include casualty rates from tens to hundreds. Recently, however, there has been an increasing trend for suicide bombers to attack with an explosive vest, belt or baggage. Coalition Forces have been attacked within the perimeter of a Firm Base; civilians have been attacked at polling stations and at police recruitment drives; and a civilian contractor was killed when a bomber exited his vehicle in traffic, approached the contractors vehicle, and detonated his vest/belt. With effective techniques being used to reduce the effectiveness of VBIEDs, the potential for the enemy to adapt to suicide bombers increases. If the charges used by bombers are effectively packaged and concealed, a suicide bomber could carry up to 45 pounds of explosives; however, most suicide belts are designed to hold smaller amounts, up to 12 pounds. The mass of this weight of explosive promotes conformity of the belt to the individual, improving concealment. It should be noted that fragment producing materials are often incorporated into the design of these belts/vests.
11
B3L4118
Enemy IED Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTPs) (Continued) Indicators of a potential suicide attack are: An individual who deliberately ignores orders to stop or attempts to circumvent a security checkpoint. An individual wearing too much clothing for the prevailing weather conditions. A person with suspicious bulges in his/her clothing, carrying packages/bags or wearing satchels/backpacks. An individual handling wires, switches, an actuator, or a dead mans switch. The enemy is smart, and their TTPs change! Threat forces continuously improve and adapt their TTPs. They are clever, flexible, innovative, and deceptive. They seek to exploit friendly forces weaknesses. They are constantly learning, changing tactics, and improving their TTPs. Enemy scouts and spies observe and report on Coalition Forces patterns, TTPs, SOPs, and battle drills and adjust their plans and TTPs accordingly. They conduct pattern analysis, learning and planning around Coalition Forces movement, patrol, and convoy patterns, routes, and schedules.
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction Introduction. Obviously, preventing IED attacks is one key way to enhance your personal safety and that of your unit. In addition, preventing IED attacks makes the local populace feel more confident in your ability to provide a secure environment. This increased confidence reduces the likelihood that they will provide assistance to the enemy or passively ignore their activities. There are also measures you can take to reduce the damage which can be caused by an IED detonation. Measures to reduce the effects of IEDs begin with conducting a thorough METT-TC analysis, gaining an understanding of the enemy, and comprehending the common activities associated with an IED attack. Activities conducted by the enemy include leadership, planning, financing, material procurement, bomb making, target selection, recruiting, and attack execution. A holistic approach to understanding the requirements of an IED attack assists commanders and planners in identifying vulnerabilities. These vulnerabilities can be exploited to break the operational chain of events of the enemy, but the main focus here is to know what to look for when conducting an Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield (IPB) and analyzing intelligence products. In this section, you will learn: Tenets of IED defeat Ways to prevent IED emplacement Ways to avoid IEDs during movement Training and preparation that can enhance your safety Tenets of IED Defeat. The IED defeat framework is enables commanders and staffs to plan and take proactive measures to seek out and defeat IED events before they occur.
12
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) It also provides a methodology for addressing IED events upon contact and subsequent detonation. The IED defeat framework consists of the following: Predict. These activities are used to identify and understand enemy personnel, equipment, infrastructure, TTP, support mechanisms, or other actions to forecast specific enemy IED operations directed against U.S. interests. o o o o o o o Identifying patterns of enemy behavior. Identifying emerging threats. Predicting future enemy actions. Exploiting IED threat vulnerabilities. Targeting enemy IED attack nodes (such as funding and supplies). Disseminating alert information rapidly to specific users. Analyzing forensics and enabling better on-the-scene technical analysis.
Detect. These activities contribute to the identification and location of enemy personnel, explosive devices, and their component parts, equipment, logistics operations, and infrastructure in order to provide accurate and timely information. Detecting and identifying explosive material and other IED components. Detecting chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) material. Recognizing suicide bombers. Conducting forensic operations to track bomb makers and/or handlers. Conducting persistent surveillance. Training to improve detection of IED indicators by digital means. Using detection means across the full range available (imagery, mechanicalclearance operations, search techniques, dogs, so forth) o Recognizing individual Marine actions and awareness in all activities. o o o o o o o
Prevent. These activities disrupt and defeat the IED operational chain of events. The actions focus on the target to interdict or destroy key enemy personnel (bomb makers, leaders, and financiers), the infrastructure/ logistics capabilities (suppliers and bomb factories), and surveillance/ targeting efforts (reconnaissance and overwatch operations) before emplacement of the device. Disrupting enemy operations and their support structure. Denying critical IED-related supplies to the enemy. Increasing awareness of enemy TTP and their effectiveness. Denying the enemy the opportunity to emplace IEDs (through presence patrols, observation posts, checkpoints, aggressive surveillance operations, and so forth.) o Rewarding local nationals cooperation in determining the locations of cashes, bomb making, or emplacement activities. o Denying easily concealed locations (such as trash piles and debris along sides of primary routes) and removing abandoned vehicles along routes. o o o o
13
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) Avoid activities. These activities keep friendly forces from IEDs when prevention activities are not possible or have failed. o Altering routes and routines. o Marking and bypassing suspected IEDs. Neutralize. These activities contribute to the destruction or reduction of enemy personnel, explosive devices, or supplies. They can be proactive or reactive in nature. o Proactive activities include conducting operations to eliminate or interrupt the enemys leaders, suppliers, trainers, enablers, and executors responsible for the employment of IEDs against coalition forces. o Reactive activities include conducting controlled detonations or render safe procedures (RSPs) against identified IEDs, cashes, captured enemy ammunition (CEA), and so forth. Explosive Ordinance Disposal (EOD) forces are the only personnel authorized to render safe IEDs. Protect. These activities improve the survivability of IED targets through hardening, awareness training, or other techniques. o Disrupting, channeling, blocking, or redirecting enemy and fragmentation. o Creating greater standoff distances to reduce the effect that IEDs have on their intended targets. o Using jamming devices. o Reducing time and distance in which intended targets are within IED range. o Accelerating processes and increasing the effectiveness by which reaction and evacuation operations are conducted. o Providing blast and fragmentation mitigation for platforms, structures, and personnel. o Avoid establishing patterns and predictable forms of behavior. o Conducting proper pre-combat inspections (PCIs) and rehearsals for all operations. o Treating every operation as a combat mission (from a simple convoy to forward operating base [FOB] security). IED Defeat Framework. The IED defeat framework can be broken down into two major sub-elements: Proactive (pre-detection) and Reactive (post-detection). Proactive elements are actions taken by friendly forces to predict, detect, prevent, avoid, neutralize, and protect against IED events. Reactive elements are actions taken by friendly forces to detect, avoid, neutralize, and protect against IED events.
14
B3L4118
Proactive Efforts
Focus on Battle Command and Awareness Training (Left of Detection)
Reactive Efforts
Focus on TTPs, Drills, SOPs, and Troop and System Protection (Right of Detection)
Collection & Analysis Enemy Reaction: Develops new attack methods Detect Event Avoid Neutralize Detection of IED
Actor
Method
Financier Planner Builder Delivery/ Emplacer
IED
Explosive Power Source Container Initiation Device
Protect
Erode Confidence
The small unit leader generally has the capability to affect four of the six tenets of the IED-D framework. These are: predict, detect (detection is discussed in the previous lesson), avoid, and protect. Predict. Through analyzing the terrain, the planned route, and recent enemy activity in the area, the small unit leader can predict likely areas for an IED attack. Though many actions are involved within Predict, the small unit leader can likely execute the following actions with limited assistance from the units intelligence section: o Identify patterns of enemy behavior. o Predict future enemy actions.
15
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) Avoid activities. Predict and detect aid the leader in avoiding IED attacks. The following activities also aid in avoiding IED attacks: o o o o o o Increasing situational understanding (SU) of the area of operations (AOs). Constantly updating the common operational picture (COP) Disseminating related accurate information about the AO in a timely manner. Ensuring timely and accurate status reporting and tracking. Altering routes and routines. Marking and bypassing suspected IEDs.
Protect. The following actions should be considered when attempting to decrease the effectiveness of IEDs: o Disrupting, channeling, blocking, or redirecting energy and fragmentation. This is primarily accomplished through use of armor kits on combat vehicles. o Creating greater standoff distances to reduce the effect that IEDs have on their intended targets. The minimum safe distance from any IED is 300 meters, but this range increases as the size of the IED increases. o Incorporating unmanned platforms. This would include unmanned aerial vehicles or robotics to investigate likely attack areas prior to entering the area. o Using jamming devices. o Reducing time and distance in which intended targets are within IED range. o Increasing the speed and effectiveness by which reaction and evacuation operations are conducted. o Providing blast and fragmentation mitigation for platforms, structures, and personnel. o Avoiding establishing patterns and predictable forms of behavior. o Conducting proper personnel and equipment inspections and rehearsals for all operations. o Treating every operation as a combat mission (from a simple convoy, to daily forward operating base [FOB] security or patrols).
Preventing IED Emplacement. The most effective way to enhance your security in relation to the IED threat is to deny the insurgents the opportunity to emplace an IED. Activities that reduce insurgent ability to emplace IEDs are to: Develop a good relationship and means of communicating with the community so community members feel comfortable providing you with information. o Advertise phone numbers to report insurgent activity or materials o Offer incentives and consistently ensure anonymity. Coordinate with local police and conduct joint patrolslocal police can aid in collecting information on insurgent actions and materials. (Maintain operations security [OPSEC].) Use patrols, observation points, and checkpoints to interdict and dissuade enemy activities and deny enemy access to key terrain for IED emplacement.
16 Basic Officer Course
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) Use counter IED-ambush teams and scout-sniper teams to interdict or kill enemy insurgent teams. Reduce availability of bomb making materials, especially the pervasively available military explosives. Clean routes of trash, brush/vegetation, abandoned vehicles, etc. from the sides of the road. Select routes that are of the most concern in terms of IED threats.
Prepare For Movement. Follow these important points for movement: Number and Type of Vehicles (combat, logistic, wheeled, tracked). Large convoys consisting primarily of logistic vehicles carrying food, water, and numerous pilferable items that the enemy would like to capture for financial gain are likely targets as they are difficult to defend. These must contain robust security elements to present an aggressive posture and prevent attack. The leader must balance the number and type of vehicles in a movement to prevent the unit from becoming too cumbersome to manage and to allow for a strong security posture. If there are four or more security vehicles in a unit, two of them may scout ahead, maintaining communication and visual contact. Planned Speed of Movement. The speed of movement should be varied according to the drivers level of experience, vehicles/load plan of each convoy, the actual mission (e.g. supply convoy versus presence patrol), and the weather, time of day, and road conditions. Some key considerations are listed below: Driving fast may upset the enemys timing of command detonated IEDs, but it decreases the ability to spot IED indicators. Leaders must be aware that driving too fast may cause loss of control and can be potentially deadly. Driving slow increases the probability of spotting IED indicators, but may make you an easier target for command detonated IEDs or ambushes. Speed should be varied within the capabilities of the vehicles and the operators. This will help avoid setting patterns.
Weapons. Leaders must attempt to have a variety of weapons systems within their unit during any movement. This should range from small arms (rifles, grenade launchers) to medium and heavy machine guns. An effective mix of weapons systems will allow for an aggressive posture with the ability to provide heavy suppressive fires and the ability to conduct a dismounted assault. Either capability without the other exposes a critical gap in a units tactical capability that is easily exploited by the enemy. Leaders must also ensure that Marines are proficient with their weapons systems prior to movement. Route Selection. Before selecting the routes to be used in each mission, an analysis of new information should occur: Check when the routes you are considering using were last cleared or used by other units.
17
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) Leaders should check for updated threat and route information with o o o o o o Higher headquarters MPs Force protection teams Intelligence and reconnaissance reports The Mine Data Center The IED Task Force, etc.
Choose routes that avoid chokepoints and other areas where traffic slows because reduced speeds make the convoy more vulnerable. Vary the times of movements, as well as the routes. Maintain OPSEC regarding the timing and routes of convoys, patrols, and other movements.
The figure shown on the following page is an example of a planned route that has been analyzed to show likely areas for an IED attack.
18
B3L4118
Example of route denoting likely IED Attack sites Communication Plan. Some movements (especially logistical convoys) cover a great distance and can often pass through several units areas of operation. The following considerations must be taken into consideration when developing a communication plan. Coordination with each unit whose AO you will be passing through to ensure that your means of communication are compatible. Preparation for emergency communications. All members of your unit must be briefed on and able to communicate MEDEVAC requests (air and ground) and Explosive Hazard Spot Reports. While this should be done for any movement, it is especially important in an IED environment due to the particularly catastrophic injuries and damage caused by IEDs.
19
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) Pre-Movement Rehearsals. Moving units must be prepared to react quickly and efficiently to any attack--especially IED attacks. Once commencing the mission in the IED environment, it is vitally important to maintain awareness. Maintain an offensive mindset. Make all attempts to avoid setting patterns. One enemy TTP is to set decoy IEDs in order to observe the immediate reactions of coalition forces. By studying our tactics they can increase the lethality of their attacks, like setting up mortars and rockets on the kill zone or safe area. Follow the map you updated carefully75% of IEDs are set up in the exact same location of previous attacks. Follow the below steps to react to IED attacks. The below is not meant to replace initiative and ingenuity of the small unit leader; it is intended to be used as guidance. Remember that the IED may be just one part of the ambush. The unit must be prepared to react to any threat after the IED detonates and move out of the kill zone as quickly as possible. In the fight against an adaptive enemy, variations in TTPs are encouraged. Leaders must be aware all details unique to their particular situation in order to make a timely decision. The decision matrix on page 34 aids the unit leader in deciding how to act/react according to their particular situation. Pre-Combat Inspections. As with any other combat operation, unit leaders must conduct pre-combat inspections. This is the leaders last opportunity to ensure that all personnel and equipment are prepared for the movement. The following are a few key concerns. A more detailed checklist is contained at the end of this outline. Personnel. Inspect personnel for the follow (at a minimum). o Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is present, serviceable, and worn properly. o Weapons systems are operational and properly maintained. o Personnel are familiar with movement order, rally points, immediate action drills, and communication procedures. Vehicles. o Vehicles are in working order and properly maintained. o If not armored, vehicles are properly hardened. Use creativity as the situation dictates. One common example is to use sandbags. This may be especially practical if your AO sees a great deal of large, on route, buried IEDs. Sandbagged floor boards can absorb fragmentation and add weight to the vehicle (which decreases the vertical and horizontal acceleration as a result of the IED detonation). o Fire extinguishers are present on all vehicles and are in working order. o All cargo is properly strapped down to ensure it does not become secondary fragmentation. o Strip maps are present on all vehicles. o The vehicle load plan is adhered to.
20
B3L4118
IED Attack Preparation, Prevention, and Effects Reduction (Continued) After Action Report. For your intelligence section to be able to properly update moving units, it is important that you provide a detailed after action report. Update your maps with any IED attacks that occurred during your movement, and add any potential IED attack locations. Strive to understand anything you may consider to be an enemy TTP, and inform the S-2. Pinpoint where any indirect or direct fire came from, and the location of any ambushes. Provide the S-2 with any other information that you think may be relevant for future pattern analysis.
IED Encounter Response Procedures Introduction. This section will provide you with information on how to react should an IED be discovered and/or detonate. At the end of this section you should understand Measures to be taken immediately after IED attack, Follow on actions if o No enemy is in the immediate area, o The enemy is in the immediate area, and General guidelines for the use of force. Units must drill these procedures and develop SOP battle drills for reacting to enemy contact associated with IED attacks. These tactics must be adaptive so that they keep the enemy off balance.
Reacting To Suspected IEDs. In order to mitigate the effects of an IED, there are several things Marines can do regardless of the type of threat. Ensure that personnel wear all protective gear available, to include ballistic eye protection, goggles, Kevlar helmets, body armor with plates, and hearing protection. Wear seatbelts when moving. During mounted movement, ensure that drivers, track commanders, and gunners have as much of their body inside the vehicle as possible to reduce the possibility of being struck by shrapnel or being exposed to the initial blast. Pre-Movement Rehearsals. Moving units must be prepared to react quickly and efficiently to any attack--especially IED attacks. Once commencing the mission in the IED environment, it is vitally important to maintain awareness. Maintain an offensive mindset. Make all attempts to avoid setting patterns. One enemy TTP is to set decoy IEDs in order to observe the immediate reactions of coalition forces. By studying our tactics they can increase the lethality of their attacks, like setting up mortars and rockets on the kill zone or safe area. Follow the map you updated carefully75% of IEDs are set up in the exact same location of previous attacks. Follow the below steps to react to IED attacks. The below is not meant to replace initiative and ingenuity of the small unit leader; it is intended to be used
21
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) as guidance. Remember that the IED may be just one part of the ambush. The unit must be prepared to react to any threat after the IED detonates and move out of the kill zone as quickly as possible. In the fight against an adaptive enemy, variations in TTPs are encouraged. Patrolling. One of the most important things you can do to protect yourself and your unit against the possibility of an IED attack is to limit your predictability. This is much more than varying the times of movement. You also need to consider varying routes, movement techniques, and your TTP for dealing with different situations. Remember, the enemy is always watching. For example, if you react to a specific situation such as a disabled vehicle or suspected IED the same way every time the enemy will quickly catch on and will use this knowledge to his advantage. In an effort to counter route predictability, patrols should change direction at seemingly random intervals, especially in areas of previous IED attacks. Where practical and safe, move against the normal flow of traffic, turn around at points not normally used, and move overland parallel to an established route in order to vary your observable movement tactics. Additionally, these techniques will present the patrol with a different and often more advantageous observation angle that may reveal the backside of an IED that was poorly camouflaged. o Counter VBIED Techniques. The key to surviving a VBIED attack is standoff and cover. Also, stress to security personnel that a VBIED can come from any direction. Units have been attacked by vehicles turning into a patrol from oncoming traffic. When moving in a convoy, make sure you do not present a lucrative target for a VBIED. Maintain an aggressive security posture and have a plan for dealing with civilian traffic. This can include, but is not limited to, the use of signs in the local language, formations that take up all lanes in the road, visual signals, use of an air horn, and the use of flares to warn cars to stay back before firing disabling shots. Top gunners and security personnel should be alert and constantly aware of any vehicle approaching their patrol or parked along the route. Within the ROE, any suspicious vehicle should not be allowed to approach coalition forces. Employ warning signs to tell civilian drivers to remain clear of a moving convoy. Convoy and patrol members should know the authorized escalation of force procedures. Be aware of danger areas/choke points such as turnoffs that force the patrol to slow down. Watch merging traffic as VBIEDs have used on or off ramps to get near coalition vehicles
22
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) If you are going to allow civilian traffic to pass your convoy, make sure you have developed a technique to visually check cars and drivers as they approach. If you are not going to allow civilian traffic to pass your convoy, make sure that you have a plan to let civilians know to stay back, and have a plan for the escalation of force. o Maintaining Standoff: Mobile. Escalation of force techniques/ROE: The techniques used should be simple, clean, and definite: Aggressive/defensive vehicle maneuvers Signs in the local language on the rear of vehicle (Stay Back, Do Not Pass) Hand and arm signals Air horn/siren/bull horn/whistle Spotlight (nighttime) Green lasers Non-lethal warnings Chem-lites, water bottles Use of pen flares Flash bangs 40-mm TP round Warning shots Engage vehicle with weapon, if necessary (ROE) Engage the driver/occupants, if necessary (ROE)
o Maintaining Standoff: Stationary Recon site prior to occupation Perform 5 to 25 meter checks upon halt Maximize distance from roadway (mine and buried IEDs may present a threat) Make use of natural barriers Maintain good dispersion Quickly establish overt perimeter: o o o o Cones Barbed wire Signs Road spikes
23
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Position electronic countermeasure (ECM) devices for maximum coverage Keep roads clear of civilian vehicles
o Counter Suicide Bomber Techniques Defensive Actions o Evacuate the area immediately. Safe distances will depend on the mass of explosive carried by the bomber and the amount and type of fragmentation used. o Close and negotiate tactics should not be attempted, as suicide bombers are usually trained to avoid surrender at all costs. o A fail safe cell phone or radio-controlled initiator could be used in the event that the bomber is incapacitated or hesitates. This tactic would normally involve a second suspect with a line-ofsight view of the bomber and should always be considered. o If a deadly force response is taken, bullet impact may initiate/detonate the explosive charge(s). Firing on the suspect should only be undertaken from protective cover. o If the suspect is neutralized and there is no explosion, do not administer first aid. Wait for EOD to render safe the explosive charge. o Actions at Halts. No one single set of procedures will work for all situations. If a patrol or convoy must stop during movement, employ techniques to create standoff. Remember to conduct 5 to 25 meter checks as described below. In addition, establish your own local security every time the convoy or patrol halts. Avoid clustering vehicles and vary the vehicle interval between elements. If you will be stopped for any length of time, improve your position constantly and consider contingencies (hasty and deliberate defense) for the site you are occupying. Most importantly, do not remain at one site too long. The enemy has planned and executed attacks against units that remain in place too long. 5 to 25 Meter Checks at Halts. Any patrol or convoy halting for any length of time must consider itself vulnerable to attack. At all halts, Marines must clear the area around their vehicles. Depending on the length of time at the halt, the area to clear varies from 5 to 25 meters. At every halt, no matter how short, the crew must clear 5 meters around the vehicle while inside. For extended halts, teams must clear 25 meters around the patrol or convoy. Begin 5 to 25 before stopping to avoid stopping on top of an IED.
24
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) o 5 meter checks: Identify a position to halt. Visually check the area 5 meters around your vehicles . Look for disturbed earth and suspicious objects, loose bricks in walls, and security ties on streetlights or anything out of the ordinary. Start your search at ground level and continue up above head height. Then conduct a physical check for a radius of 5 meters around your position. Be systematic, take your time, and show curiosity. If the tactical situation permits, use a white light or infrared (IR) light at night. If in an armored vehicle, remain mounted during your 5 meter check to take advantage of the vehicles protection.
o 25 meter checks: Add to the 5 meter check when the patrol or convoy leader decides to occupy an area for any length of time. Once 5 meter checks are conducted, continue visually scanning out to 25 meters. Conduct a physical search for a radius of 25 meters around your position. Look for IED indicators and anything out of the ordinary.
o Actions on Contact. An improvised explosive device (IED) is a form of attack by the enemy. Any IED that detonates should be treated as an enemy contact. Contingency plans and rehearsals are key to concluding the contact, hopefully with the capture or death of the bomber. If you find an IED before it explodes, you must treat it like it will explode at any moment. The enemy at the firing point may be waiting for more Marines to gather around the device before setting it off. He may be moving from an observation point (OP) to the firing point. Training on basic tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) will enable you and your unit to win the engagement. IED Found Before Detonation. o The Five "Cs". The five "Cs" represent a simple set of guidelines that you should use when you encounter a suspected IED: Confirm Clear
25
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Cordon Check Control CONFIRM. You should always assume the device will explode at any moment. From a safe distance and using a minimal number of personnel, look for IED indicators. Use any hard cover you have available while attempting to confirm the suspected IED, and never risk more personnel than the tactical situation requires. Use all tools at your disposal, to include moving to a better vantage point. Use optics to look for tell-tale signs of an IED: red detonating (det) cord, antennas, electrical wires, or exposed ordnance. Never ask civilians to remove an IED. You may solicit information regarding the suspected IED, but do not ask them to go up and take a look. Stay as far back as possible while looking for clues. When in doubt, back away. Do not ever touch. Let your higher headquarters know what you have found. Submit an IED/unexploded ordnance (UXO) 9-line report. When you move to a new location, always check for secondary IEDs. Always assume that the found IED is a bait round and that the real IED is near your secure location. Team members should always scan their immediate surroundings for more IEDs. Report additional IEDs to the on-scene commander.
LINE 1. Date-time group (DTG): When the item was discovered? LINE 2. Report activity and location: Unit and grid location of the IED/UXO. LINE 3. Contact method: Radio frequency, call sign, point of contact (POC), and telephone number. LINE 4. Type of ordinance: Dropped, projected, placed, or thrown; give the number of items if more than one. LINE 5. Nuclear, biological, chemical (NBC) contaminations: Be as specific as possible. LINE 6. Resources threatened: Equipment, facilities, or other assets that are threatened. LINE 7. Impact on mission: Short description of current tactical situation and how the device affects the status of the mission.
26
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) LINE 8. Protective measures: Any protective measures taken to protect personnel and equipment. LINE 9. Recommended priority: Immediate, indirect, minor, no threat. Note: Do not attempt to do the job of explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) or engineers. CLEAR. Evacuate the area to a safe distance (around 300 meters) but do not set a pattern. If it is a VBIED, you will need more standoff. Get out of the IEDs line-of-sight. Assess whether your distance and cover is adequate. Direct people out of the danger area, and do not allow anyone to enter other than those responsible for rendering the IED safe, such as EOD. Question, search, and detain as needed. CORDON. Establish blocking positions to prevent vehicle and foot traffic from approaching the IED. Immediately search the safe area for secondary IEDs before occupying it. Make maximum use of available cover. Establish 360 degree security and dominate the area. Scan close in and away from your position. Most likely, the enemy is watching and waiting to make his move. Randomly check people leaving the area to deter attacks. Establish obstacles to control approaches to security positions. Enemy may try to attack local security forces using a VBIED.
CHECK. Check the immediate area around the IED and cordoned positions for secondary devices using the 5/25 meter checks. Expand the search area as time/ threat permit. CONTROL. Control the site until EOD arrives. Clear and set up an entry control point for first responders. Do not let others go forward to inspect the IED. Make contingency plans in case you are attacked by small arms or rocket propelled grenades (RPGs).
27
B3L4118
Should you be part of a patrol or convoy that finds an IED, the five "Cs" will help to ensure that the situation can be dealt with quickly and safely. Remember, an IED that is found is still an IED attack. By finding the IED, you have just disrupted the enemys attack. Do not forget about the enemys other forms of attack, RPGs, small arms fire, mortars, and secondary IED. Enemy IED site = Enemy ambush site. You are in the kill zone!
28
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Kill and Danger Estimated Distances. IED Coke Can Shoe Box Small Footlocker Car Van Delivery Semi Trailer Amount of HE 1 lb. 5 lb. 10 lb. 100 lb. 500 lb 4000 lb 10000 lb 60000 lb
Kill Distances Danger Area Frag Danger Area Blast
Once you have completed the first five crucial steps (Confirm, Clear, Assess, Cordon, and Control), follow the rest of the steps of these response procedures: Attempt to locate insurgents in the area and, if possible, attempt to kill or capture. Mark the IED using a reference point; determine grid location and record DTG. Do not handle or approach IED at any time. Contact higher headquarters to report any IEDs or possible IEDs using the nine-line IED/UXO report. A grid and sitrep will suffice in the short-term. Do not use radios, cellular phones, radars, or other electronic devices within 100 meters of the suspected IED, as these actions could set off radio-frequency IEDs. Gather information about the IED area and threat environment and interview witnesses. Leave the area when the IED is secured or conduct a battle hand over with EOD or other follow-on unit. Restore site to state of normalcy if possible (restore traffic flow, clear debris, treat local populace with respect, etc.).
29 Basic Officer Course
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) o Suspected IED What Not To Do. Never approach a suspected IED. Instead, use standoff optics like binoculars and spotting scopes from multiple angles to attempt to confirm the presence of an IED. When in doubt, back off and call EOD. Do not pick up det cord. Det cord is an explosive and the presence of it alone is enough to call EOD. Do not trace or pull on det cord. Tracing command wire (CW). The enemy has placed trip wires and other IEDs under/in the vicinity of command wires. When a command wire is located, rather than walking parallel to the wire or over the wire to locate the initiation point, work in an S pattern, crossing the CW until the initiation point is located.
CAUTION! There has been at least one occasion where an IED was located at the initiation point, in addition to the IED at the main supply route (MSR). Do not focus on the found IED. An IED, once found, is not going to move. Look for additional devices. Look for the trigger man. Look for anyone trying to escape the area. Watch for approaching VBIEDs. Scan for enemy moving into position to engage you with small arms or RPGs. Focus outward. Again, once positive IED indicators are found (det cord, wires, etc.), immediately move a safe distance away; perform a search of your safe area (5 to 25 meter checks) for secondary devices, and call EOD. o IED Detonation. Immediate actions differ when an IED is actually detonated. The enemy may often combine the IED attack with a direct fire ambush to increase the lethality of the attack. In deciding the best course of action following an IED detonation, the leader must first determine if the IED attack is combined with an ambush. The 5 "Cs" are still applicable; however, you must now incorporate your counter-ambush TTPs. Even when you do everything right tactically, the enemy can sometimes surprise you. For this reason, it is important to review some tactical principles for post-explosion actions. Units should be proficient in actions on contact, and team members should be cross-trained on other patrol members duties. Remember, an IED attack is an ambush. It is important to note that the results of an IED attack can range from catastrophic to no damage at all. The enemy is not always successful with IED attacks. If you are attacked, your reaction to contact drills will have to be modified based upon vehicle damage and casualties. Key points: Quick, lethal and aggressive response in accordance with rules of engagement (ROE)
30 Basic Officer Course
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Immediately scan outward. The biggest mistake Marines can make is focusing inwards toward the site of the IED detonation and forgetting about the enemy. Obviously, some Marines will have to assess the situation, communicate with higher, tend to wounded, and recover vehicles. Every other patrol or convoy member should scan around the location for the enemy. Move out of kill zone Search for/Clear additional IEDs (5 to 25) -At the new location (5 to 25) -At the location where the vehicle is disabled (5 to 25) Treat/Evacuate casualties Report situation Expect follow on attacks
o IED Detonation: No Ambush; with or without casualties. After an IED is detonated, the unit leader must be prepared to react immediately to a number of potential scenarios. The method chosen will depend on the mission and the circumstances following the attack: The unit leader may chose to continue movement. If there is a casualty the unit leader may chose to find a suitable CASEVAC location Preserve forensic evidence Search the surrounding area Conduct vehicle recovery operations Dismount vehicles and seek out the trigger man Conduct 5 Cs. Be prepared to take additional action as your situation develops. Below is an example of a unit SOP-driven immediate action drill that uses the acronym REACTER: Report. Report contact to personnel internal to patrol/convoy; gain situational awareness. Evacuate. Able vehicles and personnel clear kill zone. Area. Secure the area (ie; establish snap blocking positions using contents of snap VCP kits, conduct 5 to 25 meter checks, establish 360 security, establish overwatch, establish cordon, scan/search for possible triggermen/cameramen). Focus on enemy and control area. Clear the kill zone. Conduct a sweep for secondary IEDs while clearing to damaged vehicle/kill zone. ECM assets should be integrated into sweep if available. First responders should move up immediately behind sweep, but should not move to kill zone before area is secure or sweep for secondary IEDs is conducted.
31
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Treat casualties: initial lifesaving procedures only. Do not establish Casualty Collection Point (CCP) in kill zone and do not linger in kill zone. Establish CCP and LZ away from kill zone ie; min 300 meters. Conduct 5 to 25 meter checks at CCP and LZ. Report/recover. Report situation to higher and Recover damaged vehicles as required.
o IED Detonation With Direct Fire Ambush. When no ambush is present, the priority is to determine if other IEDs exist in the immediate area. When an ambush is present, the priority shifts slightly; the threat of a potential IED is outweighed by the actual ambush, so the enemy must be addressed first. The leader must employ the principles of reacting to near or far ambushes, and then conduct the 5 Cs. IED Detonation with near ambush. In a near ambush, the kill zone is under very heavy, highly concentrated, close-range (within hand grenade range) fires. There is little time or space for men to maneuver or seek cover. The longer they remain in the kill zone, the more certain their deaths. If attacked with a near ambush: o Marines in the kill zone immediately assault the enemys position without waiting for any order or signal. The assault should be swift, violent, and destructive. Fire weapons at the maximum rate, throw hand grenades, and yell as loudly as possible- anything to kill as many enemy as they can, and confuse enemy survivors. Once they reach the ambush position, they either continue with their assault, or break contact, as directed. o Marines not in the kill zone maneuver against the ambush force, firing in support of those assaulting. o If the ambush force is small enough to be routed or destroyed, the patrol members should continue with their assault and supporting fire. If the force is well-disciplined and holds its ground, then the patrol members should make every effort to break contact as quickly as possible, and move to the last en route rally point to reorganize. o If the leader decides to break contact, he must be aware that the unit may have to provide suppressive fire until any WIA/KIA/disabled vehicles can be extracted from the kill zone. o Consolidate and Conduct 5 Cs. IED Detonation with far ambush. In a far ambush, the killing zone is also under very heavy, highly concentrated fires, but from a greater range (out of hand grenade range). The greater range precludes those caught in the killing zone from conducting an
32 Basic Officer Course
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) assault. The greater range does, however, permit some opportunity for the men to maneuver and seek cover. If attacked from a far ambush: o Men in the kill zone immediately return fire, take the best available cover, and continue firing until directed otherwise. o Men not in the kill zone maneuver against the ambush force, as directed. o The unit leader either directs his unit and team leaders to fire and maneuver against the ambush force, or to break contact, depending on his rapid assessment of the situation. o If the leader decides to break contact, he must be aware that the unit may have to provide suppressive fire until any WIA/KIA/disabled vehicles can be extracted from the kill zone. o Consolidate and Conduct 5 Cs.
Attempting to Neutralize an IED with Organic Weapons. Depending on your estimate of the situation and your commanders intent, you may be required to neutralize the suspected IED if EOD is not immediately available and the situation is dire enough to warrant taking the risk. Neutralizing the IED is generally not the preferred course of action as it destroys any forensic evidence, may cause explosive waste to scatter without detonating, and could be potentially deadly as these techniques are often conducted from within the fragmentation radius of the IED. Also, you should note that an IED in the open may be a detonator for a larger hidden device. Ensure that there is enough safety standoff distance from the IED before detonating it. The only means that most convoys/patrols will have to attempt to neutralize an IED is through direct fire weapons. o Stand-off Munitions Disruption (SMUD)/ ballistically breaching. Standoff munitions disruption (SMUD) is remotely detonating, disrupting, or deflagrating small ordnance at safe distances. Marines and soldiers have attempted to modify this technique to ballistically breach IEDs. Although it may be successful, there is a great deal of risk to ballistically breaching IEDs. WARNING: Ballistic breaching can leave a fully functional IED or other explosive hazard. It is difficult to verify that the hazard has been neutralized. WARNING: If the ordnance used as the main charge is not identified, the use of ballistic breaching may create a greater hazard by scattering sub-munitions or worse, releasing chemical agents into the environment. Attempting to ballistically breach potential IEDs can be extremely dangerous. It can expose the unit to fragmentation hazards, chemical hazards, and the potential of scattered ordnance. Further, unless conducted by a properly trained
33
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) EOD technician, the use of ballistic breaching may not destroy the IED. This is a risk based decision that a leader must make only after all other alternatives have been exhausted. A LEADERS DECISION CONSIDERATIONS MATRIX IS FOUND ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE.
34
B3L4118
Yes Is It a Threat? Move Out of the Danger Area and Establish Standoff.
No
OPTEMPO
Safety/ Intelligence
Yes
No
Yes
Mark, Bypass (Avoid), and Report. Provide Security Element (IF Available) And execute 5- Cs.
Take Direct Action. Conduct Breaching Operations: Remotely Mechanically Robotically SMUD By Explosive Charge
35
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) General Guide to Responding with the Use of Force. When responding to an IED attack with force, Marines should remember that intelligence is critical to defeating an enemy force and should think about capturing IED enemy forces if possible. Captured IED enemy forces can be a good source of intelligenceleading to the killing or capture of key enemy leaders, planners, operators, and other organizers of the insurgency. IED Hunting. IED hunting requires patience, practice, and proactive approaches to the mission. IED hunters do much more than drive up and down the roads looking for IED signs. Patrol members clear routes to ensure freedom of movement for coalition forces (CF) and civilian traffic. Familiarity with the area to be cleared is one key element in successful IED hunting teams. Looking at the route from the enemys perspective is a second critical element. Teams must use all means available to find IEDs and to prevent themselves from becoming a target. Key points to IED hunting are In depth knowledge of the area Concentrate efforts on high threat areas Clear the route often Use combination of mounted/dismounted teams Move slow enough to observe Observe from multiple angles Investigate every clue that tends to point to an IED Take size of object into consideration Look for other IED indicators Use optics to maximize standoff Elicit information from Iraqi citizens
Some IED hunting teams use specialized vehicles, which offer additional protection, survivability, and equipment to search for IEDs. Other teams use simpler, common equipment to observe changes in their assigned area such as binoculars, spotting scopes, and white searchlights; thermal sights can assist IED hunters. The single most important consideration for IED hunting teams is to vary their actions. Based upon previous experiences, a few key principles for IED hunters have emerged. While the equipment and enemy may vary, these guidelines can help organize counter IED patrols. Use every tool you have. Review daily intelligence reports and debriefs from previous patrols. Use the same personnel consistently. This is one point where you want to set a pattern. Marines who are familiar with a route will know when changes have taken place. They will know what the roads look like and what garbage and dirt piles are new. They will also be able to detect changes in the populations attitudes and presence.
36
B3L4118
IED Encounter Response Procedures (Continued) Drive at slow speeds and use the center of the road. You must drive slowly enough to detect IED indicators. While convoys and other movements should go as fast as practical, IED hunters should move slowly and deliberately while searching. Moving in the center of the road gets the team further away from IEDs in the event of a detonation. Solicit information. Ask locals if they have seen unusual activity (you will need an interpreter). Investigate anything that looks out of the ordinary. Consider any item suspect if it is new, recently disturbed, or out of place. Look closely for other IED indicators such as wires or detonating (det) cord. Do not pick anything up. All of the good souvenirs were picked up long ago by other coalition forces or local people. Something left on the ground that appears valuable most likely was placed there deliberately. Successful teams look at their route from the enemys perspective. Remember, the enemy is trying to conceal the device from someone traveling on the route. IED hunting teams that look at the route form potential enemy observation points often find signs of IED preparations. Threat forces can get careless once they get out of sight of the main route, and they may leave wires, camouflage, or even the IED itself in plain sight. Offset teams searching parallel to the protected route can observe these indicators.
Points to Remember. The enemy adapts to your TTPs. To protect yourself and your units, think like the enemy. Prevent emplacement by collecting information about insurgent activities, deterring activities through patrols and counter-IED ambush teams, clearing the roadsides of debris, and reducing the availability of bomb making materials. Avoid attacks while moving by o Driving at 40 mph or more with a 50 m interval between vehicles whenever possible o Staying as far from the shoulder of the road as possible o Being observant about key enemy IED attack threat indicators, like Areas where traffic slows or the terrain could conceal an IED Common items used to camouflage IEDs o Choosing routes with as few visually obscuring or traffic slowing terrain features as possible Reduce effects of IED attacks by hardening vehicles. Conduct training on all of these TTPs. If there is an IED attack, Confirm, Clear, Call and Assess, Cordon, Control.
37
B3L4118
Summary
As can be seen, the IED, a simple design constructed from easily obtainable materials, is a very formidable weapon. The enemys TTPs are effortlessly adaptable to friendly responses. However, an IED is vulnerable. A deprivation of simply one of the necessary items of its implementation, whether lack of materials or funding or friendly forces knowing what to look for, diminishes the IEDs effectiveness dramatically.
References
FMI 3-07 .22 GTA 90-01-001 MCIP 3-17.01 MCIP 3-17.02 No. 05-23 July 05 TC9-21-01(093-89D-01) Counterinsurgency Operations IED and Vehicle Borne IED Improvised Explosive Device Defeat Tactical IED Defeat Ops Joint IED Defeat Task Force Soldiers IED Awareness Guide
Booby Trap
38
B3L4118
REACTER
An example of a unit SOP-driven immediate action drill: Report, Evacuate, Area, Clear the kill zone, Treat casualties, Establish CCP and LZ, Report/recover. Remotely detonating, disrupting, or deflagrating small ordnance at safe distances. Marines and soldiers have attempted to modify this technique to ballistically breach IEDs. Although it may be successful, there is a great deal of risk to ballistically breaching IEDs.
Notes
39
Notes
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3L4258
Military Explosives
Introduction Understanding and properly employing demolitions can mean the difference between mission accomplishment or failure. Using explosives requires much knowledge and responsibility, extensive and thorough planning, and, in some circumstances, patience. The importance of a working knowledge of military explosives is demonstrated in the following synopsis from the book, The Bridge at Dong Ha. On Easter Sunday, 1972, two North Vietnamese infantry divisions, more than 200 T-54 tanks, and supporting units attempted to cross the Cua Viet River over the bridge near the village of Dong Ha, eight miles south of the DMZ. The Easter Offensive was to be the push to ultimately capture Saigon. With his knowledge of military explosives, Captain John W. Ripley, 0302/USMC, serving as an advisor to the 3rd Battalion Vietnamese Marine Corps, halted the North Vietnamese offensive. Captain Ripley successfully placed and detonated over 300 pounds of TNT and C-4 to destroy a section of the steel and timber bridge at Dong Ha. The North Vietnamese were unable to launch another large offensive to capture Saigon for another three years. In This Lesson You will learn the various types of explosives, their intended usage, and how to safely and effectively prepare them for use.
Importance
Topic Military Explosives Demolition Charges Specialized Demolition Charges Demolition Accessories Firing Systems Safety Precautions Summary References Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Notes Terminal Learning Objectives
Page 4 6 7 11 16 21 22 22 22 23
Learning Objectives
Given an M18A1 Claymore mine and sector of fire, while wearing a fighting load, emplace an M18A1 Claymore mine
B3L4258
to ensure the sector of fire is covered. (0300-DEMO-1003) Given a unit, an assault or engineer unit, demolitions, a mission, and a commander's intent, employ demolitions to achieve desired effects of the demolitions in support of the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF-1206) Given a unit, a barrier plan, and material needed to emplace obstacles, direct obstacle emplacement to achieve the effect desired by the commander. (MCCS-DEF-2203) Enabling Learning Objectives Given an M18A1 Claymore mine and sector of fire, while wearing a fighting load, prepare a claymore mine without endangering friendly personnel or equipment. (0300DEMO-1003a) Given a positioned M18A1 claymore mine, while wearing a fighting load, recover a claymore mine to support follow-on operations. (0300-DEMO-1003b) Given a unit, a mission, a mental estimate of the situation, supporting engineer assets, and a commander's intent, employ engineers in support of defensive operations to accomplish the mission. (0302-DEF-1301e) Without the aid of references, describe engineer capabilities that support offensive operations to support mission accomplishment. (0302-OFF-1201g) Without the aid of reference, identify demolitions without error. (0302-OFF-1206a) Without the aid of reference, identify demolition capabilities without error. (0302-OFF-1206b) Without the aid of reference, identify obstacle types without error. (MCCS-DEF-2203a) Given a mission, a commander's intent, obstacle materials, and while leading a rifle squad or platoon, plan obstacles to support the defensive scheme of maneuver. (MCCS-DEF2203b)
B3L4258
Military Explosives
Explosives. Explosives are substances that, through chemical reaction, violently change to a gaseous form. In doing so, they release pressure and heat equally in all directions. The table below describes the two major categories of explosives. Category Low explosives High explosives Description Change from solid to gaseous state slowly over a sustained period (1300 feet/second) Are ideal when a pushing or shoving effect is required Change from solid to gaseous state almost instantaneously (3280 to 28,880 feet/second) Produce a shattering effect on the target
Military Explosives. To be suitable in military operations, explosives must: Be: Produced from readily available raw materials Inexpensive to manufacture Suitable for use under water or in a damp climate Conveniently sized and shaped for packaging, storing, distribution, handling, and emplacing by troops o Assigned a relative effectiveness factor (a ratio that compares the effectiveness of any given military explosive to the effectiveness of TNT) o o o o Have: o Relative insensitivity to shock or friction, yet able to be positively detonated by easily prepared initiators o A shattering effect (Brisance) and potential energy adequate for the purpose o The stability adequate to retain usefulness for a reasonable time when stored in any climate at temperatures between 80 degrees Fahrenheit (F) and 165 degrees F o High density (weight per unit of volume) o Minimum toxicity (poisonous effect) when stored, handled, and detonated o A high energy output per unit of volume
CAUTION: Since explosives contain their own oxidizer, burning explosives cannot be extinguished by smothering. Whenever explosives burn, possible detonation poses a hazard. Personnel should not attempt to extinguish burning explosives without competent supervision and the advice and assistance of explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel.
B3L4258
Explosive
Principal Uses
TNT
Tetrytol 75/25 Tetryl Sheet explosive M118 and M186 Pentolite 50/50 Nitroglycerine Bangalore torpedo, M1A2 Shaped charges M2A3, M2A4, and M3A1 Composition B Composition C4 and M112 Composition A3 PETN
Dangerous
Excellent
1.2 1.2 2,400 24,400 25,200 25,600 25,600 1.5 1.17 1.17 1.14
Bursting charge Commercial dynamites Demolition charge (wire and minefield breaching) Demolition charge (cutting holes) Bursting charge Demolition charge (cut and breach)
1.35 1.34
RDX
Booster charge Bursting charge Detonating cord Blasting caps Demolition charges Blasting caps Composition explosives
1.66
Slight
8,360
27,400
1.6
Dangerous
Excellent
B3L4258
Demolition Charges
Demolition Charges. The table below lists the principle uses, advantages, and limitations as well as a diagram of three demolition charges (refer to the Characteristics of US Explosives table, page 5, for their characteristics).
Charge Trinitrotoluene (TNT) Principle Uses Standard demolition charge for all types of demolition work The -pound charge used primarily for training
Advantages Has a high detonating velocity Is o Stable o Relatively insensitive to shock or friction o Water resistant o Convenient in size, shape, and packaging
Limitations Cannot be molded Is difficult to use on irregularly shaped targets Not recommended for use in closed spaces (explosion produces poisonous gases)
TNT
M112 Block Demolition Charge (C-4)
Primarily for o Cutting o Breaching o All types of demolition work Because of high shattering effect, ideally suited for cutting steel and other hard materials
Can be cut and molded to fit irregularly shaped targets Adhesive backing allows charge to be attached to any relatively flat, clean, dry surface above the freezing point Paper color aids in camouflage
Odd weight, 1.25 versus 1 pound (calculating charge weight is difficult) Adhesive backing will not adhere to wet, dirty, rusty, or frozen surfaces
B3L4258
Suitable for o Cratering operations o Ditching operations Has been designed as a standard cratering charge Can also be used in destroying o Buildings o Fortifications o Bridge abutments
Size and shape of charge makes it ideal for cratering operations Is inexpensive to produce compared to other explosives
Ammonium nitrate absorbs moisture When wet, is impossible to detonate (to ensure detonation use only metal containers showing no evidence of water damage) Detonate all charges placed in wet or damp boreholes as soon as possible
B3L4258
M183 Demolition Charge Assembly (Satchel Charge). The table below lists the characteristics and principal uses as well as a diagram of the M183 demolition charge assembly (satchel charge).
Characteristics
Consists of o M112 (C-4) demolition blocks 16 total o Priming assemblies 4 total Total explosives weight is 20 pounds Demolition blocks are packed in two bags of 8 blocks per bag Bags are housed in an M85 canvas carrying case
Principle Uses Primarily in breaching obstacles Demolition of structures where large demolition charges are required
B3L4258
B3L4258
Functioning Effects
Contains o 1.5 pounds of C-4 explosive o 700 steel pellets encased in plastic Is equipped with 33 meters of firing wire attached to an electric blasting cap and an M57 power source (clacker) (which provides only enough power to detonated at 33 meters) If distance is increased, use an alternate power source, wire, and cap One out of six contains a tester (to ensure the firing wire, electric cap, and M57 clacker are functioning properly) Command detonated using the M57 clacker Designed to deliver o Lethal steel ball bearings o In a fan-shaped pattern o Over a designated target area Effective casualty radius is o 50 meters in a 60-degree arc o 2 meters high with a forward danger area of 250 meters Minimum back and side blast safety distances are o 16 meters in a covered position o 100 meters in an uncovered position
10
B3L4258
Demolition Accessories
Demolition Accessories. Time Fuse. The M700 fuse (see diagram below) is a dark green cord, 0.2 inches in diameter, with a plastic cover. Depending on the time of manufacture, the cover may Be smooth Have single yellow bands around the outside at 12- or 18-inch intervals and double yellow bands at 60- or 90-inch intervals (bands are provided for easy measuring)
The outside covering becomes brittle and cracks easily in arctic temperatures. The burning rate is approximately 40 seconds per foot.
Detonating Cord. The table below lists the characteristics and principal uses, as well as a diagram of detonating cord.
Characteristics Core of PETN or RDX explosive in a textile tube coated with a thin layer of asphalt On top of this layer of asphalt is an outer textile cover finished with a wax gum composition or plastic coating Transmits a detonating wave from one point to another at a rate between 20,000 to 24,000 feet per second A partially submerged, water soaked detonating cord will detonate if initiated from a dry end When exposed to low temperatures o Does not lose explosive properties o Covering becomes stiff and cracks when bent Use great care when using detonating cord primers in arctic conditions
Principal Uses To prime and detonate other explosive charges When its explosive core is detonated by a blasting cap or other explosive device, detonating cord transmits the detonation wave to an unlimited number of explosive charges
11
B3L4258
Detonating Cord
Blasting Caps. The table below describes and diagrams: Electric blasting caps Non-electric blasting caps
Use when a source of electricity such as a blasting machine or battery, is available Lead wires are 12 feet long For ignition, requires 1 amperes of electricity passing through their wires
May be initiated by a o Time blasting fuse o Firing device and detonating cord Because they are difficult to waterproof, when possible, avoid using to prime charges placed o Underwater o In wet boreholes If necessary, use moisture-proof non-electric blasting caps with a waterproof sealing compound
12
B3L4258
M81 Weatherproof Fuse Igniter. The M81 weatherproof fuse igniter (see diagram below) is designed to ignite a time blasting fuse in all sorts of weather conditions, even underwater if properly waterproofed. The fuse is inserted through a sealing rubber grommet and into a split collet, which secures the fuse when the end cap on the igniter is tightened. A pull on the pull ring releases the striker assembly, allowing the firing pin to drive against the primer, which ignites the fuse.
13
B3L4258
Priming Adapter
M2 Cap Crimpers. The M2 cap crimper (see diagram below) is used to squeeze the shell of a non-electric blasting cap around a Time fuse Standard base Detonating cord
securely enough to keep it from being pulled off, but not tight enough to interfere with the burning of the powder train in the fuse of the detonating cord. One leg of the handles is pointed to use in punching cap wells in explosive material for easy insertion of the blasting cap. The other leg is a screwdriver end. Use the cutting jaw for cutting fuse and detonating cord only.
M2 Cap Crimpers
14
B3L4258
Blasting Machine. Use the blasting machine (see diagram below) to provide the electric impulse needed in electric blasting operations. The two types of blasting machine are the: M32 blasting machine, capable of producing enough electricity to set off up to 10 blasting caps M34 blasting machine, capable of setting off up to 50 blasting caps
Blasting Machine
15
B3L4258
Firing Systems
Firing Systems. Non-Electric Firing System. A non-electric system (see diagram below) is one in which an explosive charge is prepared for detonation by means of a non-electric blasting cap. The basic priming materials consist of A non-electric blasting cap, which provides the shock adequate to detonate the explosive A time fuse, which transmits the flame that fires the blasting cap A fuse igniter, which initiates the firing system
The table below lists the steps to prepare a non-electric firing system.
Step 1 2 3 4 Action Test burn time fuse. Prepare time fuse to necessary length. Attach fuse igniter. Crimp blasting cap to time fuse (see diagram below).
16
B3L4258
Electric Firing System. An electric firing system (see diagram below) is one in which electricity is used to fire the primary initiating element. An electric impulse supplied from a power source, usually an electric blasting machine, travels through the firing wire and cap lead wires to fire an electric blasting cap. The chief components of the system are the: Electric blasting cap Firing wire Blasting machine or battery or alternate power source
The table below lists the steps to prepare an electric firing system.
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Action Lay out and test firing wire. Test blasting caps. Connect caps to circuit. Insert caps into charges. Test entire circuit. Test blasting machine. Connect blasting machine to circuit. Fire.
17
B3L4258
Detonating Cord Priming. Alternate Tie #2. The table below lists the steps for Alternate Tie #2 (TNT only).
Step 1 Action Place a loop of detonating cord on the explosive (see diagram below).
2 3 4
Alternate Method #2 Wrap the cord four to six times around the explosive. Be sure the first wrap goes immediately over the short leg of the loop, wrapping towards the loop. Insert the running end through the eye of the loop. Tighten the knot by pulling on the short leg.
18
B3L4258
Overhand Knot
Branch Line Connections. Fasten a branch line to a main line with a girth hitch with one extra turn (see diagram below).
19
B3L4258
Trunk Line
Ring Main. Make a ring main by: Bringing the main line back in the form of a loop Attaching the main line to itself with a girth hitch with one extra turn
A ring main will detonate an almost unlimited number of charges. The ring main makes the detonation of all charges more positive because the detonating wave approaches the branch lines from both directions. The charges will be detonated even if there is one break in the ring main.
20
B3L4258
Safety Precautions
General Safety Precautions for Handling Military Explosives. Do not detonate demolitions electrically during any electrical, dust, sand, or snow storm of a severity great enough to produce atmospheric static electrical charges or when such a storm is within three miles. Do not work with electric blasting caps while wearing static electricity-producing clothing (nylon, silk). Do not ingest any explosive material. Do not get in the smoke of burning explosives. The vapors are toxic if inhaled. Additionally, the smoke will penetrate ordinary clothing and may result in severe dermatitis. When placing charges underground, do not bury blasting caps (instead use detonating cord). Carry blasting caps in approved containers and keep them out of the direct rays of the sun. Within 100 feet of an area in which explosives are being handled or used, do not permit: o Smoking o Matches o Other sources of fire or flame
Never kink a time fuse. Before investigating non-electric misfires, wait 30 minutes. Before firing any charge, always sound off, Fire in the hole! three successive times. Use only crimpers to crimp blasting caps. Do not store or transport caps with high explosives. Before unwinding your electrical reel, always be sure the person in charge has the power source.
21
B3L4258
Summary
Handling explosives requires responsibility and knowledge. They must be treated with respect and never abused. If an explosive charge is not prepared correctly and an attempt to initiate the explosive fails someone now has to approach the explosive to render it safe for others and/or to accomplish the mission.
References
Reference Number or Author FM 20-32 FM 5-100 FM 5-101 FM 5-102 FM 5-103 FM 5-250 FM 5-34 MCWP 3-17 Reference Title Mine/Countermine Operations Engineers in Combat Operations Mobility Counter-mobility Survivability Explosives and Demolitions Engineer Field Data MAGTF Engineer Operations
Low Explosives
High Explosives
EOD
22
B3L4258
Notes
23
Notes
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3M4078
Importance
In This Lesson
B3M4078
B3M4078
Enabling Learning Objectives (continued) 0302-DEF-1303b Without the aid of reference, describe the structure of the 60mm mortar section in the weapons platoon without omission. 0302-DEF-1303c Without the aid of reference, describe the structure of the 81mm mortar platoon in the weapons company without omission. 0302-DEF-1304a Without the aid of reference, describe the capabilities of assault weapons without omission. 0302-DEF-1304b Without the aid of reference, describe the structure of the assault section in the weapons platoon without omission. 0302-DEF-1305a Without the aid of reference, describe the capabilities of anti-armor weapons without omission. 0302-DEF-1305b Without the aid of reference, describe the structure of the anti-armor platoon in the weapons company without omission. MCCS-ATFP-2103a Without the aid of reference, describe sniper assets available in the infantry battalion without omission.
B3M4078
Weapons Platoon
Mission To provide fire support coordination, light mortar, antimechanized assault, and medium machine gun support for the infantry company and its subordinate elements. Platoon Headquarters: Platoon Commander, First Lieutenant, 0302 Platoon Sergeant, Gunnery Sergeant, 0369 Platoon Messenger, Pvt-Cpl, 03XX Total: 3 Marines. LWCMS Section: Section Leader, Staff Sergeant, 0369 Three squads per section, one M224 Mortar per squad, squad leader/gunner, Sergeant 0341 o Assistant gunner, Lance Corporal, 0341 o Ammoman, Private, 0341 Table of Equipment (T/E): There are three M224 LWCMS mortars within the section and one per squad. Total: 10 Marines. Machine Gun Section: Section Leader, Staff Sergeant, 0369 Three squads per section, squad leader, Sergeant, 0331 Two machine gun teams per squad o Team leader, Corporal, 0331 o Gunner, Lance Corporal, 0331 o Ammoman, Private, 0331 T/E: There are six M240B medium machine guns per section, two per squad, and one per machine gun team. Total: 22 Marines. Assault Section Section Leader, Sergeant, 0351 Three squads per section, Squad leader/Gunner, Corporal, 0351 (total 4 Marines) Assault team two teams per squad Team leader/gunner, Lance Corporal, 0351 Assistant Gunner, Lance Corporal, 0351 T/E: There are six MK153 SMAWs per section, two per squad, one per team. Total: 13 Marines. Total for the Platoon: 48 Marines.
Task Organization, Light Weight Crew Served Mortar System (LWCMS) Section
B3M4078
Weapons Company
Mission To provide fire support coordination, medium mortar, antimechanized assault, and heavy machine gun, support for the infantry battalion and its subordinate elements. Company Headquarters Company Commander, Major, 0302 Executive Officer, Captain, 0302 First Sergeant, First Sergeant, 8999 Operations Chief, Master Sergeant, 0369 Property NCO, Sgt, 0311 Messenger/Driver, Corporal, 0311 Messenger/Driver, Corporal, 0311 Total: 7. 81MM Mortar Platoon Platoon Headquarters o Platoon commander, First Lieutenant, 0302 o Platoon sergeant, Gunnery Sergeant, 0848 o Ammo tech, Lance Corporal, 2311 o Ammo man/Driver, Lance Corporal, 0341 Sections (2) o Section headquarters Section Leader Two Ammomen, Lance Corporal, 0341 Plotter Sergeant, 0341 Recorder Corporal, 0341 Recorder/Driver, Lance Corporal, 0341 Forward Observer, Corporal, 0341 Forward Observer, Corporal, 0341 o Mortar Squad (4) Squad leader, Sergeant 0341 Gunner, Corporal, 0341 Assistant Gunner, Lance Corporal, 0341 Ammoman Private First Class, 0341 Ammoman Private First Class, 0341 Ammoman Private First Class, 0341 T/E: There are eight 81MM Mortars per platoon broken down into four mortars per section, and one per squad. Total for the Platoon: 68.
B3M4078
B3M4078
B3M4078
The 60mm mortar, M224 Lightweight Crew Served Mortar (LWCMS), is a smoothbore, muzzle loaded, high angle of fire weapon. The components of the mortar consist of a canon, sight, mount, and baseplate. The 60mm mortar section is located in the weapons platoon of the rifle company, is armed with three 60mm mortars, and is immediately responsive to commanders need for fire. Effective use and employment of the 60mm mortar depends upon the training and knowledge of the company leaders since there is no forward observer or fire direction center in the 60mm Mortar Section. Computation of fire commands and fire adjustment must be understood by platoon commanders, squad leaders, and others in the company. Accordingly, the principle of indirect fire and the methods of employing the 60mm mortar must be mastered by all hands.
B3M4078
Rates of Fire/Range
Maximum rate of fire is 30 rounds per minute for four minutes. Sustained rate is 20 rds per minute. Maximum effective range: 3500m.
There are five types of ammunition: High explosive. White phosphorus. Illumination. Practice. Training.
10
B3M4078
27.6 pounds 12.9 pounds 20 pounds 47.6 pounds 49 inches 4 grooves with a uniform right-hand twist. One turn in 12 inches. 100rpm 200 rpm 650 rpm 2,800 fps 3,725 meters 1,800 meters 600 meters
Description. The MK153 SMAW is a one-man operable, 83 mm smooth bore, shoulder-fired, rocket launcher with a spotting rifle attached to the right side of the launcher tube. The encased rocket is fitted into the aft end of the launcher, and the fiberglass encasement is discarded after use. The spotting rifle, which improves firstround hit probability, is fed 9 mm tracers by a magazine, which holds six rounds. The 9 mm round is ballistically matched to the 83mm rocket.
11
B3M4078
SMAW Ammunition
Specifications
Rocket launcher Length Weight Encased rocket (as carried) Length Weight Caliber Spotting rifle Length Weight Caliber Telescopic sight (MK 42 MOD 0) Length Weight Magnification Field of view Weapon ready to fire Length Weight Range Minimum Maximum Maximum effective (HEDM) Maximum effective (HEAA) Time of flight to 250 m
29.9 inches 16.9 pounds 27.3 inches 12.7 pounds 83 mm 27.3 inches 3.74 pounds 9 mm 7.9 inches 1.99 pounds 3.8 times 6 degrees 53.1 inches 29.0 pounds 17 m 1800 m 250 m 500 m 1.6 sec
__________________________________________________________________
12
B3M4078
__________________________________________________________________
M252 81 MM Mortar
The 81mm mortar, M252, is a smoothbore, muzzle loaded, and high angle of fire weapon. The components of the mortar consist of a cannon, sight, mount, and baseplate. The 81mm mortar platoon is located in the weapons company of the infantry battalion and is organized into a platoon headquarters and two 81mm mortar sections with four mortars per section for a total of 8 Mortars per platoon. The weapons company commander has administrative control (feeding, billeting, clothing, etc.), but tactical control is directly in the hands of the battalion commander working through the 81mm mortar platoon commander. The 81mm mortar is the infantry battalion commanders organic indirect fire weapon in the same manner as the 60mm mortar is the rifle company commanders organic indirect fire weapon. Characteristics Cannon M253 Mount M177 Base-plate M3A1 Sight M64A1 SL-3 Complete: 35 lbs 27 lbs 25.5 lbs 2.25 lbs 89.75 lbs
13
B3M4078
Javelin
The Javelin is a fire-and-forget weapon system (increases gunner survivability), soft launch (very small backblast), dual mode (top attack or direct fire), man-portable, medium antitank weapon. The Javelin missile has an increased capability to engage and defeat tanks and other armored vehicles. The command launch unit (CLU) consists of the: Day sight. Night sight. Controls. Indicators.
The round is sealed in a launch tube assembly that is composed of the: Propulsion section. Guidance and control section. Warhead and fuse section. Control surfaces and seeker section.
Ranges: Maximum 2000 meters + Maximum effective 2000 meters Minimum 65 meters Penetration capabilities are classified. The Javelin penetrates all known armor, well in excess of 30 inches of rolled homogeneous steel.
14
B3M4078
65 meters 3750 meters Round has a 10-inch probe in front of the warhead. Purpose of the probe is to detonate any reactive armor found on enemy armored vehicles Round is a fly-over shoot down missile Once missile flies over the vehicle, the missile will shoot down two warheads on top of the vehicle In excess of 36 inches of homogeneous steel In all weather conditions in which the gunner can see the target through the day or night sight tracker In temperature of 32 degrees to +60 Celsius (-25 degrees to +140 degrees Fahrenheit) At altitudes up to 3050 meters (10,000 feet). Cold weather (<0 degrees Fahrenheit) range decreases to 3000 meters
TOW 2B
Penetration Operates
15
B3M4078
The Browning machine gun caliber .50 HB, M2 (see picture below) is a belt-fed, recoiloperated, air-cooled, crew-served machine gun. The gun is capable of single shot, as well as automatic fire, and operates on the short recoil principle. More information on the M2 will be presented in B3M4238 Heavy Machine Guns.
The MK19 is a belt-fed, air-cooled, blowback-operated, crew-served, fully automatic 40 mm grenade launcher. More information on the MK 19 will be presented in B3M4238 Heavy Machine Guns.
16
B3M4078
M40A3 Anti-personnel
The M40A3 is a 7.62mm sniper rifle with a maximum effective range of 1000 meters. It has a 10x scope and a five round magazine.
The SASR is an semi-automatic, 50 cal rifle that weighs about 32 pounds. It has a max effective range of 1800 meters and a 10 round box magazine.
Summary
In this class you received a basic instruction of the task organization of the weapons company and platoon and a brief introduction to the weapons found in each. Further instruction and evaluation of the crew served weapons within an infantry battalion is in upcoming classes, practical application events, and live fire exercises.
17
B3M4078
References
Reference Number or Author FM 7-90 FM 23-90 FM23-91 MCWP 3-11.1 TM 9-1425 TM 09397B MCI 0351 MCWP 3-15.1 FMFM 2-11 FM 23-34 Reference Title Tactical Employment of Mortars Ch1 Infantry Mortars Ch1-5 Mortar Gunnery Ch 1 Rifle Platoon and Company Technical Manual for the Javelin, Army Technical Manual for the Javelin, Marine Corps SMAW and LAW gunner Machine Guns and Machine Gunnery Anti-Armor Operations TOW Missile System
Notes
18
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3M4178
Importance
In This Lesson
B3M4178
B3M4178
History
The M240B medium machine gun (see diagram below) is a result of a Marine Corps search for a weapon that could fire at an extended range with greater dependability and accuracy than the M60E3. The search was not long, for the machine gun chosen was already in the Marine Corps inventory. The M240C and E series machine guns are found on the light armored vehicle (LAV) and the M-1 Abrams main battle tanks. The M240B is the first ground variant, made by Fabrique Nationale of Herstal, Beligum, (the same manufacturer of the M249 squad automatic weapon). A European version, called the FN MAG 58, is used by over 100 different nations throughout the world and is the premier machine gun used in NATO. The M240B is fitted with improvements for ground mounting such as a forward heat shield, ammunition adapter, and a hydraulic buffer. The M240B is a battle-proven machine gun that has demonstrated many times the highest possible performance levels in combat throughout the world.
B3M4178
Characteristics
Description. The M240B machine gun is a belt-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated, fully automatic machine gun that fires from the open bolt position. The M240B machine gun is found in the machine gun section of the weapons platoon of every rifle company in the Marine Corps. Six of these machine guns are in each section, divided into three, two-gun squads. Specifications. Machine gun 27.1 pounds Spare barrel case, SL-3 complete 12.9 pounds Tripod, flex mount, and T&E 20 pounds Total system 47.1 pounds Length of machine gun 49 inches Rifling 4 grooves with a uniform right-hand twist. One turn in 12 inches. Sustained rate of fire 100 rpm Rapid rate of fire 200 rpm Cyclic rate of fire 650 rpm Muzzle velocity 2,800 fps Maximum Range 3,725 meters Effective range (suppression) 1,800 meters Grazing fire 600 meters
B3M4178
Characteristics (Continued)
Component Groups (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) Eight Main Components (see diagram below). Barrel assembly Butt-stock and buffer assembly Driving spring rod assembly Bolt and operating rod assembly Trigger-housing assembly Cover assembly Feed tray Receiver assembly
B3M4178
Characteristics (Continued)
Safety The safety (see diagram below) is located in the trigger-housing group. Push the safety from left to right (S visible) to render the weapon safe. When the safety is engaged, the cutaway portion of the safety bar is not aligned with the safety lug of the sear. When the trigger is pulled, the sear cannot rotate downward and the bolt cannot be released to go forward.
Safety
Push the safety from right to left (F visible) to render the weapon ready to fire. When the safety is not engaged, the cutaway portion of the safety bar is aligned with the safety lug on the sear. The sear is allowed to move downward when the trigger is pulled. Note: The weapon cannot be placed on safe when the bolt is forward.
B3M4178
Functioning
Feeding When the bolt is to the rear, the outer feed pawls are outside the first round of ammunition. The inner feed pawls are between the first and second rounds. As the bolt moves forward to fire the round in the feed tray groove, the belt feed pawl moves to the left. It moves up and over the second round in the belt of ammunition and is now in position to drag the second round into the feed tray groove. As the bolt moves to the rear after firing, the belt feed pawl moves to the right, dragging the second round into the feed tray groove. Inside the cover, the cam roller, feed arm with control spring, feed arm fork, and pivot arm exist only so the feed pawls can move back and forth, dragging rounds into position to be chambered. Chambering is the process of stripping a round from the belt and seating it in the chamber. As the bolt travels forward, the upper locking lug of the bolt contacts the base of the cartridge. The bolt strips the round from the belt link. The chambering ramp angles downward and forces the round toward the chamber along with the spring tension of the cartridge guide pawl. The cartridge guide pawl also holds back the belt link. When the round is fully seated in the chamber, the extractor snaps over the extractor rim of the cartridge, and the ejector is depressed. During chambering, the bolt enters the barrel socket as the drive spring drives the operating rod forward. The locking lever, on which the bolt is riding, swings forward pushing the bolt forward and locking it to the barrel socket. Although the term, locking, is used here, note that in the M240B the bolt and barrel do not physically inter-lock. This is why the barrel can be removed even when the bolt is forward. After the bolt reaches its locked position, the operating rod moves forward, independent of the bolt. The operating rod carries the striker of the fixed firing pin through the aperture in the face of the bolt, striking and detonating the primer of the cartridge.
Chambering
Chambering
Firing
B3M4178
Functioning (Continued)
Unlocking After the cartridge ignites and the projectile passes the gas port, part of the gases enter the gas cylinder. The rapidly expanding gases enter the hollow end cap of the gas piston and force the operating assembly to the rear, providing the power for the last four steps in the cycle of functioning. The operating rod now moves rearward, independent of the bolt, for a short distance. At this point, the locking lever begins to swing toward the rear, carrying the bolt with it into its unlocked position, and clears the barrel socket. The extractor grips the rim of the cartridge as the bolt and operating rod pull the case from the chamber. As the case is withdrawn from the chamber, the ejector exerts a push from the top, and the extractor exerts a pull from the bottom. The casing falls from the gun as soon as it reaches the cartridge ejection port. At approximately the same time, the empty link is forced out of the link ejection port between the cartridge stops on the feed tray by the next round moving into the feed tray groove. Cocking is the process of placing the parts of the gun in position to fire the next round. During the rearward independent movement of the operating rod, the firing pin striker is withdrawn from the face of the bolt. When the bolt has moved far enough to the rear to pick up the next round for chambering, cocking is completed.
Extracting
Ejecting
Cocking
B3M4178
Ammunition
The ammunition is issued in 100-round bandoleers. Weight of a 100 round assault pack (2 per can) is 7 pounds. Basic allowance per gun is 400 rounds. The five types of ammunition are listed below with their characteristics. Type M172 Dummy Description Plain Fluted cartridge No primer or propellant Double tapered neck No bullet Plain Full metal jacketed bullet Orange tip Purpose Training (loading/unloading) Gun drills Simulated firing Field firing Personnel Light material vehicles Observing fire Incendiary effects Signaling Marking (900m burnout) Light armored targets
M62 Tracer
M61/M993 Armor-piercing
10
B3M4178
Unloading/Clearing
The following is the unloading and clearing procedures for the M240B:
Step 1
Determine if the barrel is hot (200 rounds in 2 minutes or less). A hot barrel may cause the round to cook off. CAUTION: If the barrel is hot and a round is still chambered, Keep the cover closed Ensure the weapon is pointed in a safe direction Wait until the barrel cools
Step 2
If the bolt is not already locked to the rear, pull the bolt to the rear and lock it. Place the weapon on SAFE. Raise the cover and remove the belted ammunition. Lift the feed tray and inspect the chamber. Close the cover. Place the weapon on FIRE. While holding the cocking handle to the rear, pull the trigger and ease the bolt forward.
11
B3M4178
General Disassembly
General disassembly (field stripping) is the separation of the M240B into five main groups. Before beginning ensure the weapon is pointed in a safe direction and is clear.
Step 1 Step 2
With the bolt forward, raise the cover. Depress the butt-stock latch located on the underside of the butt-stock where it joins the receiver (see diagram below).
12
B3M4178
13
B3M4178
Step 5
Grasp the bolt and operating rod assembly and remove them from the rear of the receiver. To separate the operating rod and bolt, remove the spring-loaded pin that holds them together Then, pull the bolt forward until it is clear of the firing pin, thus disengaging the bolt from the operating rod.
14
B3M4178
Step 7
Rotate the rear of the trigger housing assembly down (see diagram below).
Step 8
Disengage the holding notch at the front of the assembly from its recess on the bottom of the receiver.
15
B3M4178
16
B3M4178
Detailed Disassembly
Detailed disassembly involves removal of component parts of some of the main groups.
Step 1
Detailed Disassembly of the Operating Group. Remove the spring-loaded pin that holds the bolt and operating rod together (see diagrams below).
Step 2
Hold the barrel at the point where the gas system attaches to it.
17
B3M4178
18
B3M4178
19
B3M4178
Detailed Assembly
Step 1 To replace the Feed tray, lay the feed tray on the receiver so the feed tray guides are aligned with the receiver brackets Place the cover onto the receiver aligning its mounting holes with the mounting brackets on the receiver. Push the cover down into its closed position. Then, insert the cover hinge spring pin into the holes to affix the cover and feed tray to the receiver Snap the heat shield on top of the barrel, engaging the front hinges before snapping the rear of the shield in place. Insert the gas plug into the gas regulator. Place the collar over the forward end of the plug. Push against face of the collar while rotating counterclockwise until it locks into place. Pull on the collar to ensure it is in the locked position. To join the bolt and operating rod, hold the rod in one hand, then position the rear of the bolt and slide it over the firing pin. Align the holes on the bolt with those on the operating rod. Push the spring-loaded pin (inserted from the left or right) through them to secure the two assemblies together.
Step 2
Step 7 Step 8
Step 9 Step 10
20
B3M4178
General Assembly
Step 1 Insert the barrel socket into the receiver forward of the cover and align the rear of the gas plug with the gas cylinder tube in front of the bipod.
Step 2
Fully seat the barrel in the receiver. Rotate the carrying handle down to its lowered position to lock the barrel in place. Check for proper headspace by rotating the barrel-changing handle while counting the number of clicks heard. You should hear a minimum of two clicks but not more than seven. CAUTION: If this is not the case, do not fire the weapon; turn it in for higher echelon maintenance/inspection. Insert the holding notch on the front of the trigger housing into its recess on the bottom of the receiver (see diagram below).
Step 3
Step 4
21
B3M4178
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9 Step 10
Step 11
Step 12
Extend the bolt to the unlocked (forward) position and then push the entire bolt and operating rod assembly inside the receiver. Pull the trigger so that the assembly can slide all the way into the receiver.
Step 13
22
B3M4178
Step 15
Step 16
Step 17 Step 18
23
B3M4178
Lubricants
Before Firing
Inspect for cleanliness, proper mechanical condition, and missing or broken parts. Press the barrel release latch and turn the barrel carrying handle clockwise while counting the number of clicks (fewer than 2 clicks or more than 7 clicks indicates a possible barrel defect) Remove excess oil from the: Bore Chamber Barrel socket Face of the bolt
Lubricate the gun by placing a light coat of CLP on the: Operating rod: Apply CLP on those recesses along the side that make contact with the receiver rails. Bolt: Place a very small amount of CLP on the o Spring pin o Roller o Other moving parts Receiver: With the bolt to the rear, apply a line of CLP on either side of the bolt. Manually pull the bolt back and forth, so that CLP is spread over the bolt and receiver rails.
During Firing
During firing, maintain a light coat of CLP on the parts listed in the general assembly section above. Ensure that the gas system's connections remain tight. Change barrels when necessary.
24
B3M4178
Inspection
25
B3M4178
26
B3M4178
To raise the bipod legs, squeeze them together (see diagram below) and rotate the legs rearward and upward into the slot on the bottom of the receiver until the bipod latch engages, locking them in position.
The M240Bs bipod pivots on the ball joint, allowing the gunner to quickly and easily move the weapon to the right or left.
27
B3M4178
The traversing bar: Connects the two rear legs Is hinged on one side with a sleeve and on the other side with a sleeve latch Allows the tripod to collapse to a closed position for carrying or storage or to lock in an open extended position for use Also supports the T&E mechanism Engraved on the bar is a scale, graduated in 5 mil increments, that measures direction in mils. The scale is numbered every 100 mils from 0 in the center to 450 mils on the left side and 425 mils on the right side (see diagram below).
28
B3M4178
The purpose of the T&E mechanism (see diagram below) is to provide controlled manipulation and the ability to engage predetermined target. The traversing portion of the mechanism consists of the: Traversing handwheel Traversing screw Offset Head Traversing slide with lock lever
OFFSET HEAD
29
B3M4178
Gun Bag
The complete gun bag (see diagram below) is used to carry the Machine gun Tripod Pintle Traversing and Elevating mechanism Spare barrel All user maintenance equipment Other accessories (SL-3 components)
The gun bag keeps the gun and all its components together and protected during events such as unit movements for embarkation on ships or aircraft.
30
B3M4178
31
B3M4178
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6 Step 7
32
B3M4178
The table below outlines the steps to change the barrel for a tripod-mounted gun; however, they are very similar to those for a bipod-mounted gun: Step 1 You may change the barrel with the bolt forward or to the rear. You do not necessarily need to unload the weapon; however, it must be placed on safe, and the gunner must maintain positive control of the cocking lever when the bolt is to the rear. The gunner depresses the barrel locking latch with the left hand and keeps it in that position (see diagram below).
Step 2
Step 3
The team leader separates the barrel from the receiver by Grasping the barrel by the changing handle Rotating the changing handle to its upright position Pushing forward Pulling up
33
B3M4178
Step 5
The team leader: Inserts the barrel socket into the receiver Aligns the gas plug with the gas cylinder Pulls to the rear until the barrel is fully seated
Step 6
Once the barrel is fully seated, the team leader lowers the barrelchanging handle, while counting the clicks (minimum two, maximum seven) to ensure proper headspace.
Malfunctions
A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satisfactorily; the gun will fire but fires improperly. Defective ammunition or improper operation of the gun by a crewmember is not considered a malfunction. Two of the more common malfunctions are sluggish operation and runaway gun. Sluggish Operation Instead of firing at its normal rate (approximately 9 to 10 rounds per second), a sluggish gun fires very slowly due to excessive: Friction usually due to lack of lubrication excessive dirt/carbon in the gas system or on the bolt and receiver rails loose connections in the gas system
Loss of gas, usually due to To remedy continued sluggish operation, clean, lubricate, tighten, or replace parts as required.
34
B3M4178
Malfunctions (continued)
Runaway Gun Runaway gun is when a gun continues to fire after the trigger is released; firing is uncontrolled. A runaway gun is usually caused by a worn, broken, or burred sear; the sear shoulder is unable to grab the operating rod and hold it to the rear also cause by an excessively worn sear notch on the operating rod
To stop a runaway gun, for both tripod and bipod-mounted guns, the team leader twists and breaks the belt of ammunition. The remedy for runaway gun is to replace worn parts. Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty action of the gun defective ammunition
In short, the gun stops firing. Stoppages must be cleared quickly and firing resumed.
Immediate Action
Immediate action is action that the gunner/crew performs to reduce a stoppage, without investigating its cause, and quickly return the gun to action. Hang fire and cook off are terms that describe the ammunition condition and should be understood in conjunction with immediate action procedures. Hang Fire A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer detonates after being struck by the firing pin but some problem with the propellant powder causes it to burn too slowly and delays the firing of the projectile. Wait five seconds before investigating a stoppage further because if the round goes off with the cover of the weapon open: personnel could be injured equipment could be damaged
35
B3M4178
WARNING: Climate affects the rate at which a machinegun barrel heats and cools. For example, a machinegun employed in a hot, arid climate will heat up and likely cause a cook-off much sooner than one employed in a cold, damp climate. Conversely, a machinegun barrel will cool off much more quickly in a colder climate. To mitigate the risk of a hot gun, barrels should be interchanged whenever possible to allow them to cool off when not in use. The table on the following page lists the steps for immediate action for the M240B.
36
B3M4178
Step
1 2
Action
Shout, Misfire! Wait 5 seconds after the misfire to guard against a hang fire. Within the next 5 seconds (to guard against a cook off), pull the charging handle to the rear and observe the ejection port. If brass: was seen ejecting, attempt to fire again did not eject, place the weapon on S, and determine if the barrel is: o Hot (200 rounds or more fired in the last 2 minutes) o Cold
3 Step 1 2 3 Hot Barrel Assume a live round is in the chamber. Wait until the barrel has reached air temperature (15 minutes). Proceed with cold barrel procedures. Cold Barrel Raise the feed cover. Remove ammo belt and links. Inspect the chamber. If the chamber Is clear: o Reload. o Attempt to fire. Has brass present: o Execute clear gun (use a cleaning rod to punch the bore). o Reload. o Attempt to fire.
In either case, if the weapon fails to fire repeat cold barrel procedures a second time. If the weapon fails to fire again, execute remedial action.
37
B3M4178
Remedial Action
When immediate action fails to reduce the stoppage, take remedial action. Remedial action involves investigating the cause of the stoppage which may involve some disassembly of the weapon and replacement of parts to correct the problem. Two common causes of stoppage that may require remedial action are failure to extract due to either a stuck cartridge or ruptured cartridge.
Stuck Cartridge
Some swelling of the cartridge occurs when it fires. If the swelling is excessive, the cartridge will be fixed tightly in the chamber. If the extractor spring has weakened and does not tightly grip the base of the cartridge, it may fail to extract the round when the bolt moves to the rear. Once the bolt is locked to the rear: Weapon is placed on S, Barrel has been allowed to cool Insert a length of cleaning rod into the muzzle to push the round out through the chamber
Ruptured Cartridge
Sometimes a cartridge is in a weakened condition after firing. In addition, it may swell (as described in stuck cartridge above). In this case, a properly functioning extractor may sometimes tear the base of the cartridge off as the bolt moves to the rear, leaving the rest of the cartridge wedged inside the chamber. In this case, the ruptured cartridge extractor must be used to remove it: remove the barrel insert the extractor into the chamber where it can grip and remove the remains of the cartridge
38
B3M4178
Weapons Conditions
Condition 1 Ammunition in position on feed tray Bolt locked to the rear Weapon on safe Not applicable to the M240B Ammunition in position on feed tray Chamber empty Bolt forward Safety not engaged Feed tray clear of ammunition Chamber empty Bolt forward Safety not engaged
Condition 2 Condition 3
Condition 4
Weapons Commands
These are the commands to bring a Condition 4 weapon to Condition 1.
Step 1
Raised Cover. Ensure the weapon is in condition 4 (bolt forward; weapon on F). Cover Closed. Ensure the weapon is in condition 4 (bolt forward; weapon on F). Raised Cover. Place the first round of the belt in the feed tray groove against the cartridge stop with the open side of the link down (Brass to the Grass). Cover Closed. Insert the first round of a belt of ammunition with the open side of the links down into the feed way until the holding pawl engages it and holds it in place.
Step 2
39
B3M4178
Step 4
To bring the weapon from condition 3 to condition 1 you must: Pull the cocking handle fully to the rear Place the weapon on S. Push the cocking handle fully forward to the locked position. Place the weapon on F. Engage target.
Step 5
Step 1
If the bolt is forward, pull the cocking handle fully to the rear until the bolt locks. Place the weapon on safe while maintaining positive control of the cocking handle. Lower head. Raise the cover and clear the feed tray of ammunition. CAUTION: If the barrel is hot and a round is still chambered, immediately close the cover and feed mechanism assembly. Ensure the weapon is pointed in a safe direction and wait until the barrel cools. A hot barrel may cause the round to cook-off.
Step 2
40
B3M4178
Summary
In this lesson we covered the history, characteristics, nomenclature, assembly and disassembly of the M240B medium machine gun. We will also cover immediate and remedial action, barrel change procedures, mounts and accessories, loading and unloading, weapons conditions, and weapons commands of the M240B medium machine gun.
References
Reference Number or Author MCWP 3-15.1 TM 1005-01-412-3129 Reference Title Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery M240 Technical Manual
41
B3M4178
Notes
42
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3M4238
Importance
In This Lesson
B3M4238
Mounts and Accessories Review Questions Review Question Answers Summary References Glossary Notes Learning Objectives Terminal Learning Objectives
80 89 92 94 94 94 95
Given a M2 heavy machinegun, mount, and ammunition, while wearing a fighting load, perform weapons handling procedures for the M2 heavy machinegun without endangering personnel or equipment. (MCCS-CSW-2101) Given a mounted M2 heavy machine gun, and a headspace and timing gauge, while wearing a fighting load, set headspace and timing on the M2 heavy machinegun in order to bring the weapon into service. (MCCS-CSW-2102) Given a M2 heavy machinegun, loaded with ammunition, with a malfunction or stoppage, while wearing a fighting load, perform immediate action on the M2 heavy machinegun to return the weapon to action. (MCCS-CSW-2103) Given a M2 heavy machinegun, loaded with ammunition, with a malfunction or stoppage not corrected by immediate action, while wearing a fighting load, perform remedial action on the M2 heavy machinegun to return the weapon to action. (MCCSCSW-2104) Given a heavy machinegun, a tripod, a cradle, cleaning gear, and lubricants, maintain heavy machineguns to ensure the weapon is complete, clean, and serviceable. (MCCS-CSW-2106) Given a Mk19 heavy machinegun, mount, and ammunition, while wearing a fighting load, perform weapons handling procedures for the Mk19 heavy machinegun without endangering personnel or equipment. (MCCS-CSW-2107)
B3M4238
Terminal Learning Objectives (continued) Given a Mk19 heavy machinegun and ammunition, while wearing a fighting load, perform immediate action on the Mk19 heavy machinegun in order to return the weapon to action. (MCCS-CSW-2108) Given a Mk19 heavy machinegun, loaded with ammunition, with a malfunction or stoppage not corrected by immediate action, while wearing a fighting load, perform remedial action on the Mk19 heavy machinegun to return the weapon to action. (MCCSCSW-2109) Enabling Learning Objective Without the aid of reference, describe the capabilities of machineguns without omission. (0302-DEF-1302a)
Description. The Browning machine gun caliber .50 HB, M2 (see picture below) is a belt-fed, recoil-operated, air-cooled, crew-served machine gun. The gun is capable of single shot, as well as automatic fire, and operates on the short recoil principle. The machinegun is capable of being fed from either the right or left by repositioning certain parts. The weapon has nonfixed headspace that must be set. Timing must also be adjusted to cause the gun to fire slightly out of battery to prevent damage to moving parts. The force for recoil operation is furnished by expanding powder gases, which are controlled by various springs, cams, and levers. Maximum surface of the barrel and receiver are exposed to permit air-cooling. Perforations in the barrel support allow air to circulate around the breach end of the barrel and help cool the parts. A heavy barrel is used to retard early overheating.
B3M4238
M2 .50 Caliber Machine Gun Sights The windage knob permits deflection changes to right or left of center. The front sight is a fixed blade type with cover (see diagram below).
B3M4238
The table below lists the rates of fire and ranges for the M2 .50 caliber machine gun. Rates of Fire Sustained Rapid Cyclic Range Maximum Maximum Effective Grazing fire
Less than 40 rounds per minute (rpm) 40 or more rpm 450-550 rpm 7400 meters 1830 meters 700 meters
B3M4238
B3M4238
M2 .50 Caliber Machine Gun Components Diagram Number 1 2 Component Barrel group Carrier assembly Purpose Houses cartridges for firing Directs projectile Provides handle to: Carry barrel Remove barrel from the receiver Houses the: Trigger Bolt latch releases lock Buffer tube sleeve Left and right spade grips Feeds linked belt ammunition Positions and holds cartridges in position for extracting, feeding, and chambering Provides feeding, chambering, firing, and extracting, using the propellant gases and recoil spring for power
Backplate group
Cover group
Bolt group
B3M4238
3 4
Again, it is important to remember the lack of a safety when manipulating this weapon system. Unloading & Clearing: The table below lists the steps for unloading/clearing the M2 .50 caliber machine gun. Ensure the weapon is pointed in a safe direction. Step Action Ensure the barrel is cold. If hot (150 rounds in 2 minutes or less), let the 1 weapon sit for 15 minutes. Place weapon in single shot mode. Lock the bolt to the rear by pulling 2 the retracting slide handle to the rear while maintaining positive control. Open the top cover and remove the source of ammunition. Inspect the 3 chamber to ensure it is clear.
10
B3M4238
3 4
The table below lists the steps to execute "MAKE READY" taking the M2 .50 caliber machine gun from condition 2 to condition 1. 1 2 3 Point the weapon in a safe direction. Ensure the bolt latch release is locked down. Ensure the weapon is on automatic. Pull the retracting slide handle to the rear and release it. CAUTION: The weapon is fully loaded.
The table below lists the steps to execute "UNLOAD/CLEAR GUN" taking the M2 .50 caliber machine gun to condition 4. Step Action 1 Ensure the barrel is cold. If hot (150 rounds in 2 minutes or less), let the weapon sit for 15 minutes. 2 Point the weapon in a safe direction and ensure weapon is in single shot mode 3 Unlock the bolt latch release. 4 Raise the cover. 5 Remove the ammunition from the feedway. 6 Pull the retracting slide handle to the rear until it locks. 7 Examine the chamber and T-slot to ensure they are clear of ammunition. 8 Insert a cleaning rod in the muzzle end of the barrel and push it through the bore until it can be seen in the receiver ensuring that the weapon is clear. 9 Return the retracting slide handle forward and depress the bolt latch release sending the bolt forward. Close the cover.
11
B3M4238
12
B3M4238
Immediate Action: Immediate action is the prompt action taken by the gunner without investigating the cause. The gunner performs immediate action; however, every crewmember must be trained to apply immediate action. The table below lists the steps to follow to reduce most stoppages without analyzing their cause in detail. Step Action 1 Yell, Misfire! to inform the gun line that you have a stoppage or malfunction. 2 Wait 5 seconds for the possibility of a hang fire. 3 Within the next 5 seconds, pull the bolt to the rear and watch for feeding and ejecting. 4 If feeding and ejecting occur, aim in and attempt to fire. If weapon Fires continue mission. Fails to fire, determine whether or not you have a hot barrel. If so, wait 15 minutes for barrel to reach air temperature. NOTE: You have a hot barrel if it has fired 150 rounds or more in 2 minutes or less. 5 Once the barrel cools, proceed to remedial action.
13
B3M4238
14
B3M4238
CAUTION: If the bolt is allowed to go forward with the barrel out of the gun, parts may be damaged when the bolt slams forward. The added weight and cushioning effect of the barrel act as a buffer and protect the parts from damage. General Disassembly: General disassembly consists of removing the major groups and assemblies (see diagram below) for inspection and cleaning. The table below lists the eight major groups that must be disassembled in the order they should be removed. Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Major Group Barrell Group Back-Plate Group Driving Spring Rod Assembly Bolt Group Barrel Extension Barrel Buffer Assembly Barrel Buffer Assembly Receiver Group
BACKPLATE GROUP
15
B3M4238
Grasp the retracting slide handle with the right hand, palm up, and pull the recoiling parts to the rear until the lug on the barrel locking spring aligns with the 3/8-inch hole in the right sideplate of the receiver (just below the feedway exit). The barrel can be turned only when the lug is aligned with the 3/8-inch hole. Unscrew the barrel from the receiver (see diagram below). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the threads or barrel locking notches when setting the barrel down.
Pull back slightly on the retracting slide handle and remove the link or spacer from the receiver.
16
B3M4238
Step 1
The bolt must be forward before the backplate is removed. If the bolt is to the rear, push down on the bolt latch release, place palm up on the retracting slide handle, and ease the bolt forward. CAUTION: Take care to prevent the bolt from slamming forward with the barrel removed. The backplate latch lock and latch are below the buffer tube. Pull out on the lock and up on the latch; remove the backplate by lifting it straight up.
WARNING: Never attempt to cock the gun while the backplate is off and the driving spring assembly is in place. If the backplate is off and the driving spring assembly is compressed, the retaining pin on the driving spring rod can slip from its seat in the sideplate and seriously injure anyone behind the gun.
17
Basic Officer Course
B3M4238
Push in on the head of the driving spring rod and push to the left to remove the driving spring rod retaining pin from its seat in the right sideplate. Pull the driving spring assembly to the rear and out of the receiver.
18
B3M4238
If the bolt is accidentally moved all the way to the rear, the bolt latch will engage in the bolt latch notches in the top of the bolt. If this occurs, raise the bolt latch (left of the trigger lever) and push the bolt forward to align the bolt stud with the clearance hole (see diagram below).
19
B3M4238
Place the bolt down on its right side (with the extractor arm up), so that the extractor will not fall from the bolt.
20
B3M4238
Step Action Insert the drift of a combination tool, or other pointed instrument, through 1 the hole in the lower rear corner of the right sideplate. 2 Push in on the barrel buffer body lock. At the same time, place one hand in the receiver and push the barrel extension group and barrel buffer group to the rear (see diagram below).
Remove the barrel buffer group and barrel extension group from the receiver. Separate the two groups by pushing forward on the tips of the accelerator (see diagram below).
21
B3M4238
General Assembly: To assemble the gun, replace the groups and assemblies in reverse order of their removal in disassembly.
22
B3M4238
Push the barrel buffer assembly fully forward (see diagram below).
23
B3M4238
2 3
Push the groups together. As the accelerator rotates to the rear, press down on its tips to ensure positive locking of groups. Slide the bolt group back on to the barrel extension group. Place the groups in the receiver, and push them forward until the barrel buffer body spring lock snaps into position. NOTE: When the parts are properly locked in place, the barrel buffer tube should protrude about 1 1/8 inches from the rear of the barrel buffer body group.
24
B3M4238
Bolt Stud: Follow the steps in the table below to assemble the bolt stud. Step Action Align the stud hole in the bolt with the clearance hole. 1 2 Replace the bolt stud, ensuring that the collar of the stud is inside the sideplate (see diagram below).
Push forward on the bolt stud until the bolt is fully forward.
25
B3M4238
NOTE: At this time, the barrel buffer tube should be completely inside the receiver. If not, the barrel buffer body spring is not properly seated. Backplate Group: Follow the steps in the table below to assemble the backplate group. Step Action Hold the backplate with the latch down and the trigger up; place the 1 backplate guides in their guideways. 2 Hold out on the latch lock and tap the backplate into position until the latch snaps into place (see diagram below).
Release the latch lock and pull up on the backplate group to ensure it is firmly seated.
CAUTION: Do not use the driving rod to drive the bolt forward from the rear position, or you may damage the driving spring group and cause a stoppage.
26
B3M4238
Function Check: Perform a function check as soon as the weapon is assembled to ensure that it has been assembled correctly. Follow the steps in the table below to check the function of the weapon. Step Action Place the weapon in the single-shot mode. 1 2 With the cover closed, lock the bolt to the rear (bolt should stay to rear while in the single-shot mode). Return retracting slide handles to full forward position and press the bolt latch release. Press down on the trigger; weapon should fire. (Check T-slot to ensure that firing pin does protrude.) Open the cover. Place the weapon in the automatic-fire mode. Pull the retractor slide handle to the rear and release. (Bolt should not lock to rear.) Make sure firing pin does not protrude. Press trigger; weapon should fire. Make sure firing pin does protrude.
5 6
7 8 9
27
B3M4238
Routine Care and Cleaning: Before firing (when the situation permits), follow the steps in the table below to ensure efficient functioning of the machine gun. Step Action 1 Disassemble the gun into its major groups or assemblies. 2 Clean the bore and chamber, and lightly oil them. 3 Clean all metal parts thoroughly with CLP. Care and Cleaning Under Unusual Conditions: Extreme cold, hot, dry, and tropical climates affect the gun and its functioning. Take care under these climatic conditions to ensure that the gun is: o Cleaned daily with the prescribed lubricants o Protected from the elements by some sort of cover if possible TM 9-1005-213-10 provides further information on care and cleaning of the gun under unusual climatic conditions.
28
B3M4238
29
B3M4238
Moving parts
T&E Ammunition
30
B3M4238
Headspace and Timing Gauge Headspace: Check and set headspace: o Before firing o After assembling the gun o After replacing the barrel or receiver group
31
B3M4238
Using the retracting slide handle, retract the bolt until the barrel-lockingspring lug is centered in the 3/8-inch hole on the right side of the receiver directly under the feed tray (see diagram below).
32
B3M4238
Hold the bolt in this position and screw the barrel fully into the barrel extension (see diagram below).
WARNING: When resetting the headspace and timing of a gun that has been fired, use an asbestos mitt to avoid burns. 5 With the barrel-locking-spring lug centered in the 3/8-inch hole on the right side of the receiver, unscrew the barrel two notches (clicks). Release the retracting slide handle and allow the bolt to go forward. NOTE: At this point, check the barrel for rotation. Attempt to turn the barrel in either direction; the barrel should not turn. If the barrel does turn, stop and check barrel notches and the barrel locking spring for damage. Pull the bolt to the rear with the retracting slide handle and hold, thus cocking the weapon. Otherwise, the headspace gauge will not fit. Ensure retracting slide handle is in full forward position; depress bolt latch release to release the bolt. Pull the bolt 1/16 to the rear and insert the no-fire gauge between the barrel extension and the trunnion block.
33
B3M4238
10
11 12 13 14 15
16
17
Insert the go end of the gauge between the face of the bolt and the end of the barrel all the way up to the ring. If the go end of the gauge Enters the T-slot freely to the center ring of the gauge and the no-go end will not enter, headspace is correct. Remove gauge. Headspace setting is now complete. Will not enter the T-slot freely, headspace is too tight. Continue with step 11. Retract the bolt, so you can see the barrel-locking lug in the center of the 3/8th-inch alignment hole on the right side of the receiver. Unscrew the barrel one notch (click). Return the bolt fully forward. Recheck headspace (step 10). Repeat steps 10 through 13 until the go gauge fits but the no-go gauge does not fit. NOTE: You should not have to unscrew the barrel more than five notches (clicks) beyond the first setting of two clicks. If this condition does occur, turn in the machine gun to your unit armorer for inspection. If the no-go end of the gauge enters the T-slot, headspace is too loose. Adjust it using the same procedures as above, screwing the barrel into the barrel extension rather than out. Repeat steps 10 through 14, one click at a time, until the no-go gauge does not fit but the go gauge does fit.
34
B3M4238
Depress the trigger; gun should not fire. NOTE: If the gun Does not fire, go to step 5. Does fire, you have early timing. Go to steps 7 through 14 Grasp the retracting slide handle and retract the bolt just enough to remove the no-fire gauge and insert the fire gauge in the same place (see diagram below). Release the retracting slide handle.
35
B3M4238
11 12
13 14 15
WARNING: Never cock the gun or insert the gauge with the backplate off. Try to fire the machine gun by pushing up on the rear of the trigger lever located directly underneath the timing nut; gun should not fire. Screw the timing adjustment nut up (to the right) one click at a time. Push up on the trigger lever after each click. Keep doing this until the gun fires. NOTE: You must apply firm pressure to the trigger lever. Turn the timing adjustment nut an additional two clicks to compensate for heat expansion. Replace the backplate, remove the gauge, and cock the machine gun. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to ensure timing is set correctly.
36
B3M4238
Some of these steps may occur at the same time. Feeding: When the bolt is fully forward and the top is closed, the belt-holding pawl holds the ammunition belt in the feed-way (see diagram below).
37
B3M4238
As the bolt moves forward, the belt-feed slide is moved back into the receiver, pulling with it the next linked cartridge. When the bolt reaches the fully forward position, the belt-holding pawl will snap into place behind the second linked cartridge (see diagram below), holding it in place.
38
B3M4238
As the bolt then moves to the rear, the extractor will pull the cartridge with it, releasing it from the belt. As the extractor moves to the rear, the extractor cam forces it down, causing the cartridge to be moved into the T-slot in the bolt face, preparing the cartridge to be chambered (see diagram below). The extractor is connected under the extractor switch on the side of the receiver until the forward movement of the bolt repositions it, and pressure of the cover extractor spring forces it over the next round.
39
B3M4238
Chambering
Locking: Initially, the energy stored in the driving spring assembly and the compressed buffer disks forces the bolt forward in counter-recoil. At the start of counter-recoil, the barrel buffer body tube lock keeps the accelerator tips from bounding up too soon and catching in the breech lock recess in the bolt. After the bolt travels forward about 5 inches, the lower rear projection of the bolt strikes the tips of the accelerator, turning the accelerator forward. This unlocks the barrel extension from the barrel buffer body group and releases the barrel buffer spring. The barrel buffer spring expands, forcing the piston rod forward. Since the cross groove in the piston rod engages the notch on the barrel extension shank, the action of the barrel buffer spring also forces the barrel extension and barrel forward. Some of the forward motion of the bolt is transmitted to the barrel extension through the accelerator. As the accelerator rotates forward, the front of the accelerator speeds up the barrel extension; at the same time, the accelerator tips slow down the bolt. Locking begins 1 1/8 inches before the recoiling groups (bolt, barrel extension, and barrel) are fully forward. The breech lock in the barrel extension rides up the breech lock cam in the bottom of the receiver into the breech lock recess in the bottom of the bolt, locking the recoiling groups together. The recoiling groups are completely locked together three-fourths of an inch before the groups are fully forward (see diagram on the next page).
40
B3M4238
Locking Firing: (See diagrams below and on next page.) As the trigger is pressed down, it pivots on the trigger pin so that the trigger cam on the inside of the backplate engages and raises the rear end of the trigger lever. This in turn pivots on the trigger lever pin assembly, causing the front end of the trigger lever to press down on the top of the sear stud. The sear is forced down until the hooked notch of the firing pin extension is disengaged from the sear notch. The firing pin spring drives the firing pin and firing pin extension forward; the striker of the firing pin hits the primer of the cartridge, firing the round.
Firing
41
Basic Officer Course
B3M4238
Unlocking
42
B3M4238
Unlocking
Extracting: The force of the explosion has expanded the empty case, which is held by the T-slot; therefore, it fits snugly in the chamber. If the case is withdrawn from the chamber too rapidly, it may be torn. To prevent this, and to ensure slow initial extraction of the case, the top forward edge of the breech lock and the forward edge of the lock recess in the bolt are beveled. As the breech lock is unlocked, the initial movement of the bolt away from the barrel and barrel extension is gradual. The slope of the locking faces facilitates locking and unlocking and prevents sticking. The leverage of the accelerator tips on the bolt speeds extraction after it is started by kicking the bolt to the rear to extract the empty case from the chamber. Ejecting: As the bolt starts its forward movement (counter-recoil), the extractor lug rides below the extractor switch, forcing the extractor assembly farther down until the round is in the center of the T-slot of the bolt. The round, still gripped by the extractor, ejects the empty case from the T-slot. The ejector pushes the last empty case of an ammunition belt out.
43
B3M4238
44
B3M4238
Tripod Mount M3 Each leg ends in a metal shoe that can be stamped into the ground for greater stability. The two trail legs are joined together by the traversing bar. The traversing bar serves as a support for the traversing and elevating mechanism, which in turn supports the rear of the gun. The tripod head furnishes a front support for the mounted gun that is further supported by the short front leg. When the tripod is emplaced on flat terrain with all extensions closed, the adjustable front leg should form an angle of about 60 degrees with the ground. This places the gun on a low mount about 12 inches above the ground. To raise the tripod farther off the ground, extend the telescopic front and trail legs enough to keep the tripod level and maintain the stability of the mount. To set the tripod trail legs: 1. Unscrew the leg-clamping handle, press down on the indexing lever, and extend the leg to the desired length. 2. Align the indexing lever stud with one of the holes in the tripod leg extension. 3. Release the pressure on the indexing lever, allowing the stud to fit the desired hole. 4. Tighten the leg-clamping handle.
45
B3M4238
Traversing and Elevating (T&E) Mechanism The traversing mechanism consists of a Traversing bar Slide Screw assembly
46
B3M4238
To make changes in direction, loosen the traversing slide lock lever and move the slide along the traversing bar; this permits traverse of 400 mils left or right of the zero index in the center of the traversing bar. Readings on the traversing bar are taken from the left side of the traversing slide. For changes of 50 mils or less in deflection, turn the traversing handwheel of the screw assembly; this allows a traverse of 50 mils left or right of center. One click in the traversing handwheel signifies 1 mil change in direction. The elevating mechanism consists of an upper and lower elevating screw. The elevating mechanism is connected to the gun by inserting the quick release pin assembly through the holes in the upper elevating screw yoke and the rear mounting lugs of the receiver. A scale, graduated in mils, is fitted to the upper screw to indicate elevation. This scale is marked to show 250 mils in depression and 100 mils in elevation from the zero setting. The elevating handwheel is graduated in l-mil increments up to 50 mils and is fastened to the elevating screw by a screw lock. This synchronizes the handwheel graduations with those on the upper elevating screw. A springactuated index device produces a clicking sound when the handwheel is turned. Each click equals 1 mil change in elevation. The handwheel is turned Clockwise to depress the barrel Counterclockwise to elevate the barrel
47
B3M4238
Pintle The weight of the pintle and traversing and elevating mechanism are considered as part of the total weight of the tripod mount, M3 (44 pounds). Truck Mount, M36: The truck mount, M36 (see diagram below) consists of a cradle with a roller carriage on a circular track. The cradle can be Rotated in the pintle sleeve of the carriage Adjusted for elevation
Truck Mount, M36 The carriage is guided on the track by rollers. The track is secured to the vehicle by supports.
48
B3M4238
The gun is also moved in traverse by pressure on the spade grips. To move the gun on the track, raise the brake handle lever until the brake detent plungers retain it. Then you may move the cradle on the track by applying pressure on the carriage handle. MK64 Gun Cradle Mount: The MK64 gun cradle mount (see diagram below) is a vehicle mount primarily designed for the M2. However, because of its versatility, the MK64 will accept the MK19 also (using the M2 mounting adapter assembly). The MK64 is used when mounting the gun on a HMMWV.
49
B3M4238
50
B3M4238
Matching: For questions 14 through 21, use the illustration below to identify parts of the M2 .50 caliber machine gun.
51
B3M4238
18. Which part is the bolt group? __________________________________________________________________ 19. Which part is the barrel buffer body? __________________________________________________________________ 20. Which part is the barrel extension? __________________________________________________________________ 21. Which part is the cover group? __________________________________________________________________
True or False:
22. It is okay to allow the bolt to slam forward when the barrel is out of the gun. True / False 23. The M2 must be cocked in order to check headspace. True / False
24. If the no-go end of the headspace gauge enters the T-slot, headspace is too tight. True / False 25. The cover should never be closed with the bolt to the rear. True / False
52
B3M4238
53
B3M4238
Which part is the barrel group? Which part is the bolt stud? Which part is the backplate group? Which part is the receiver group? Which part is the bolt group? Which part is the barrel buffer body? Which part is the barrel extension? Which part is the cover group?
1 7 3 6 5 9 8 4
True or False:
22. It is okay to allow the bolt to slam forward when the barrel is out of the gun? False 23. The M2 must be cocked in order to check headspace. True 24. If the no-go end of the headspace gauge enters the T-slot, headspace is too tight. False 25. The cover should never be closed with the bolt to the rear. True
54
B3M4238
MK19 MOD 3
55
B3M4238
The table below lists the rates of fire for the MK19. Sustained Rapid Cyclic 40 rounds per minute (3- to 5-round burst) 60 rounds per minute 325 to 375 rounds per minute
The table below lists the maximum ranges and minimum safe distances for the MK19. Maximum Maximum effective Minimum safe distance (training) Minimum safe distance (combat) 2212 meters 1500 meters 310 meters 75 meters
56
B3M4238
High-explosive (HE)
Training practice
M385A1 Joined with M16A1 or M16A2 links Consists of a one-piece solid inert aluminum projectile body Packed the same as HEDP rounds, 48 rounds to a box DODIC B576 Is blue with black markings M918 Joined with M16A1 or M16A2 links Is a fixed round of ammunition consisting of a one-piece steel projectile body which is fitted to a cartridge case assembly Aluminum ogive contains a firing pin plate assembly and an aluminum insert that contains the flash charge Contains one gram of flash charge composition Is packed the same as the HEDP rounds, 48 rounds to a box DODIC B584 Is blue with black markings, brown band, and blue ogive
57
Basic Officer Course
B3M4238
M922 Dummy
Joined with M16A2 links Used to check weapon function and for crew training Each MK19 is allowed one 10-round belt, which is packed in an M2A1 metal box DODIC B472 Is gold with black markings
MK19 Ammunition
58
B3M4238
59
B3M4238
The MK19 has a leaf-type rear sight (with an adjustable range plate) (see diagram below) mounted on a spring dovetail base, which should be folded forward to a horizontal position when the weapon is moved, and which has, on the sight leaf, a range plate incremented in 100-meter intervals from 300 to 1500 meters. Range changes may be made using either the slide release or the elevation wheel: The slide release is used to make major changes in elevation The elevation wheel is used to make fine adjustments The rear sight is adjustable for windage; turning the windage screw Clockwise moves the sight to the right Counterclockwise moves the sight to the left One click equals a 1-mil change.
60
B3M4238
Unloading/Clearing: The table below lists the steps for unloading/clearing the MK19. Step 1 Action Lower and pull both charger handles to the rear maintaining positive control (see diagram below). Put the weapon on safe. Inspect the face of the bolt through the receiver rail. If a round is present on the face of the bolt, insert a section of the cleaning rod through either side of the receiver rail, place it on top of the live round or cartridge case as close to the bolt face as possible, and push down to force the round out of the MK19. The team leader should place his hands under the cradle to catch the round.
61
B3M4238
Step 2
Take the ammunition from the feed tray by reaching beneath the feed tray and pressing the primary and secondary positioning pawls (see diagram below). At the same time, slide the linked rounds out of the MK19 through the feed throat. Ensure that the bolt face, chamber, and feed tray are clear of ammunition. Insert a cleaning rod through the barrel to verify that it is free of any blockages.
4 5 6 7
Close the top cover assembly. Place the safety switch on FIRE (F) (see diagram in step 1). While maintaining rearward pressure on the charging handle, press the trigger and ease the bolt forward. Place the safety switch on SAFE.
62
B3M4238
5 6
Push the round across the first feed pawl. Move the feed slide assembly to the left by pushing the secondary drive lever to the right (see diagram below).
NOTE: To close the cover, the bolt must be forward and the feed slide assembly must be to the left. Close the cover.
63
B3M4238
3 4 5 6
CAUTION: Failure to completely pull the bolt to the rear may result in the misalignment of the M16A2 links on the round, causing the round to feed improperly. Place the safety on FIRE and press the trigger. The bolt slams forward and grasps the first round in the bolt extractors. Grasp, unlock, and turn downward on the charger handles and lock the bolt to the rear again. Ensure the safety switch is on SAFE. Return the charger handles to their original upright position. NOTE: Charger handles must be in this position in order for the MK19 to fire. The MK19 is ready to fire.
64
B3M4238
o Unload/Clear Gun: The table below lists the steps to take the MK19 from condition 1 to condition 4: Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Action Point weapon in a safe direction. Do not raise the cover. Ensure the weapon is on SAFE. Rotate the charger handles down and pull the bolt to the rear. Return one charging assembly forward. Insert a length of cleaning rod through the right hand receiver rail. Push down on the round, forcing it off the face of the bolt and out the bottom of the receiver. Catch the round as it falls. Open the cover. Press the primary and secondary pawls; slide the linked rounds out of the feed tray. Visually inspect the chamber and the face of the bolt. Ride the bolt forward and return the weapon to the SAFE position. Close the cover.
Malfunctions and Stoppages: A malfunction is a failure of the weapon to function properly. Neither defective ammunition nor improper operation of the gun by a crewmember is considered a malfunction of the MK19. The two most common MK19 malfunctions are o Sluggish Action: Excessive friction from dirt, carbon buildup, lack of lubrication, or burred parts usually cause sluggish action. Inspect the MK19 for worn and damaged parts and replace them as necessary. To remedy continued sluggish operation, clean, lubricate, tighten, or replace parts as required.
65
B3M4238
If ammunition is not a factor and the MK19 is being employed in the free gun mode, keep rounds on target until the all the rounds on the belt have been fired. If the MK19 is mounted on either the M3 tripod or on a vehicle with the T&E (traversing and elevating) mechanism attached, hold the grip with one hand. At the same time, press the charger handle locks and lower one charger handle. This action interrupts the cycle of function causing the MK19 to cease firing. CAUTION: Do not try to break the ammunition belt. o Immediate Action: The table below lists the steps to perform immediate action. Step Action 1 Shout Misfire! 2 Wait 10 seconds. 3 Place the weapon on SAFE. Pull bolt to the rear maintaining positive control of the charger handles (the team leader catches the round as it is ejected). If the round (with ogive) ejects, push the charger handles forward and up to their locked position and continue to fire. If no round ejects (or round but no ogive), go to step 4. 4 Unload and clear the weapon, begin remedial action, and inspect for bore obstruction. o Remedial Action: When immediate action fails to reduce a stoppage, its cause must be investigated, usually by disassembling the weapon and inspecting the appropriate parts. Parts may have to be replaced before the gun can be returned to action. Another problem may be detected and corrected without the need for disassembly: Bore obstruction. Bore obstruction means that part of the previous round may be lodged in the barrel and could possibly prevent the next ogive from passing safely through it. The gunner/crew should be alert for: A muffled report from the gun when it fires Smoke and debris from the bottom of the receiver Failure of the ogive to leave the muzzle
66
B3M4238
67
B3M4238
Removing the Secondary Drive Lever: The table below lists the steps to remove the secondary driver lever: Step Action Raise the top cover assembly and push the secondary drive lever pivot 1 post from the outside of the top cover assembly (see diagram below).
2 3
Separate the secondary drive lever from the top cover assembly. Take the secondary drive lever from the slide assembly and allow the feed slide and tray assembly to close.
o Removing the Top Cover Assembly: The table below lists the steps to remove the top cover assembly. Step Action Hold the top cover straight up with one hand and pull the top cover pins 1 from both sides (see diagram below).
68
B3M4238
Take out the feed tray (see diagram below) by lifting it straight up.
69
B3M4238
Grasp the control grips with both hands and lift up slightly to disengage the backplate from the locking lugs in the receiver. Pull the bolt and backplate assembly to the rear (see diagram below). Once the bolt clears the sear, catch the bolt in one hand to prevent damage to the backplate assembly.
70
B3M4238
o Remove the Sear Assembly: The table below lists the steps to remove the sear assembly. Step Action 1 Turn the MK19 on it side or upside down. 2 Use the rim of a spent cartridge case to lift up on the sear lock plunger (see diagram below). At the same time, squeeze the sear and rotate the assembly 90 degrees to the right or left.
3 4
Take off the sear assembly by pulling it away from the weapon. Keep pressure on the sear until the assembly comes off. Place the safety switch in the SAFE position.
71
B3M4238
Slide the alignment guide out of the receiver, pulling the assembly slightly rearward.
o Remove the Ogive Plunger and Round Positioning Lock: The table below lists the steps to remove the ogive plunger and the round positioning lock. Step Action Remove the ogive plunger by pulling the ogive plunger assembly out 1 through the inside wall of the receiver.
Remove the round positioning block by pushing it into the side of the gun, sliding it forward, and releasing it from the key slots in the receiver wall.
72
B3M4238
Slide the charger housing rearward to disengage the lugs from the key slots in the receiver (see diagram below).
73
B3M4238
8 9 10 11 12 13
Be sure the safety switch is in the FIRE position so the sear can be easily depressed. Press the receiver sear and slide the bolt assembly forward until the retainer pin holes in the backplate and receiver are aligned. Insert the backplate retainer pin to lock the assembly in position. Place the feed tray assembly on the receiver. Place the feed slide assembly into the cutout slots on the feed tray. Attach the top cover assembly: Align the pinholes in the top cover assembly with the pinholes in the feed tray. Hold the cover straight up and insert the pins into both sides of the cover. CAUTION: Insert the top cover pins using only your hand. Forcing the pin will break the welded crosspin.
74
B3M4238
CAUTION: If secondary drive lever is not properly engaged with inner feed slide pin, the weapon will not fire properly and may damage the weapon. Function Check: After disassembly and assembly and before operating the MK19, conduct a function check. The table below lists the steps to conduct a function check. Step Action 1 Open the feed tray cover and inspect the feed tray assembly and chamber to ensure the gun is clear. 2 With the cover closed and the bolt to the rear and one charging assembly down and to the rear, place the safety on SAFE (S). 3 Pull the trigger; the bolt should not go forward. 4 Place the safety on FIRE (F). 5 Pull the trigger and ride the bolt forward. 6 Open the feed tray cover. 7 Inspect the firing pin and bolt face for sings of worn or damaged parts. 8 Move secondary drive lever back and forth to ensure that it moves freely. 9 Press the feed pawls to check for spring pressure. 10 Ensure that the secondary drive lever is to the right and engaged under the feed tray. 11 Slide the feed slide to the left; before closing the cove, ensure that the bolt is forward.
75
B3M4238
Lubricant Semi-Fluid Teflon (LSA-T) To inspect the MK19, mount it on the M122 tripod and place it on a poncho with the spare barrel case. NOTE: The inspecting officer, or the unit leader, may specify the exact position of the gun and contents of the spare barrel case. Always check for cleanliness. Look for broken, missing, or burred parts. Test the spring tension of appropriate parts Perform appropriate checks to determine if the gun functions properly.
76
B3M4238
More than one step may be done at the same time. Feeding: (See diagram below.) The gases from the burning powder force the bolt, with a new round in its extractors, to the rear. During this blowback, several things happen at once: o The curved rail of the vertical cam de-links and forces down the new round on top of the spent case, forcing the spent case out of the bolt fingers and ejecting it out the bottom of the gun o The feed slide assembly pulls the rounds to the right in the receiver ammunition-feed area, where a new round is ready to pick up (automatic feed). o During the bolt's travel to the rear, the cocking lever is pushed forward, which cocks the firing pin. o When the bolt reaches the limit of its rearward travel, the recoil springs (24) are completely compressed. The bolt buffers (25) absorb over-travel, reducing trunnion load (recoil force) at the gun-mount attaching points. The bolt sear will not engage the receiver sear if the trigger is still depressed, and another firing cycle occurs. Release of the trigger causes the bolt sear to engage the receiver sear, which prevents the bolt from going forward, and firing stops.
Feeding
77
B3M4238
Firing
78
B3M4238
Extracting
Ejecting: The vertical cam forces a new round into position on the face of the bolt and ejects the spent casing out through the ejection port. Cocking: The rearward movement of the bolt (see diagram below) causes the cocking lever (15) to retract the firing pin (16). When the cocking lever hits the rear end of the left receiver rail slot (17), the cocking lever is forced forward. The cocking lever retracts the firing pin, which the firing pin sear holds to the rear (18).
Cocking
79
B3M4238
80
B3M4238
Ground Mount In flat terrain with the extensions closed, for example, follow the steps in the table below to place the MK19 about 12 inches above the ground. Step Action 1 Set the tripod trail legs: Unscrew the leg-clamping handle; press down on the indexing lever, and extend the leg to the desired length. Align the indexing lever stud with one of the holes in the tripod leg extension. Release pressure on the indexing lever allowing the stud to fit the desired hole. Tighten the leg-clamping handle. 2 Set the front leg of the tripod: Turn the front leg clamp handle counterclockwise to loosen the front leg. Adjust the leg to the desired angle and tighten the front leg clamp. Sandbag each leg to stabilize the MK19 for firing.
81
B3M4238
82
B3M4238
Step 5 (cont.)
Action Center the elevating handwheel between the upper and lower elevating screws. Center the traversing handwheel on the upper elevating screw yoke. Remove the stow pin from the gun cradle (see diagram below).
Align the holes in the upper elevating screw yoke of the T&E mechanism with the rear holes in the gun cradle (see diagram below).
NOTE: The stow pin locks the cradle in a horizontal position, preventing it from depressing or elevating.
83
B3M4238
Step 5 (cont.)
Action Lock the elevating sleeve mechanism onto the center of the traversing bar. Insert the quick-release pin from the right (see diagram below).
Mount the MK19: o Lift the MK19 into the gun cradle. Align the grooves on the receiver with the lugs in the gun cradle, and slide the receiver forward (see diagram below).
84
B3M4238
Step 6 (cont.)
Action Align the sear mounting holes with the gun cradle mounting holes (see diagram below)
Secure the rear of the weapon by inserting the retaining pin through the cradle and sear assembly and rotate it until it locks in place (see diagram below). If a safety clip is attached, use it to secure the retaining pin.
85
B3M4238
The pins of the feed throat must line up with the pinholes in the receiver (see diagram below).
Relax pressure on the spring-loaded grip pins so they will snap into place (see diagram below).
86
B3M4238
Secures the MK64 MOD 7 gun cradle to the HMMWV weapon platform pedestal Allows mechanical fire control adjustments A train lock clamp attaches the lower end of the train and elevating assembly to the pedestal; clamp may be released or locked in position by a train lock handle. When used on the HMMWV weapon platform pedestal, only one clamp is needed above the train lock clamp. Upper end of the train and elevating assembly is a standard caliber .50 T&E mechanism
87
B3M4238
To mount the MK19 on the HMMWV weapon platform, Loosen the locking bolts on the side of the HMMWV pedestal with a 9/16-inch wrench. Insert the pintle adapter into the pedestal and tighten the bolts with the wrench. Pull up on the pintle adapter to ensure it is installed securely. Attach the train and elevating assembly to the HMMWV pedestal. Mount the MK19 and attach the bracket mounting assembly. Attach the empty case catch bag. For 2 1/2- to 5-ton cargo trucks To mount the MK19 on the M66 ring mount, Insert the pintle adapter into the M36A2 ring mount with M66 ring receptacle. Install the gun cradle and mount the MK19. Attach the bracket mounting assembly and the empty case catch bag.
88
B3M4238
89
B3M4238
90
B3M4238
True or False
19. When loading the weapon, place the female link end of the ammunition belt through the feed throat and draw the ammunition into the weapon feed area. True / False 20. The MK64, MOD 7 gun cradle is used with the tripod and ring mounts. True / False
91
B3M4238
6. How much armor plating, in inches, is the weapon capable of penetrating, when firing ammunition at zero degree obliquity? 2 7. Within how many meters must the 40-mm HE round impact to cause casualties to exposed enemy personnel? 15 8. To stop a runaway weapon, what step(s) must be taken? Unlock and lower one charging handle while keeping control of the weapon 9. What is condition 3 for the MK19? Rounds inserted past the primary feed pawl, bolt forward, no rounds on its face, weapon on safe. 10. If a stoppage occurs, how long must you wait before pulling the bolt to the rear? 10 seconds 11. How many rounds per burst should the gunner fire when engaging targets at the sustained rate? 3 to 5 12. What is the maximum effective range of the MK19? 13. Which tripod is used with the MK19? M3 1500 meters
92
B3M4238
14. Which component is the ogive plunger assembly? 15 15. Which component is the feed slide assembly? 20 16. Which component is the secondary drive lever assembly? 2 17. Which component is the round positioning block? 16 18. Which component is the sear assembly? 11
True or False. 19. When loading the weapon, place the female link end of the ammunition belt through the feed throat and draw the ammunition into the weapon feed area. True 20. The MK64, MOD 7 gun cradle is used with the tripod and ring mounts. True
93
B3M4238
Summary
During this lesson we discussed the characteristics, nomenclature, ammunition types, operation and capabilities of both the MK19 MOD 3 40 MM Automatic Grenade Launcher and the M2 .50 caliber heavy machine gun, the two weapons systems that make up the heavy machine gun platoon of the Marine Corps.
References
Reference Number or Author MCWP 3-15.1 FM 23-27 MCRP 3-0B Reference Title Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MK19 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun MOD 3 How to Conduct Training
HEDP LAW LSA LSA-T M2 .50 caliber heavy machine gun Mk 19 MOD 3 RBC T&E Timing
94
Notes
Notes
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3N4478
Importance
In This Lesson
B3N4478
Learning Objectives
Terminal Learning Objectives Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and commander's intent, employ machineguns in support of offensive operations to achieve desired effects of machinegun fires in support of the ground scheme of maneuver in accordance with the Principles of Machine Gun Employment PICMDEEP (Pairs, Interlocking, Coordinating, Mutual Support, Defilade, Enfilading Fire, Economy of Fire, and Protection). (0302-OFF-1202) Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and commander's intent, employ machineguns in support of defensive operations to achieve desired effects of machinegun fires in support of the ground scheme of maneuver in accordance with the Principles of Machinegun Employment PICMDEEP (Pairs, Interlocking, Coordinating, Mutual Support, Defilade, Enfilading Fire, Economy of Fire, Protection). (0302-DEF1302 ) Given the requirement, an assistant gunner, a tripod mounted M240B, M2, or MK19 machinegun, a sector of fire, selected firing position, and entrenching tools, construct a machinegun position in order to provide cover and concealment without restricting effective fire. (MCCS-CSW2111) Given a defensive fighting position, a tripod mounted machinegun with components, a designated sector of fire with recognizable targets, principle direction of fire (PDF) or final protective line (FPL), paper, pencil, and lensatic compass, prepare a range card in order to recall the data to fire on predetermined targets and as an aid in estimating ranges to other targets during regular visibility. (MCCSCSW-2112) Given machinegun team(s) or a squad with tripod mounted M240B, M2, or MK19 machinegun(s), entrenching tools, selected firing positions and sectors of fire, supervise construction of machinegun positions in order to provide cover and concealment without restricting effective fire. (MCCS-CSW-2113)
B3N4478
Enabling Learning Objectives Given a machinegun unit, a mission and a commander's intent, determine method of support to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF-1202a) Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and a commander's intent, determine target precedence to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF-1202b) Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and a commander's intent, determine target reference points (TRP), to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF1202c) Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and a commander's intent, plan ammunition/rates of fire relative to the attack to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF1202d) Given a machinegun unit, a mission, and a commander's intent, determine displacement criteria/plan to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF-1202e) Given a machinegun unit, a mission and a commander's intent, direct positioning of machinegun units to best observe and support scheme of maneuver. (0302-OFF1202f) Given a machinegun unit, a mission and a commander's intent, determine engagement criteria to best support the ground scheme of maneuver. (0302-DEF-1302d)
B3N4478
Definitions
Trajectory Ordinate Maximum Ordinate The arching flight path of the round from the muzzle of the weapon to the target. Elevation of the flight path of the round above the line of sight The maximum elevation of that round above the line of sight along its flight path. This distance is reached at 2/3 the distance to the target.
Cone of Fire
Beaten Zone
Each round fired from a machine gun travels a different path. Vibration, tolerances of the ammunition and weapon, and shooter positions all play a role in these differences. The pattern of these rounds is called the cone of fire. For an M240G the cone of fire is always 2 mils wide. Now, the actual measurement may differ at 600m and 1800m due to the factor of what 2 mils is at that distance, but it will always be 2 mils wide. The beaten zone is defined as the elliptical pattern formed by the impact of the rounds. Again, because the cone of fire is always 2 mils wide, the beaten zone as well is two mils wide out to the maximum effective range of the gun. There are, however, differences in the length based on the following: Uniform terrain: At short ranges the beaten zone will be longer because of the initial trajectory and narrow because of the relatively short distance the bullet travels before it strikes the ground. As range increases, the beaten zone decreases in length because the bullets will be falling at a steeper angle and increases in width as the rotation of the bullet further affects dispersion.
Rising terrain: Terrain rising in the path of the cone of fire has the effect of abruptly stopping the rounds and creates a small beaten zone which nearly duplicates the pattern of the cone of fire on steeply rising terrain.
B3N4478
Definitions (Contd)
Falling terrain: When the terrain falls away before the gun, the beaten zone becomes longer and depending on the range, either long and narrow or long and wide.
B3N4478
B3N4478
B3N4478
Employment Principles
The following table represents the Eight Principles of Machine Gun Employment, abbreviated by PICMDEEP. Will we be able to execute all of these principles each and every time we employ machine guns? No, we will not. Each situation will be different, terrain may not allow us each of these considerations, or our assets may make it impossible to support. We will, however, take the time to analyze our assets, our mission and our enemy to best employ these weapons in accordance with the principles outlined below.
Pairs
We attempt to employ machine guns in pairs at all times. Guns employed in pairs should not be separated by intervening terrain. 35 meters is the optimal separation between the two weapons systems, terrain dictating. This allows us to duplicate fires to ensure continuous fire support even if one gun goes down. This also gives us talking guns, giving us constant fires on the target and uninterrupted fires during immediate action drills or if a gun goes down. A SAW can be integrated to the pairs if needed. Reinforce and double the firepower employed across the units frontage. This also ensures no area goes uncovered, especially when grazing fires intersect Dictates use of appropriate weapons to fire on appropriate targets. This allows maximum effectiveness of all weapons systems employed, to conserve ammunition, and also to mask the machine gun position until their fires are required. The weapons systems need to be able to support each other. If one weapon is overrun or fails, the other weapon needs to be able to fire the mission. Defilade allows us to fire the gun behind the mask of terrain outside the effects and observation of the enemy. This allows us to increase survivability of the position, the gun and the crew. The following diagram illustrates the types of defilade that we can attain:
Interlocking Fires
Coordination of Fires
Mutual Support
Defilade
B3N4478
Defilade (Contd)
The diagram above outlines the five positions of defilade we can employ in a machine gun position. Enfilade Whenever we utilize machine guns, we attempt to achieve enfilading fires upon our enemy. By enfilade fires we mean that the long axis of the beaten zone coincides with the long axis of the target. By economy, we mean economy of our fires. We utilize the appropriate weapons systems in accordance with the threat. We will not open up with the M240 if we get attacked by a single enemy soldier. We establish engagement criteria for our crew served weapons to conserve ammunition, make sure the weapon system is appropriate to the threat and to ensure weapon system and crew survivability. Obvious considerations need to be taken in the construction of machine gun positions in order to ensure maximum survivability of the crew. Once the guns are ordered to engage, they will obviously become a focal point of the enemy. Cover and concealment are critical. The construction must be robust as well as moved frequently in order to ensure the continued support of their fires.
Economy
Protection
10
B3N4478
11
B3N4478
Primary Mission
Secondary Mission
When digging a T-Shaped Position, the hole is dug armpit deep. When cover to the front is high enough, spoil is used to build up the flanks and the rear. Grenade sumps should be located at the end of each leg of the position.
12
B3N4478
Uses two one-man fighting holes at 90-degree angles (see diagram below). Provides excellent protection for the gunner and assistant gunner but allows only limited traverse of the gun. Each hole is dug as a standard oneman fighting hole. When switching from the primary to the alternate sectors of fire, the gunner and the assistant gunner switch roles.
13
B3N4478
Support Relationships
When utilizing assets that are not organic to a rifle platoon, such as machine guns, we will use support relationships that define the command and control of those assets. Examples of such relationships are outlined below: General Support: A unit commander may task a subordinate unit to a general support mission. This is defined as that support which is given to the supported force as a whole and not to any particular subdivision thereof according to MCRP 5-2A. If a unit is designated to be in General Support, of another unit, it will provide fires to assist the supported units scheme of maneuver. For example, a Machine Gun Section may be placed in General Support of an Infantry Company. The Section is then responsible to provide fires in support of that Companys scheme of maneuver. Within that Company, any or all of the subordinate units may be supported; in this case priority of fires is established to indicate the order in which the support is provided such as Flanking Fires by section in support of the companys attack. Direct Support: A unit in direct support of another unit is assigned the mission of providing the support requested directly to the supported unit. The unit being supported directly (a rifle platoon, for example) is assigned fires directly supporting the platoon (Main Effort). The supported unit commander assigns the guns a mission and targets; however, tactical control still remains with the Machine Gun Section Leader. Attachment: Attachment is the placement of a unit in an organization where such placement is relatively temporary. The organization to which a unit is attached assumes complete tactical and administrative control over the unit, subject to any limitations (usually time) stipulated in the attachment order. Machine guns may be attached to a rifle platoon that cannot be supported from general or direct support positions because of the terrain or other conditions. The attached command relationship gives the supported unit leader complete tactical and administrative control over the attached unit. Below, we will look at these differing command relationships in regards to a situation you may see here at The Basic School, the relationship of a machine gun section within a rifle company and the differing relationships between the Company Commander and his rifle platoons. Relationship General Support Direct Support Attached Use of Fires Company commander Supported unit leader Admin & Logistical Control Weapons platoon Weapons platoon commander commander Machine gun Weapons platoon section/squad leader commander Supported unit leader Tactical Control
14
B3N4478
15
B3N4478
Displacement Considerations
Once the mission of the machine guns is complete, or the position is no longer able to be occupied, that unit will need to displace to either a new firing position or to link up with the parent unit. As a unit leader, we must plan for this movement when given the asset of machine guns. The acronym we use to outline the required planning considerations is MORT, (Method, Objective, Route and Time).
Method
Echelon: By echelon, we essentially mean leap frogging those elements to the new position. An example of this would be one element displacing while the adjacent two elements provide security. Once the bounding element reached its next security position, they would then provide over-watch while the other two units move. This action is repeated until the unit as a whole reaches its final destination. By Unit: In an instance where security en-route to the objective is not as much of a factor, the machine gun element may be ordered to displace directly to the parent units position in order to provide the immediate additional firepower of the machine guns in support of consolidation.
Objective
The unit will be forced or directed to move to one of two types of locations. Once the maneuver element has completed the assault upon the tactical objective, the unit leader may task the machine gun element to move to their location in order to provide addition fires in support of consolidation. An additional consideration may be a secondary support by fire position in order to continue support of an attack after the initial position has become untenable. A route is a crucial consideration for the unit leader when planning the displacement of the machine gun element. Higher can assign these routes based on operational knowledge of the area, or it can be left to the discretion of the subordinate unit leader in charge of those Marines who may have better situation awareness of the battlefield as it now stands.
Route
16
B3N4478
17
B3N4478
Defensive Considerations
Principal Direction of Fire Before we discuss individual weapon systems, we will discuss the two tactical tasks a machine gun can be assigned in the defense. The first is a PDF, or a principle direction of fire. The weapons primary focus is covering a likely avenue of approach, key piece of terrain, or whatever object of interest that unit leader assigns it. Now, the weapon will also have a left and right lateral limit that will allow the gunner to engage targets of opportunity within that sector of fire, but unless that situation arises, that weapon is laid on that PDF, ready to engage on at that point. Secondly, we can assign the mission of a FPL, or final protective line. This mission dictates that the weapon is primarily in a position to employ grazing fires across a units frontage as a last effort to defend the lines. The FPL is only fired in accordance with the unit commander giving the order to fire his Final Protective Fires. Again, a sector of fire is given, with the instruction that in accordance with engagement criteria that gun can engage a target of opportunity. But again, the primary mission of that gun is to be laid on that designated FPL. M240G: Terrain is one of the biggest factors when deciding the role these weapons will play. If terrain greatly constitutes grazing fire, push the weapons out to the flank where the greatest amount of grazing fire can be achieved while interlocking the fires with adjacent guns and assign the mission of a FPL. If terrain is canalizing, allowing limited access to your position, consider assigning the guns a PDF, greatly improving the coverage on those areas most likely to be advanced upon. Again, we will strive to employ 8 principles of machine gun employment at every chance, regardless of mission. M2 .50 Caliber HMG: Its direct fire characteristics dictate employment very similar to considerations used with the M240, with the greatest considerations being its anti-armor capabilities and penetration. MK19 MOD 3: The MK19 differs most greatly in the fact that we cannot achieve grazing fires based on the nature of the ammunition. That being said, the weapon is an excellent choice to assign a PDF, such as choke points, obstacles and avenues of approach, as well as dead space.
18
B3N4478
Employment Considerations
Offensive Considerations for Machineguns M240G: Best and most often used in a support by fire position to provide a heavy volume of accurate suppressive fire. If terrain is viable, consider the use of an observer in order to allow the guns to be employed from defilade. The weapon can also be taken into the assault, utilizing either the bipod or the tripod. Asset is organic to the rifle company and also found in weapons company. M2 .50 Caliber Heavy MG: This weapon can also be employed as a support by fire asset, especially when the enemy is utilizing fortified positions. Also used against mechanized or lightly armored assets, taking account the increased penetration of the rounds available. Can also be employed in indirect fire mode, utilizing terrain to mask its location and at the same time engage targets attempting to mask themselves. Commonly vehicle mounted and paired with the MK19 within the heavy machine gun platoon of the infantry battalion, providing a highly mobile, versatile combination.
MK 19 MOD 3 40mm Automatic Grenade Launcher: Extremely effective against personnel due to its 15m ECR from the 40mm round. Very effective combined with an observer to deliver indirect fires. Anti-armor capability of 2 inches of homogenous steel out to 2200 m. Like the other two weapon systems, also able to be utilized in SBF position. Some constraints to aware of include the minimum arming distance of 18 to 40 meters and the ability of vegetation or other debris to cause premature detonation. Like stated above, commonly paired with the M2, providing an excellent example of combined arms, allowing the unit leader to mix the weapons systems for desired result.
19
B3N4478
Fire Commands
We have already been familiarized with the term ADDRAC in previous exercises. The same considerations apply with machine guns with a few minor considerations. Alert Mandatory part of the order. Fire Mission = Both guns fire Number One, Fire Mission- Only one gun fires Fire Mission, Number Two- Gun number two fires the mission, but gun number one tracks it and is prepared to fire on command. Only when not obvious or in an instance when firing from defilade under the direction of an observer. Given to allow the gunner and A-gunner to more accurately orient on the target. Cannot be over emphasized. Several field expedient methods that have already been discussed elsewhere in your instruction. Sooner correct range is acquired, the quicker the effects of those rounds are felt by the enemy. Assignment is only used if specific requirements are needed to divide the target, assign a class of fire, or designate a rate of fire. Mandatory in order to coordinate proper initiation and control of fires. Subsequent commands will be made by the unit leader in order make corrections on the impacts of the rounds, rates of fire, or even to shift or cease fires
Direction
Description
Range
Assignment
Control
20
B3N4478
Range Cards
A range card is a diagram drawn to record the firing data and mission of that machine gun position and also serves as a document to assist in defensive fire planning. A range card is constructed of a sketch of the position and also of the terrain that lies to the front of the weapon system. Here we outline target reference points, key terrain features, dead space, and any other feature or detail to assist that gunner and further the unit leader in gaining as much situational awareness on the position as possible. One key element of creating a range card is walking the terrain we are about to document. This allows to properly annotate our dead space. This is especially important when recording our FPL. Step 1 Gunner lays himself behind the gun, sets his sights on the limit of grazing fire, and then lays the gun on an aiming point along the FPL. The A-Gunner walks along the FPL using a standard and measured pace count
Step 2
Step 3
When the gunner looses sight of the A-Gunner in defilade, he yells Mark!. The A-Gunner records the distance to properly annotate it on the range card. This process is completed until terrain denies you grazing fire, or you reach the maximum range of grazing fire for that weapon system.
Step 4
21
B3N4478
22
B3N4478
Offense: MG section (Supporting Effort #1), you are in General Support of the platoon. O/S suppress the enemy on Co Obj A IOT deny the enemy the ability to interfere with the main efforts attack. O/S commence fire at the rapid rate at TRP1 for one minute, then switch to the sustained rate for 3 minutes. O/S shift to TRP2 and fire at the sustained rate. O/S cease fire. O/S displace by unit by the most direct route to Co Obj A to support our consolidation. Save 400 rounds for consolidation.
Support Relationship: GS of the platoon WHO: Machinegun Squad WHEN: O/S WHAT: Suppress WHERE: Company Objective Alpha WHY: IOT deny the enemy the ability to interfere with the platoon main effort attack Fire Control Measures: Commence fire: O/S raid rate 1 minute then sustained rate for 3 minutes, Shift Fire: O/S, Cease Fire: O/S, Displacement: O/S displace ISO consolidation.
23
B3N4478
Summary
This lesson covered the basic employment principles for the various machine gun systems found throughout the Marine Corps. Both offensive and defensive considerations were introduced, as well as planning guidelines for planning displacement of a machine-gun unit. Proper construction and descriptions of the differing machine gun positions have been outlines also. Range Cards and proper terminology surrounding machine guns were also discussed.
References
Reference Number or Author MCRP 3-15.1 FMFRP 6-15 Reference Title Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
Notes
24
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Movement to Contact
Introduction Up to this point at The Basic School, you have been dealing with a known enemy situation. Someone has maintained contact with the enemy and provided you with detailed information on enemy composition, disposition, and strength. Unfortunately, in the disorder and friction inherent to war, intelligence will never be entirely complete or accurate. Additionally, because the enemy is constantly acting as well, intelligence may become less accurate and relevant because of events that change the situation between the time that the intelligence was collected and developed and the time that we act. One of the principals of war central to the conduct of maneuver warfare is the pursuit of the offense, even when the enemy situation is uncertain. As practitioners of maneuver warfare, we want to establish a tempo in our operations that degrades the enemys ability to operate. Maintaining this tempo in an uncertain enemy environment means developing the enemy situation through contact and committing the fewest forces necessary so that the rest of the unit can continue to seek the enemy center of gravity. A properly executed movement to contact is one of the most ruthlessly efficient forms of the offense, as demonstrated by the German Blitzkreig into France in 1940 and the Coalition invasion of Iraq in 2003. The purpose of this lesson is to allow you to operate in and understand an uncertain environment through the use of movement to contact. This handout will discuss the tactics and techniques to use in a movement to contact. This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Definition Preparation Phase/Begin Planning Arrange/Make Reconnaissance Complete the Plan Issue the Order/Supervise Conduct Phase/Movement Decisive Engagement Consolidation/Reorganization Phase References Notes Page 5 5 12 12 16 17 19 19 19 20
Importance
In This Lesson
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Preparation Phase
BEGIN PLANNING Receive the order and analyze your mission. There are a few ways you may determine
that a movement to contact is an appropriate form of the offense: You are assigned an enemy-, friendly-, or terrain-oriented task as part of a larger movement to contact. Check your commanders scheme of maneuver and tasks to see if this is the case. You are assigned a terrain-oriented task in an uncertain enemy situation where time/space is a factor: o Alpha Company is conducting offensive operations 6 km to our east along Route Golden, and will need to be resupplied NLT 1800 tonight in anticipation of followon operations. Recent resupply operations along Route Golden have been disrupted by squad-sized enemy units that have infiltrated and conducted complex ambushes (to include obstacles). o At 1400, 1st Platoon clears Route Golden east to Alpha Company IOT prevent enemy ambushes against the resupply convoy. You are assigned an enemy-oriented task in an uncertain enemy situation where time/space is a factor: o Alpha Companys attacks have shattered the enemy defenses, and the remainder of the enemy (approximately platoon (-) size) is attempting to withdraw to the east. Elements of the platoon (-) appear to be fortifying Samarah, a small town 10 km to our east that sits at the intersection of several key routes. The remainder of the unit is likely preparing to delay our advance along Route Golden before falling back to Samarah. Enemy reinforcements up to company size are likely within 12 hours, and a deliberate defense in Samarahs urban terrain will be a significant obstacle to our offensive east. Bravo Company is moving east to relieve Alpha Company, but is expected to reach Samarah NET 2200 tonight. o At 1200, 1st Platoon destroys the enemy platoon (-) in Samarah IOT prevent the enemy from establishing a deliberate defense in Samarah before Bravo Companys arrival.
In each situation, movement to contact is an appropriate form of the offense. The enemy and friendly situation and the commanders intent dictate that we should use tempo as a weapon to maintain the initiative or to prevent the enemy from gaining the initiative. While reconnaissance
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
and deliberate attacks may also be able to accomplish the assigned tasks, they would be too time-consuming to accomplish the commanders purpose and intent.
Achieve a Decision.
The collective judgments and tentative plan that the platoon commander makes based off his initial estimate of the situation are what we refer to as Achieving a Decision.
Develop formations and task organization. The unit commander conducting the movement to contact considers the following criteria when selecting a formation for movement and organizing his unit for the upcoming mission:
Speed Security Control Deployability
Speed and control are obviously essential to the tempo that the commander wants to create, but the uncertain enemy environment dictates that the commander should also organize a force that can quickly react to contact from any direction. The closer to the decisive fight the unit is, the higher its security posture. The relative trade-off between speed/control and security/deployability will be based on the commanders estimate of the situation (METT-TC). To assist the commander in selecting the best organization of his forces, the Marine Corps breaks expectation of enemy contact into three levels:
The category in which the commander places his expectation of contact will greatly influence how the unit organizes for movement. When the commander feels that the chance of enemy contact is remote, he usually uses a route column. Generally, a commander judges the chance of enemy contact to be remote when
Contact Remote
A friendly unit is between him and the enemy to provide security (behind friendly lines) The greatest threat is from aircraft and long range artillery
The unit commander utilizes the route column to maximize speed and control. Grouping subordinate units administratively also facilitates control. Routes are selected that facilitate speed and reduce friction. This formation, also referred to as an administrative column, is the same one you use on your conditioning hikes. As the unit closes with the enemy and no longer has other units providing security, the commander must update his estimation of the situation. He may update the expectation of enemy contact to contact possible.
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Contact Possible
Also referred to as "contact probable," these two terms are interchangeable. Once the commander has decided that contact is possible, he must change the tactical organization of his unit. He now balances the need for speed and control with his need to develop the enemy situation and provide security/deployability. The commander task organizes the unit to facilitate the adoption of combat formations. The overall formation is the tactical column. Units within the formation may be deployed in another tactical formation based upon their mission, i.e., point element in a wedge. The formation usually adopted by subordinate units is also the tactical column. The main body travels in the center of the tactical column. The role of the main body is to accomplish the units mission, which usually entails destroying the enemy in the decisive fight. Since a threat from enemy ground activity exists, the commander deploys security elements to protect the main body. These security elements, called guards, are deployed to the front, flank, and rear. A guard is a unit used to protect the main force from attack, direct fire, and ground observation by fighting to gain time while observing and reporting. A guard should possess sufficient combat power to fix or interdict the enemy while the commander maneuvers the main body to a position from which to assault or bypass the enemy. Additionally, the guard commander must report information about the enemy (SALUTE), guard force location and actions, and relevant terrain information that will allow the unit commander to make an informed decision. Too weak a guard will only cause the unit commander to commit additional forces to protect his ability to maneuver.
(+) (+)
Rear Guard
7 Basic Officer Course
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Diagram 1 shows battalion (-) as main body, company as advance guard, platoon as advance party, and squad as point.
Diagram 2. Shows a rifle company in independent movement to contact; rifle platoon as advance guard, and squad as advance party.
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Advance guard: The guard unit that precedes the main body of a company or higher is called the advance guard. The advance guard: Develops the situation for the commander by initiating action and reporting the situation Maintains tempo by fixing, clearing, or destroying smaller enemy forces, allowing the main body to bypass non-decisive engagements Fixes the enemy during decisive engagements, allowing the main body to maneuver and destroy the enemy
The advance guard sends forward a security unit called an advance party, which performs the advance guard role for the advance guard commander. The advance party sends forward a security unit called a point, which performs the advance guard role for the advance party commander. The advance guard should be located far enough ahead of the main body to effectively develop the situation. The commander should have enough time to make a decision and enough space to adjust the formation based off the reporting from the advance guard. Enemy engaging the advance guard should not also be able to engage the main body since having the main body in contact limits the commanders options. The advance guard should not be located too far ahead to support if decisive contact is made. The distance that the advance guard travels ahead of the main body will depend heavily on terrain (e.g. forest or desert?), enemy (e.g. using small arms or heavy machineguns?), and friendly (e.g. footmobile or mechanized? How large and well-equipped is advance guard relative to enemy forces?). Task Organization: The advance guard should be task-organized to overcome obstacles and enemy resistance. Engineers or other obstacle clearing capability should travel with the advance guard. Machineguns may also travel with the advance party. Their support relationship will most likely be DS of the main effort or GS of the unit since, in the decisive fight, their suppression will allow the main body to close with the enemy. Machineguns with the advance guard are in the best position to gain immediate fire superiority and support by fire the main body if the decisive fight comes from the front. If the advance guard makes non-decisive contact with the enemy and the commander decides to bypass the fight with the main body, he must consider a way to link up the machineguns with the new advance guardthe limited ammunition the machineguns have should be saved for the decisive fight, and if they stay with the original advance guard then they will be in the rear of the unit formation when the fight is over, which is a poor position from which to support the unit. The commander may also choose to locate the machineguns with the main body, which gives him more direct control and more flexibility if the decisive fight comes from the flanks or rear. However, if the decisive fight comes from the front as expected, the advance guard will have a more difficult time achieving fire superiority. Additionally, to be in the best position to support the unit, the machineguns must move forward to link up with the advance guard while under enemy fire. The commander must consider tradeoffs such as these when deciding where to locate assets.
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Flank guard: is responsible for preventing the enemy from observing or using direct fires on the main body from its flank. Though the flank guard should not become decisively engaged, it must do what is necessary to provide the main body time to prepare for an attack into its flank. As with the advance guard, the flank guard must be task organized with sufficient assets to accomplish its mission (see Diagram 3 below). Flank guards may also act as connecting groups, maintaining contact with friendly units to the flanks. Flank guards can be provided by the rear unit in the main body, which will preserve the combat power of the main effort, but is very difficult for the rear unit commander to control. The main effort can provide the flank guards, which is easier to control, but means the main effort must link up its forces before committing to the decisive fight. The main effort and the rear unit can each provide a flank guard, which is a mix of the pros and cons of the other methods.
Flank
Main Body
Flank
Figure 1: Flank guard traveling constantly Figure 2: Flank guard moves in successive bounds
Flank guard
Flank guard
10
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Flank Guard: The flank guard moves abreast of the main body on a parallel route and may move continuously and at the same pace as the main body (see Diagram 1) or it may bound between successive positions (Diagram 2). These positions should be located on key terrain that can control avenues of approach into the flank. Lastly, the flank guard split into two units on each flank, can travel in alternating bounds between key terrain features (Diagram 3). No matter which method the unit commander uses, he must keep in mind that the flank guard: Will probably be traveling on more difficult terrain than the main body May have trouble keeping pace with the main body because of the difficult terrain
Rear Guard: To the rear of the main body is the rear guard. Like the advance guard, the rear guard can deploy a point (called a rear point) to provide early warning. Rapid movement forward can, in and of itself, provide a measure of security to the rear. The rear guard may also serve as a connecting group with friendly units to the rear, such as when a platoon is an advance guard in a company movement to contact.
As the unit commander further closes with the enemy, he must once again update his expectation of enemy contact. When the commander determines that he is close to the enemy main body or has other reasons to believe that a significant enemy force represents a threat to his unit, he will update his expectation of contact to contact imminent. For example, if the enemy is expected to delay along a route while they attempt to fortify a town, the commander will likely assume contact imminent as he nears the town. At this time, the security units will most likely deploy into their combat formation and the unit as a whole will adopt an approach march formation. The commander may partially or fully deploy his main body. Security and deployability take precedence over speed and control. Since tempo is critical to a successful movement to contact, the commander should not deploy into the approach march until decisive contact is imminent. The final picture may have the advance guard deployed in a wedge, while the main body either remains in a column or deploys into one of the more deployable formations (wedge, line, etc). The unit commander makes all last minute details for combat that he deems necessary. Indirect fire weapon systems are positioned to provide quick and accurate support (priority targets). He further evaluates the upcoming terrain to help in making decisions on the deployment and maneuver of the main body upon contact.
Contact Imminent
11
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Contact Imminent In the approach march, the advance guard may now move under the protection of an overwatching unitan element moves forward while (Continued)
another element positions itself to support-by-fire in case of enemy contact. Upon contact, the supporting element fires upon the enemy in order to assist the supported unit in either assaulting the enemy, bypassing, or falling back to better terrain. If you choose to overwatch your lead elements, do not push them out farther than the supporting unit's weapons can range. Movement to contact ends when your unit: Transitions to the defense Makes decisive contact with the enemy
ARRANGE/MAKE RECONNAISSANCE
Leaders Recon
A physical leaders recon is unlikely due to the time/space considerations of a typical movement to contact. A commander will have to rely on map recon and information given or requested during COC coordination for updated information about the enemy and terrain. Intelligence. Ground, signal, and human intelligence sources may be able to provide information on the terrain and enemy. Check debriefs from units that may have traveled the route before for information on terrain. UAVs can recon the route and provide real-time information on terrain and enemy. The intelligence officer can better support you if he or she knows what information you need to plan your mission. Fires. Aviation can recon the route and provide real-time information on terrain and enemy. Aviation and indirect fires are good economy of force and can maintain tempo if used to destroy or fix non-decisive enemy contact while the unit bypasses. Logistics. Pay attention to soldiers load in a foot-mobile movement to contact. To maintain tempo, Marines will be moving quickly over long distances, fighting as they go. To maintain tempo and preserve combat effectiveness, plan to take only mission-essential gear into the fight. Since Marines will be traveling with minimal supplies, arrange to have a resupply of chow, water, ammunition, batteries, packs, etc., on call for when the movement to contact ends. This will allow a quicker transition into follow-on operations. Communications. The unit needs a minimum of three radios to be effective: one with the unit leader, one with the advance guard leader (to develop the situation for the commander), and one with the main effort leader (who will become the new advance guard if the unit rotates). Any additional assets will further facilitate command and control.
COC Coordination
12
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
A detailed fire support plan will support the scheme of maneuver. Target areas where the enemy will likely make contact. For example, if the enemy is attempting to delay a units advance along a route, they will likely make contact where the unit has to cross choke points or danger areas and they have good standoff and withdrawal routes. The advance guard leader is usually in the best position to observe fires, since the advance guard is typically the first unit in contact. The commander will still control the fire support plan overall (e.g. rolling targets or approving the advance guard leaders use of fires). If the commander approves the advance guard leaders request for fire support, he may allow the advance guard leader to talk directly to the fire support agency IOT allow faster support.
Tasks
One of the most important aspects of tasking in a movement to contact is ensuring that each element can perform the role of the other elements. In order to maintain tempo, the commander will often bypass non-decisive engagements while the advance guard is still fighting. The main effort will move up and become the advance guard, the rear unit will become the main effort, and the previous advance guard will fall into the rear when the contact is complete. If one of the subordinate units does not understand its new role, it decreases the overall units effectiveness. Avoid overloading tasking statements with implied tasks (ensure your radios work before stepping off) or coordinating instructions (you will be first in the order of movement). Ensure that supporting effort tasking statements are worded so that supporting efforts understand how they support the main effort. In the following examples, the platoon commander has been tasked to
13
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Tasks (Continued)
clear Route Golden east to Alpha Company IOT prevent enemy ambushes against a follow-on resupply convoy. He has task-organized his force with the machineguns traveling with the advance party and the rear squad providing the flank and rear guards. 1st Squad: ME. At 1400, clear the enemy east along Route Golden to Alpha Company IOT prevent enemy ambushes against the resupply convoy. BPT assume the role of SE 1 or SE 2. 1st Squad, as the platoon ME, is the commanders bid for success and will ultimately accomplish the platoon mission.
2nd Squad: SE 1. At 1400, fix or clear enemy east along Route Golden IOT prevent enemy interference with the ME mission. BPT assume the roles of the ME or SE 2. 2nd Squad, as the advance party, is tasked to FIX (to prevent the enemy from moving any part of his forces, either from a specific location or for a specific period of time, by holding or surrounding them to prevent their withdrawal for use elsewhere) or CLEAR (the removal of enemy forces and elimination of organized resistance in an assigned zone, area, or location by destroying, capturing, or forcing the withdrawal of enemy forces that could interfere with the units ability to accomplish its mission) in order to prevent the enemy from interfering with the ME clearing Route Golden. In a non-decisive fight, fixing or clearing the enemy will allow the ME to bypass and continue its mission. In a decisive fight, fixing the enemy will prevent the enemy from effectively firing or reorienting while the ME maneuvers and destroys the enemy, thus clearing Route Golden.
3rd Squad: SE 2. At 1400, guard the flanks and rear of the platoon formation IOT prevent enemy interference with the ME mission. BPT assume the role of the ME or SE 1. 3rd Squad, providing the flank and rear guards, is given the friendly-oriented task of GUARD (to protect the main force by fighting to gain time while also observing and reporting information). This will prevent the enemy from conducting an effective surprise attack against the ME, and allow the ME to either bypass the threat or re-orient and clear it. The tasks of PROTECT (to prevent observation, engagement, or interference with a force or location) or INTERDICT (an action to divert, disrupt, delay, or destroy the enemys surface military potential before it can be used effectively against friendly forces) may also be appropriate in this case.
MG Squad: SE 3. GS of the platoon. O/O, suppress targets of opportunity along the platoons route of march IOT allow the ME to close with and clear the enemy. Target precedence is C2, fortified positions, and 4 or more enemy. Save 100 rounds per gun for consolidation.
14
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Tasks (Continued)
In the decisive fight, MG suppression will allow the ME to close with and clear the enemy. Since the commander is not sure exactly where this will be or what it will entail, this tasking statement will be more generic than a typical MG tasking statement. Briefing where the MGs will travel in the formation, what they will do on rotation, how they will link up, etc., will probably be covered in other parts of the order (SOM, Coord Inst) and are not necessary in the tasking statement.
Coordinating Instructions
The uncertain enemy situation creates a scheme of maneuver that lacks detail, at least relative to a deliberate attack. Detailed coordinating instructions are how a commander deals with likely enemy contingencies. You have seen this before in patrolling, and will see it again when you get to convoy operations. Some of the important coordinating instructions unique to movement to contact are: IA drills. The commander must have simple battle drills to react to enemy of assumed sizes and capabilities from any direction. Some of these battle drills will be discussed in detail later in the handout. Rotation Plan. The ability to smoothly rotate units is vital to maintaining tempo in a movement to contact. The decision to rotate will always lie with the commander or his guidance as laid out in the rotation plan. The rotation plan will detail rotation criteria (on order, if the advance guard loses communication for more than 10 minutes, etc.), as well as a detailed explanation of what each unit will do on rotation: As 1st Squad moves to engage the enemy, I will give the order to rotate. They will communicate the location of the machinegun squad, which will set security and remain in place. 2nd Squad will move forward and conduct link-up with the machinegun squad. 2nd Squad will assume the role of SE 1 and move forward as the new advance party. 3rd Squad will assume the role of the ME. 3rd Squad and platoon headquarters will hold in place until 2nd Squad is 400 meters ahead, and then resume movement. 3rd Squad will provide its own flank and rear security until 1st Squad rejoins the formation. When 1st Squads contact is complete or on order, 1st Squad will link up with 3rd Squad and assume the role of SE 2. Link-up Plan. A key part of the rotation plan. Marines will naturally be tense in a movement to contact; they are in an uncertain enemy environment and expecting contact at any time. With all the moving parts, there is a high potential for fratricide unless there is a good link-up plan and subordinate units are kept informed of other subordinate units locations. Responsibilities of each element. This is a chance for the commander to delineate some of the enduring tasks for each element. For example, if the platoon commander wants the platoons aid and litter team with the advance party, he cant include it in 1st Squads task because then the aid and litter team will be in the rear if 1st Squad rotates.
15
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Plan multiple CCPs and extract points for casualties and EPWs along the route of movement. Backtracking to a CASEVAC LZ will affect the units tempo, and it may be more expedient to move a casualty or EPW forward to the next pickup sitebased on the commanders assessment of the proximity of the LZ, the likelihood of enemy contact, and the time it will take the CASEVAC helo to arrive. If the movement to contact is being conducted along a route, ground evacuations can be conducted at any point since the unit has already cleared the route to that point. If the unit is an advance guard in a larger movement to contact, it can link up and hand over casualties and EPWs to the main body following behind for evacuation. In a platoon movement to contact, the advance party will likely have most of the casualties and EPWs. They can also perform the evacuation in non-decisive contacts, since the rest of the platoon will likely bypass them while they are in the fight. The signal plan should include signals likely to be used in contact (shift, cease, displace) and signals connected to the link-up and rotation plans. Also consider that the advance guard will usually be out of the main bodys line of sight and may need to use signals if their communications are downmost likely to inform the commander that their communications are down and that they are rotating to the rear of the formation to troubleshoot.
SUPERVISE
Conduct rehearsals to ensure that the plan is valid and understood by subordinate leaders. When conducting rehearsals, the emphasis is not on individual actions such as fire and movement, or on overly-detailed planning for every possible contingency. The commander should run simple, generic battle drills for the enemy situations that the unit is most likely to encounter. The emphasis should be on good combat reporting from subordinate unit leaders to develop the situation for the commander, and the commanders ability to make a decision and communicate it to subordinates. The commander himself is a key participant in the rehearsal. For example, the commander tells the advance guard leader to rehearse contact with an enemy squad. The advance guard leader makes up the details of the contact (enemy SALUTE, friendly location and actions, and relevant terrain information) in his report, and the commander must make and communicate a decision based on this information.
16
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Conduct Phase
MOVEMENT A footmobile movement to contact should be conducted at approximately a hike pace. Unlike patrolling, where a unit develops the situation by applying stealth and reconnaissance techniques, movement to contact develops the situation through contact. Tempo is a weapon for the commander that allows maneuver and surprise, ultimately allowing the commander to mass on the enemy before the enemy is prepared for decisive action. The commander controls the scheme of maneuver using tactical control measures. Some of the most useful TCMs in a movement to contact are phase lines and/or checkpoints. This helps the commander track the advance guard/main body dispersion and rates of movement. If the advance guard reports crossing Phase Line Red when the main body is only 150 meters away from Phase Line Red, then the commander may halt the main body until he has more dispersion. If the advance guard is too far away, the commander may momentarily halt them while the main body closes the gap. Phase lines and checkpoints can also be useful references for controlling other aspects of the operation. If briefed in the order, the unit will know that when they reach Phase Line Red the priority target, primary CASEVAC LZ, formation, etc., will shift. If you are the advance guard commander for a larger movement to contact, you have the same responsibilities to your higher commander that your advance party does to youdeveloping the situation by initiating action and reporting. If your advance party reports crossing Phase Line Red, then that information should be passed to the company commander. If your advance party reports enemy contact, you should make a decision, initiate action, and report the information to the company commander. Good combat reporting is critical to maintaining the tempo of a movement to contact, because it develops the situation for the commander and allows him to make a decision. After initiating action, the advance guard should report: Information on the enemy (SALUTE). Example: There is an enemy fireteam vicinity 874 381 engaging us with small arms. Friendly location and actions. Example: We are vicinity 873 382 moving southeast to destroy the enemy. Relevant terrain information. Example: Theres a ridgeline on our north flank; if you stay north of it you should be able to bypass the enemy fireteam without them seeing you.
Incomplete information may delay the commanders decision and slow the tempo of the operation while he attempts to pull more information from the subordinate unit or develop the situation on his own.
17
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Immediate Actions
Immediate action drills in the movement phase maintain tempo by using the minimum force necessary to fix, interdict, destroy, or clear enemy in order to allow the main effort to bypass non-decisive engagements. For a platoon, non-decisive engagements are generally defined as fireteam or smaller sized elements, since squad or larger enemy will require deploying the whole platoon. These example immediate action drills assume contact to the front. Contact to the flanks and rear will be handled in the same basic mannerflank guard or rear guard initiates action and reports; platoon commander decides and communicates further actionbut may slow the unit more. Remember that these immediate actions are only guidelines for what will happen in most cases, not hard and fast rules. If the advance party is easily clearing an enemy squad, there is no need to deploy the platoon; likewise, if the advance party is getting bogged down by heavy fire from an enemy fireteam, the platoon commander may need to deploy some support. The platoon commanders estimate of the situation is what will ultimately dictate the platoons actions. Depending on the distance to the sniper, the accuracy of his fire, and the availability of supporting arms, the commander has several options. If the sniper is 800 meters away, it is probably a waste of time and combat power to send a squad to destroy him, especially since he will likely displace before they get there. The platoon commander can obscure and bypass (with smoke grenades or smoke from supporting agencies), fix and bypass (using direct fires from the advance party or indirect fires), destroy with indirect fires or aviation fires, or clear with the advance party. Using indirect fires or aviation fires is the best economy of force, since it does not disrupt the units formation or significantly slow the unit. If the sniper is too close to safely employ supporting arms, or supporting arms are not available in a timely manner, then the platoon commander may decide to employ his organic units. If the platoon commander decides not to destroy (obscure and bypass or fix and bypass), then he needs to relay this information to any following units so they are aware of the threat. If the platoon commander decides to clear or destroy the enemy, he will send the advance party while he rotates the squads and bypasses with the main body. Once the platoon commander has made a decision and initiated the platoons action, he reports the situation to the company commander. The platoon commander has the same options for an enemy fireteam as for a sniper; however, if the platoon commander is considering bypass he needs to think about how large an enemy force he can bypass and still successfully accomplish the mission. If the platoon has been tasked to clear a route for a convoy, a fireteam may be too large to bypass; if the platoon has been tasked to quickly destroy a withdrawing enemy, the platoon commander may bypass the fireteam to pursue the enemy main body.
Sniper
Fire Team
18
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
DECISIVE ENGAGEMENT
Squad
When engaged by an enemy squad, the advance party (and machineguns, if located with the advance party) will perform a support by fire role for the main body. The advance party fixes and suppresses the enemy and reports the situation to the platoon commander (including terrain details such as if it is more advantageous for the platoon to flank from the left or the right). The platoon commander decides, initiates action and reports to the company commander. The platoon performs a hasty flanking attack and destroys or clears the enemy. In a platoon movement to contact, this ends the movement to contact (see Consolidation Phase). In a company or larger movement to contact, the platoon will rotate to the rear of the company. When engaged by an enemy platoon or larger, the advance party will suppress until the rest of the platoon can deploy. The platoon commander will assess the situation, take action, and report to the company commander. The platoon will perform a support by fire role for the company, or suppress until the company arrives to provide a support by fire for the battalion, etc. Contact with an enemy platoon will end a company movement to contact or rotate the company to the rear in a battalion movement to contact, etc.
Platoon or Larger
Consolidation/Reorganization Phase
Movement to contact ends when the unit is decisively engaged or transitions to the defense. If the unit reaches its limit of advance with no enemy contact and transitions to the defense, the movement to contact has ended. If the unit makes decisive contact, the movement to contact has endedthis does not mean that the unit will not quickly continue offensive operations, just that the decisive engagement has either accomplished the mission or developed the enemy situation to the point that the unit can conduct an attack. The unit conducts the same consolidation procedures as it would in an attack. The unit prepares for follow-on offensive, defensive, or retrograde operations. Follow-on offensive operations may include immediately rotating to the rear of the formation in a larger movement to contact.
References
Reference Number MCDP 1-0 MCRP 5-12A MCWP 3-1 MCWP 3-11.1 FM 3-90 FM 7-8 Reference Title Marine Corps Operations Operational Terms and Graphics Ground Combat Operations Marine Rifle Company / Platoon Tactics Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad
19
B3N4638
Movement to Contact
Notes
20
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3O4818
Military Law
Military Law
Introduction The Supreme Court has characterized the armed forces as a "society apart." They are a society within a society, with special societal needs, norms, and mores. That society also needs, and has, its own distinct legal system established by Congress to satisfy the needs of a society whose principal purpose is "to win wars." The courts have consistently recognized that some restraints on liberty and some legal procedures that would not be acceptable in American society generally, (e.g., inspection procedures), are permissible in the military community. Military law consists of the following: Statutes governing the military establishment and regulations issued there under. Constitutional powers of the President and regulations issued there under. Inherent authority of military commanders. Importance The purpose of military law is to: Promote justice. Assist in maintaining good order and discipline in the armed forces. Promote efficiency and effectiveness in the military establishment, and thereby strengthen the national security of the United States (US). This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Creation of Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) Page Error! Bookmark not defined. Regulations 7 Manual for Courts-Martial 8 Levels of Military Justice System 11 Summary Court Martial 18 Special (SPCM) and General (GCM) Courts21 Martial Evidentiary Seizures 23 Apprehension 26 Search and Seizures 29 Inspections 38 Types of Discharges 39 Involuntary Discharge Procedures 44
In This Lesson
B3O4818
Military Law
B3O4818
Military Law
Topic Summary References Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Notes Appendix A, USMJ Punitive Articles Appendix B, Nonjudicial Maximum Punishment Chart Appendix C, Suspects Rights Acknowledgement/Statement Appendix D, Military Suspects Acknowledgement and Waiver of Rights Appendix E, Record or Authorization for Search Appendix F, Military Police Receipt of Property (Chain of Custody)
Page 45 45 45 46 47 72 73 74 76 77
Learning Objectives
Terminal Learning Objectives MCCS-UCMJ-1001. Without the aid of reference, describe Article 15, Non-judicial Punishment (NJP) without error. MCCS-UCMJ-1002. Without the aid of reference, describe Article 31, Rights of the Accused without error. MCCS-UCMJ-1004. Without the aid of references, describe the Military's Justice System without error. MCCS-UCMJ-1005. Without the aid of references, identify the five types of discharges without omission. MCCS-UCMJ-1006. Without the aid of references, identify punitive articles of the UCMJ without omission. MCCS-UCMJ-1007. Without the aid of references, identify the forms of punishment for violations of the UCMJ without omission MCCS-UCMJ-1008. Without the aid of references, identify the types of courts-martial without omission.
B3O4818
Military Law
B3O4818
Military Law
The Manual for Courts-Martial is the document that implements the UCMJ. Issued by executive order signed by the President in his capacity as commander-in-chief, subsections of the MCM, 2002 are referred to as either: "Rules for Courts-Martial" (RCM) Military Rules of Evidence" (MRE) "Paragraphs"
Jurisdiction
Jurisdiction is the power to execute the laws and administer justice. The UCMJ applies to all active duty service members, anytime, anywhere. The Marine Corps has jurisdiction over all service members on active duty. Jurisdiction commences with a valid enlistment and ends with delivery of valid discharge papers. The UCMJ also applies to: Reservists on active duty, including drill weekends. Military retirees.
B3O4818
Military Law
Regulations
Congress authorizes service secretaries to issue regulations governing the conduct of their respective services. The Secretary of the Navy (SecNav) has promulgated US Navy Regulations (Navy Regs) as the controlling authority for Department of Navy regulations. Navy Regs cover numerous subjects including: The role of the Chief of Naval Operations and the Commandant of the Marine Corps (CMC). Ceremonial details and protocol. Various prohibitions on relationships between members of the Department of the Navy (e.g., Navy Regs define and prohibit fraternization and sexual harassment).
Other Regulations o JAGINST 5800.7C. Manual of the Judge Advocate General (JAGMAN). While the JAGMAN covers numerous matters concerning legal administration, chapter II is the primary reference for administrative (vice criminal) investigations. o Marine Corps Manual. Senior Marine Corps Regulation. o MCO P5800.8C. Marine Corps Manual for Legal Administration (LEGADMINMAN). Covers the administration of many legal situations including: Nonjudicial punishment. Officer misconduct. Unauthorized absences. Details of Marine Corps policy on topics such as: Paternity. Child support. Indebtedness.
B3O4818
Military Law
Finding the Proper Charge and Specification. Step Action 1 2 Get all of the facts. Review them and make sure you understand them. Identify the potential charge(s) by reviewing the contents of Part IV, Manual for Courts-Martial, 2005 to determine the applicable article(s). (See MCM, 2005, Table of Contents, Page xxiv.) Examine the elements and all explanation paragraphs in Part IV, MCM, 2005, for each article you think may be applicable. Match the facts as you know them with the elements and explanation paragraphs. There must be evidence, direct or circumstantial, establishing each element. Draft the specification(s) using the sample specifications contained in Part IV, MCM, 2005. Use the exact wording that is contained in the sample specification. Do not hesitate to call the trial counsel (prosecutor) who supports your unit.
B3O4818
Military Law
Charges and Specifications. Charge. What article of the UCMJ (by number) has allegedly been violated? Specifications. A statement of how the accused is supposed to have violated the article.
Example: Charge: Violation of the Uniform Code of Military Justice, Article 121. Specification: In that Private John D. Dillinger, US Marine Corps, Marine Fighter Attack Squadron 314, Marine Aircraft Group 11, Third Marine Aircraft Wing, Fleet Marine Force, Pacific, did, at Marine Corps Air Station, El Toro, California, on or about 2 January 2006, steal a wrist watch, of a value of about $75.00, the property of Sergeant J. E. Hoover, US Marine Corps. Lesser Included Offenses (LIO). An offense other than the one charged, which contains some, but not all, of the elements of the offense charged, and no elements different from the offense charged. An attempt to commit the charged offense is always an LIO of the charged offense (for example, attempted larceny). An attempt to commit an LIO of the charged offense is a lesser included offense of the charged offense. Because an LIO is a necessarily included offense within the original charge, there is no requirement to list it as a separate charge and specification. Examples of LIOs: Unauthorized absence (UA) is an LIO of desertion. Wrongful appropriation is an LIO of larceny.
B3O4818
Military Law
A general intent offense exists when the article does not indicate that a specific state of mind or element of knowledge is part of the offense. (In other words, if the article does not mention "intent" in the elements, it is normally a general intent offense.) Since it is presumed the accused intended the act, the government has no obligation to prove general intent. Examples of general intent offenses include: UA. Simple assault.
A specific intent offense exists when the article requires a specific state of mind or element of knowledge to exist in order for an offense to be committed. (In other words, the government must affirmatively prove state of mind.) To determine if a specific state of mind or knowledge is required to commit an offense, examine the text of the article and the elements of the offense appearing in Part IV, MCM, 2005. Examples of specific intent offenses include: Desertion. Larceny. Assault with intent to inflict grievous bodily harm.
Defenses. There are various types of defenses to charged misconduct. Defenses involve special rules and do not apply to all situations. Examples of some defenses are Lack of requisite criminal intent. Alibi. Impossibility. Ignorance or mistake of fact. Self-defense. Coercion or duress. Accident.
Refer questions about possible defenses to a charge to your staff judge advocate.
10
B3O4818
Military Law
Nonpunitive Corrective Measures. Nonpunitive corrective measures are corrective measures that are designed to overcome noted deficiencies in a unit or an individual and are not imposed as a punishment. Nonpunitive administrative actions include: Informal and formal counseling. Exhortation. Disapproval. Criticism. Administrative withholding of privileges.
A commander, (including a platoon commander), may withhold privileges, so long as an individual is not deprived of normal liberty. For example, if a Marine becomes drunk and causes a disturbance at the base theater, the commander may put the base theater off-limits to the Marine for a limited period of time. Extra Military Instruction (EMI). EMI is not meant to be punishment and measures utilized must: Logically relate to the deficiency. Serve a valid training purpose.
EMI may be performed after normal working hours, but only: After approval of the commanding officer. Under supervision.
EMI is never to be performed: For more than two hours a day. On Sunday.
Chapter I of the JAGMAN details the specific requirements for EMI. For examples, Extra drill for drill failures is permissible. Cleaning the head is not allowed for drill failure; this constitutes a punishment.
11
B3O4818
Military Law
Who may impose NJP? The power to impose punishment is an aspect of command; rank alone does not confer NJP authority. Company commanders and higher may impose punishment on commissioned and warrant officers and enlisted members of their commands. (By custom, officer punishment is usually reserved to general officers, although commanders down to battalion/squadron level sometimes exercise it.) Officers-in-charge who are specifically detailed as such by Table of Organization (T/O), commanding general's orders, or other such authority, may impose punishment on enlisted members of their units only.
Delegation of Authority
Only a flag or general officer-in-command may delegate the power to impose NJP. If the second-in-command assumes command, he or she also assumes NJP authority. This is succession to command, not a delegation of authority.
12
B3O4818
Military Law
The accused has an absolute right to refuse NJP. Unless attached to or embarked on a vessel. Even during the proceeding, until punishment is imposed. The punishment is considered imposed when it is announced by the commanding officer.
If an accused refuses NJP, the commanding officer has several options: Refer the case to trial by court-martial (or, if he or she is not a court-martial convening authority, forward the case to a senior commanding officer recommending such referral). Decide to take no further action. Use administrative/nonpunitive measures to dispose of the case.
An accused has no right to detailed defense counsel at NJP. Before deciding whether or not to accept NJP, an accused has the right to confer with an independent lawyer to help make that decision. Note: Counsel merely assists the accused in deciding whether or not to accept NJP; counsel does not normally represent the accused at NJP. As a practical matter, always provide the opportunity to talk to counsel. An accused may also waive the right to talk to counsel.
13
B3O4818
Military Law
Appeal Rights
Procedure at NJP Step Action 1 The individual who conducted the preliminary inquiry submits a report (oral or written) to the commanding officer, who decides whether or not to hold office hours. Report may be based on a Criminal Investigation Command (CID) or Naval Criminal Investigative Service (NCIS) report. 2 If office hours are to be held, the: Unit punishment book (UPB) is prepared. Accused is informed of: o The charges. o His or her Article 31 rights. o His or her right to refuse NJP. If the accused so desires, he or she may request to see an attorney prior to accepting or refusing NJP. 3 If the accused elects to accept NJP, the unit will: Schedule the office hours. Arrange for the presence of observers and witnesses. 4 Immediately before the office hours, the accused is again informed of all of his or her rights under Articles 15 and 31. 5 At: Company-level office hours, the company commander and first sergeant are usually present, as are the platoon commander and platoon sergeant in all but the most extraordinary circumstances. Battalion-level office hours, the battalion commander, sergeant major, company commander, and first sergeant would normally expect to be present. 6 During the NJP hearing, the commanding officer again reminds the accused of his or her rights under Articles 15 and 31. 7 Options available to the commanding officer: Dismiss the charge(s). Impose nonpunitive corrective measures. Impose NJP. Refer the case to trial by court-martial, or if not empowered to do so, refer the case to higher authority with a recommendation for trial by court-martial.
14 Basic Officer Course
B3O4818
Military Law
Authorized punishments are described in the chart in Appendix B (page 72). Suspension Part or all of the punishment imposed at NJP may be suspended for up to six months. If the accused: Stays out of trouble during the period of suspension, the suspended punishment is remitted (goes away). Is involved in further misconduct during the period of suspension, then the suspension can be vacated, and the suspended punishment takes effect.
An officer-in-charge (OIC), no matter what his rank, may never award: Punishment to an officer. More than that punishment imposable by a company-grade company commander.
In addition to the punishments described in Appendix B (page 72) commanders and OICs may always award punitive letters of admonishment or reprimand. (Punitive letters always become part of the recipient's official record.)
15
B3O4818
Military Law
Appeal Procedures
16
B3O4818
Military Law
The appeal authority cannot increase the punishment. Corrective Action after NJP If NJP was executed, action may be taken within a reasonable time (usually four months) to set aside the NJP. Such action may be taken by: Officer (billet) who initially imposed the NJP. Successor in command. Commanding officer or OIC of a command to which accused is properly transferred after the imposition of NJP.
Refer
Definition To create, appoint, and bring into existence The commander who creates, appoints, and brings into existence a court-martial. In the Marine Corps, the lowest level commander authorized to convene a court-martial (summary or special court-martial) is a battalion or squadron commander. In the air wings, however, it is common practice for air group commanders to withdraw courtmartial convening authority from squadron commanders, thereby making themselves the sole convening authority within their respective groups To send a specific case to a specific, previously convened courtmartial for trial
17
B3O4818
Military Law
Summary Court-Martial
Generally: SCM is the lowest, least severe form of court-martial under the UCMJ. Although called a court-martial, like NJP this is not a judicial proceeding. It is not a "criminal prosecution" like a SPCM or GCM. Only enlisted personnel can be tried by SCM.
SCM is composed of one commissioned officer: Usually in the grade of captain (O-3) or above (this is not an absolute requirement). Who acts as prosecutor, defense counsel, and judge.
The convening authority may restrict the power of the court to award a particular punishment. Rights of the Accused at SCM The accused has no right to a detailed military defense counsel, but may retain civilian counsel at his own expense. The accused does have to right to: Refuse SCM, even if embarked upon or attached to a vessel. Be present and to hear all the evidence against him or her. Cross-examine all witnesses who testify against him or her, and to examine all documentary and real evidence introduced at trial. Remain silent or to testify in his or her own behalf. Call witnesses and present evidence in his or her own behalf, both on the merits (guilt or innocence) and in extenuation and mitigation (appropriate sentence).
Obtain all of the: Witnesses. Evidence. Conduct a pretrial conference with the accused to go over: Rights. Administrative details pertaining to the court-martial.
18
B3O4818
Military Law
The military rules of evidence apply. Evidence is marked as exhibits and attached to the record of trial. Order of Proceedings Rights advisement of the accused Entry of pleas by the accused Evidence presented on the merits (if there is any plea of "not guilty") Findings ("guilty" or "not guilty" of each offense before the court) Evidence presented that is relevant to sentencing (aggravation, extenuation and mitigation) if there is a finding of "guilty" Sentencing (if "guilty")
The SCM prepares a record of trial, which must be promptly provided to the accused for use in preparation of any clemency submission he or she desires to make. The record includes: A summary of the hearing, to include a fairly detailed summary of all testimony pertaining to charges for which there was a plea of "not guilty" but a finding of "guilty". The original charge sheet. All exhibits the SCM considered.
19
B3O4818
Military Law
Maximum Punishment
Confinement for one month Forfeiture of two-thirds (2/3) of one month's pay for a period of one month (based on pay of rank to which reduced, if applicable) Reduction to the lowest enlisted pay grade (E-1)
Other Authorized Punishments (Imposed Instead of Confinement) If the accused is a sergeant (E-5) or above, he or she may not be
Reduced more than one pay grade Confined Awarded hard labor without confinement
20
B3O4818
Military Law
Special Court-Martial (SPCM). Battalion or squadron commanders or higher convene SPCMs. An SPCM requires a minimum of three members (if not military judge alone). Maximum sentence at an SPCM includes: Confinement for 12 months. Forfeiture of two-thirds (2/3) base pay per month for 12 months. Reduction to the lowest enlisted grade (E-1). Bad conduct discharge (BCD). Note: If the maximum possible punishment in the Article for that offense is less than the above listed punishments, then the limits in the Article apply. For example, punishment for a simple assault (Article 128) may not include a BCD, or confinement for more than 3 months, or forfeiture for more than three months. Officers can be tried by SPCM, but in practice rarely are because an SPCM may not award the following punishments to an officer: Dismissal. Confinement. Hard labor without confinement. A finding of guilty at a SPCM constitutes a federal misdemeanor conviction.
21
B3O4818
Military Law
The investigating officer (IO), usually an O-4 or above or a judge advocate, prepares a report to the officer who directed the investigation, who must be an SPCM or GCM convening authority. The IO's recommendations are not binding on the convening authority.
A GCM requires a minimum of five members (if not military judge alone).
At a GCM, the maximum sentence is whatever is specified under Part IV, Manual for Courts-Martial, for the offenses of which a Marine is found guilty. Possible punishments include: Death. Punitive discharge: o Bad Conduct Discharge (BCD) (for enlisted persons only). o Dishonorable discharge (DD) (for enlisted persons only). o Dismissal (this is the commissioned officer equivalent of a DD). Confinement (for both officers and enlisted persons). Reduction in rank (for enlisted persons only. Total forfeiture of all pay and allowances.
22
B3O4818
Military Law
Evidentiary Seizures
Article 31 Warnings -- Apprehension -- Search & Seizure. Introduction. Courts-martial are federal criminal proceedings. As in all criminal proceedings, significant constitutional, legal, and regulatory substantive and procedural protections exist which regulate the conduct of those proceedings and the use of evidence at those proceedings. The military rules of evidence (MREs) (Part III, Manual for Courts-Martial) are patterned after the federal rules of evidence that are applicable in federal district courts. The MREs have been, in some cases, modified to accommodate the military's special operational circumstances and needs of good order and discipline. Company grade officers commonly experience the following situations on a regular basis; these situations are by no means exhaustive. Understanding your authority and the limits thereof and the proper procedures for dealing with these situations directly impacts the court-martial process. Article 31 Warning Interrogation. What is an Article 31 Warning? The rights advisement required before questioning a suspect or an accused regarding the commission of an offense. Article 31 warning requirements began with the adoption of the UCMJ in 1950. Article 31, UCMJ: Prohibits compulsory self-incrimination or questioning of a suspect or an accused without first providing specific warnings. Appears in Appendix 2 of the Manual for Courts-Martial, 2000 (MCM, 2000). o Military Rule of Evidence 305, found in Part III of the MCM, 2000, discusses warnings about rights. Current warnings provide greater protection to a suspect or accused than required under the 5th Amendment to the US Constitution. Specific warnings currently required are: o You are suspected of the offense(s) of o You have the right to remain silent o Any statement you make may be used against you in a trial by courtmartial o You have the right to consult with a lawyer before any questioning. This lawyer may be a civilian lawyer retained by you at your own expense, a military lawyer appointed to act as your lawyer without cost to you, or both o You have the right to have such retained civilian lawyer and/or appointed military lawyer present during this interview o If you decide to answer questions now without a lawyer present, you will have the right to stop this interview at any time. You also have the right to stop answering questions at any time in order to obtain a lawyer.
23
B3O4818
Military Law
Anyone subject to the UCMJ must give Article 31 warnings if: An offense has been committed, and That person intends to ask the suspect questions about the offense.
Persons subject to the UCMJ who are either suspected or accused of having committed an offense and are going to be questioned about that offense. Suspect - a person you have reason to believe has committed an offense. Accused - a person who has been informed of sworn charges against him or her or who is facing disciplinary proceedings. All persons on active duty in the Armed Forces are subject to the UCMJ regardless of their geographic location.
24
B3O4818
Military Law
Waiver of Rights
The suspect or accused must freely, voluntarily, knowingly and intelligently waive his or her rights before any statement that he or she makes in response to questioning will be admissible at a court-martial. The suspect or accused may understand his or her rights but not waive them; therefore it is not sufficient to simply ask, "Do you understand your rights?" You must ask three questions of the individual to be interrogated for a valid waiver: 1. Do you want a lawyer? 2. Do you understand that if you should decide to answer questions, you may stop answering questions at any time? 3. Do you want to answer questions and make a statement? Get verbal responses to the three questions identified above. Do not be satisfied with nodding of the head, grunts, or similar nonverbal responses. Do not attempt to interrogate a person who is Drunk. Under the influence of drugs.
Use a format that permits the suspect or accused to acknowledge receipt of the warning and an understanding of his or her rights in writing whenever possible.
25
B3O4818
Military Law
Cleansing Warning
26
B3O4818
Military Law
Apprehension
Definition Taking an individual into custody. The military equivalent of civilian "arrest".
Authority to apprehend
Authority may be exercised on- or off-base by: Commissioned, warrant, and noncommissioned officers. Military personnel or civilians performing law enforcement, guard, police, or investigative duties. Military police or CID agents regardless of rank. Civilian law enforcement personnel such as NCIS agents or contract security guards. Sentries on post, when authorized to apprehend by their special orders.
A person subject to the UCMJ may be apprehended for an offense under the UCMJ based on probable cause. Probable cause to apprehend exists when there are reasonable grounds to believe both that: An offense has been or is being committed. The person to be apprehended committed it.
Civilians are not apprehended. They are "detained" until turned over to civilian law enforcement authorities. Military dependents are civilians and are to be treated as such.
27
B3O4818
Military Law
Apprehension (Continued)
How to Apprehend Identify yourself to the person being apprehended. If in civilian attire, the best method is to display your armed forces identification card. Clearly notify the person who is being apprehended that he or she is in custody. Even though the fact of apprehension may be implied from the circumstances, do not rely on implication to affect an apprehension tell the person why he or she is being apprehended. Reasonable force may be used to affect an apprehension. If possible under the circumstances, an individual equal or senior in rank to the individual to be apprehended should execute the apprehension. Always search the individual apprehended immediately after taking him or her into custody.
28
B3O4818
Military Law
Exclusionary Rule
Generally, illegally obtained evidence may not be admissible at a court-martial. In addition to evidence that is itself obtained illegally, evidence that is derived from illegal government activities may be subject to the exclusion sanction. Search. Looking for evidence by an agent of the government (see Appendix E (page 76), Record or Authorization for Search) Seizure. Taking physical control of evidence. Real. o o o Physical, tangible item: Pistol. Knife. Drugs.
Definitions
Types of Evidence
Documentary. Written statement, logbook, ledger, or other written record. Testimonial. The testimony of a witness in open court.
29
B3O4818
Military Law
For example, drugs admitted at trial to prove the offense of possession must be demonstrated to be the same drugs actually seized from the accused. To prove authenticity requires: Identification by a unique characteristic. Chain of custody.
Identification
Used when there is an easily recognizable piece of evidence: o Serialized weapons. o Items indelibly marked by the person seizing the evidence. o Items with peculiar individual characteristics. Does not require a chain of custody, although a chain of custody will always be of assistance.
Chain of Custody
The party offering the evidence must account for every person having custody of the evidence between the time it was seized and the time it is admitted into evidence at trial. (Appendix F [page 77] is a sample chain of custody document.) The party offering the evidence must demonstrate that the evidence was safeguarded and properly handled. Any break in the chain of custody may render the evidence inadmissible. A chain of custody can be as short as one link (i.e., a single custodian).
30
B3O4818
Military Law
Instrumentalities of a crime (e.g., burglar tools). Fruits of a crime (e.g., stolen money, stereo). Weapons that could be used to attempt escape. Contraband (any property the possession of which is illegal).
Requiring probable cause. Not requiring probable cause. Probable cause is a reasonable belief that the person, property, or evidence sought, is located in the place or on the person to be searched. Essentially, to search an area where an individual has a reasonable expectation of privacy, you need to have probable cause and proper authorization or permission. If there is any question whether authorization is required to search a particular place, the best policy is to get authorization first if the circumstances permit (example: unlocked personal gear locker in a government office). Authorization to search is an express permission, written or oral, issued by the commanding officer, to search a person or an area for specified property or evidence and to seize such property, evidence, or person.
31
B3O4818
Military Law
Based on what you know, would a reasonable person believe what you are looking for is located where you are looking for it? Before a person may conclude that probable cause to search exists, he or she must first have a reasonable belief that the information giving rise to the intent to search is reliable and has a factual basis. Is the source of the information worthy of belief? The commanding officer must be informed of the source of the information presented so that he or she may independently determine the reliability of the informant or information. Indications of reliability are: Prior reliability of source Detail of information provided Amount of time that has passed since information came into hands of informant A determination of probable cause may be based on any or all of the following: Written sworn statements communicated to the commanding officer Sworn oral statements communicated to the commanding officer o In person o Via telephone o By other appropriate means of communication Such information that the commanding officer may already know.
32
B3O4818
Military Law
The search authorization's direction concerning the area to be searched must not be exceeded. Example: "1992 blue Mazda pickup truck. Virginia license plate IOU-20K, located in parking lot 14 at Camp Barrett, TBS, MCCDC, Quantico, Virginia for cocaine." If you are not sure you have probable cause to search, do not rush into it. Isolate the area and request assistance (e.g., duty judge advocate, legal officer).
33
B3O4818
Military Law
Who may conduct a search or seize evidence found (after an authorization has been granted)?
If the person whose property is to be searched is present during a search conducted pursuant to a search authorization, the person conducting the search should, when possible, notify him or her of the act of authorization and its general substance before or contemporaneously with the search. Before performing any search, ask yourself two questions: Can I perform this search without further authorization? If not, what must I do to obtain authorization?
Test
34
B3O4818
Military Law
No consent or probable cause is required unless the person to whom the property is issued or assigned has a reasonable expectation of privacy therein at the time of the search. One does not usually have an expectation of privacy in that which is not issued for personal use. Example: Wall lockers or footlockers in living quarters that are issued for the purpose of storing personal possessions normally are issued for personal use. In that case, there is an expectation of privacy. Example: Office desks or government brief cases are issued for official business purposes; therefore, no recognized expectation of privacy exists. However, if there is any question about expectation of privacy, the safest course of action is to obtain authorization.
35
B3O4818
Military Law
36
B3O4818
Military Law
Apprehension is the taking of a person into custody. It is the military equivalent of the civilian term "arrest." What can be searched incident to an apprehension?
37
B3O4818
Military Law
Inspections
Definition. The examination of the whole or part of a: Unit. Organization. Installation. Vessel. Aircraft. Vehicle. including an examination made at entrance and exit points, conducted as an incident of command, the primary purpose of which is to determine and ensure the: Security. Military fitness. Good order and discipline.
of the unit, organization, installation, vessel, aircraft, or vehicle. Scope. An inspection may include, but is not limited to, an examination to determine and to ensure that any or all of the following requirements are met: That the command is properly equipped, functioning properly, maintaining proper standards of readiness, sea or airworthiness, sanitation, and cleanliness. That personnel are present, fit, and ready for duty. o Urinalysis testing - Primary purpose is to ferret out illegal drugs as a means of protecting the health of the unit and assuring its fitness to accomplish its mission. o An inspection also includes an examination to locate and confiscate unlawful weapons and other contraband when such property would adversely affect the security, military fitness, or good order and discipline of the command and when the facts and circumstances of the inspection establish that the inspection was not ordered to gather evidence concerning a specific crime or a specific individual. The legality of such a "contraband search" would be closely examined at a trial.
The best policy is to schedule the inspection of the command. This does not mean that the date of the examination must be published to the command as a whole. An inspection made for the primary purpose of obtaining evidence for use in a trial by court-martial or in other disciplinary proceedings is not an inspection, it is a search (this is called a subterfuge). Evidence discovered during a subterfuge search is not admissible at trial. Conducting the Inspection Must be conducted in a reasonable fashion. May use any reasonable natural or technological aid, such as drug detection dogs.
38
B3O4818
Military Law
Inspections (Continued)
Results Any unlawful weapons, contraband, or other evidence of crime located during a lawful inspection may be seized and may be admissible at trial. Any unit leader, including a platoon commander, squad leader, or fire team leader may order an inspection for the security, military fitness, or good order and discipline of his or her unit. Such "health and welfare" inspections are generally designed to: Ascertain the health, welfare, morale, state of readiness and living conditions of unit members. Check the state of physical repair or disrepair of buildings and equipment of the unit.
Authority
Article 31 warnings are not required in order to inspect because you are not asking a suspect or an accused to make a statement. Plain View Doctrine While in the course of a lawful activity, if a person who has the authority to seize reasonably observes evidence that is subject to seizure, he or she may seize the evidence. In other words, if the government official was legitimately situated when he or she saw an item and if the government official reasonably believed that the item seen was connected with criminal activity, then the item can be seized. Example: A company commander (a person with the authority to seize), during a routine personnel inspection (lawful activity), notices a switchblade knife protruding from the pocket of a PFC. (Reasonable observation of an item subject to seizure.) Inventories Items connected with criminal activity that are discovered during the course of a bona fide inventory, may be seized under the plain view doctrine. For impounded vehicles, inventories are permissible because they protect: The owner from loss. The government against claims. Protect police from possible dangerous contents.
39
B3O4818
Military Law
Types of Discharges
Introduction. The majority of Marines, officer and enlisted, separate or leave our Corps at the end of an enlistment or contract; regular officers submit a resignation. There are other circumstances, both voluntary and involuntary, under which Marines may leave active duty, prior to the completion of their obligated service. Regardless of the circumstances under which a Marine leaves the service, he or she will be issued a DD Form 214 that will reflect the basis (reason) for discharge and a characterization of their service. Your role is primarily to counsel and educate. You will make the initial recommendation for characterization of discharge. You are the starting point for the Marine's "paper" or admin record. You may also sit as a member of an administrative separation board. When a Marine separates from the service he or she is entitled to certain federal benefits. However, should that Marine receive anything but an honorable discharge, his or her benefits may be affected. As part of your counseling program you should advise your Marines of these facts. Note: A Marine must get an honorable discharge to be eligible for the G.I. bill.
Basis for Separation. Voluntary. A Marine may shorten or revoke his or her enlistment. The CMC will normally approve the request if criteria are met. Possible basis for voluntary separation are: o If a Marine determines that his or her enlistment contract is defective because: Of a material misrepresentation. The enlistment was not voluntary. There is a change in service obligation for reservists on inactive duty. o For a change in service obligation of an active duty Marine, such as to receive a commission or appointment. o If elected to a statewide or national public office. o To further his or her education (request must fall within 90 days of the Marine's remaining service). o For dependency or hardship that: Cannot be a temporary condition. Must have come about since the Marine entered active duty. o If the Marine is pregnant (not normally approved unless extenuating circumstances). o For a conscientious objection to further service (see MCO 1306.16). o When a Marine is the surviving family member of his or her generation (see DOD Directive 1315.15).
40
B3O4818
Military Law
41
B3O4818
Military Law
How discharges are characterized depends upon the: Type of discharge. Basis for discharge. Quality of the Marine's service.
Punitive Discharge. Issued as punishment for misconduct. The table below describes the three types of punitive discharge.
Description Characterizes a Marine's service as other than honorable Can only be awarded as punishment by a special or general court-martial Characterizes a Marine's service as dishonorable Can only be awarded as punishment by a general court-martial Applies only to officers Is the equivalent of a dishonorable discharge Can only be awarded as punishment by a general court-martial
Dismissal
42
B3O4818
Military Law
Discharge Honorable
Description Earned by a Marine who meets or exceeds the high standards of the Corps. Issued to a Marine if that Marine's service is determined to have significant negative aspects. Though characterized as "under honorable conditions," may impact a Marine's future because a future employer will know that the Marine's service did not meet the high standards of the Corps. Associated with a Marine who has earned conduct and proficiency marks less than 4.0/3.0. Issued to a Marine when that Marine's service can be characterized as a significant departure from accepted standards or practices. Associated with a Marine who: o Commits misconduct. o Requests and receives a separation in lieu of trial by court-martial. No characterization of service given. Within the first six months of service, a Marine who cannot complete entry-level training may be given an entry-level discharge. A Marine with a fraudulent enlistment may be ordered released from the control of the Marine Corps, called an order of release from custody.
Uncharacterized
43
B3O4818
Military Law
Board
Special court-martial authorities convene involuntary discharge boards to review and recommend the disposition of certain cases: Involving involuntary separation Where Marines have been recommended for discharges which are less than honorable
The board: Must be composed of at least three officers, at least one of whom must be O-4 or greater. Will recommend both the: o Category of separation o Characterization of the discharge
The separation authority makes the final decision. Not every Marine is entitled to an administrative discharge board.
44
B3O4818
Military Law
Summary
In the near future you will be in a leadership position from which you will influence the lives of Marines. You must be prepared to counsel them about the benefits and consequences of the various discharges they can receive. You may have to recommend them for administrative separation. You could be called upon to sit on an administrative discharge board. While you may not make the final decisions, your actions will have a significant effect upon the outcome.
References
Reference Number or Author UCMJ MCM JAGMAN Reference Title Uniform Code of Military Justice Manual for Courts-Martial Manual of the Judge Advocate General
45
B3O4818
Military Law
Notes
46
B3O4818
Military Law
47
resignation, the accused quit his or her post or proper duties; (c) That the accused did so with the intent to remain away permanently from his or her post or proper duties; and (d) That the accused remained absent until the date alleged. [Note: If the absence was terminated by apprehension, add the following element] (e) That the accuseds absence was terminated by apprehension. (4) Attempted desertion. (a) That the accused did a certain overt act; (b) That the act was done with the specific intent to desert; (c) That the act amounted to more than mere preparation; and (d) That the act apparently tended to effect the commission of the offense of desertion. c. Explanation. (1) Desertion with intent to remain away permanently. (a) In general. Desertion with intent to remain away permanently is complete when the person absents himself or herself without authority from his or her unit, organization, or place of duty, with the intent to remain away there from permanently. A prompt repentance and return, while material in extenuation, is no defense. It is not necessary that the person be absent entirely from military jurisdiction and control. (b) Absence without authority inception, duration, termination. See paragraph 10c. (c) Intent to remain away permanently. (i) The intent to remain away permanently from the unit, organization, or place of duty may be formed any time during the unauthorized absence. The intent need not exist throughout the absence, or for any particular period of
time, as long as it exists at some time during the absence. (ii) The accused must have intended to remain away permanently from the unit, organization, or place of duty. When the accused had such an intent, it is no defense that the accused also intended to report for duty elsewhere, or to enlist or accept an appointment in the same or a different armed force. (iii) The intent to remain away permanently may be established by circumstantial evidence. Among the circumstances from which an inference may be drawn that an accused intended to remain absent permanently or; that the period of absence was lengthy; that the accused attempted to, or did, dispose of uniforms or other military property; that the accused purchased a ticket for a distant point or was arrested, apprehended, or surrendered a considerable distance from the accuseds station; that the accused could have conveniently surrendered to military control but did not; that the accused was dissatisfied with the accuseds unit, ship, or with military service; that the accused made remarks indicating an intention to desert; that the accused was under charges or had escaped from confinement at the time of the absence; that the accused made preparations indicative of an intent not to return (for example, financial arrangements); or that the accused enlisted or accepted an appointment in the same or another armed force without disclosing the fact that the accused had not been regularly separated, or entered any foreign armed service without being authorized by the United States. On the other hand, the following are included in the circumstances which may tend to negate an inference that the accused intended to remain away permanently: previous long and excellent service; that
the accused left valuable personal property in the unit or on the ship; or that the accused was under the influence of alcohol or drugs during the absence. These lists are illustrative only. (iv) Entries on documents, such as personnel accountability records, which administratively refer to an accused as a deserter are not evidence of intent to desert. (v) Proof of, or a plea of guilty to, an unauthorized absence, even of extended duration, does not, without more, prove guilt of desertion. (d) Effect of enlistment or appointment in the same or a different armed force. Article 85a(3) does not state a separate offense. Rather, it is a rule of evidence by which the prosecution may prove intent to remain away permanently. Proof of an enlistment or acceptance of an appointment in a service without disclosing a preexisting duty status in the same or a different service provides the basis from which an inference of intent to permanently remain away from the earlier unit, organization, or place of duty may be drawn. Furthermore, if a person, without being regularly separated from one of the armed forces, enlists or accepts an appointment in the same or another armed force, the persons presence in the military service under such an enlistment or appointment is not a return to military control and does not terminate any desertion or absence without authority from the earlier unit or organization, unless the facts of the earlier period of service are known to military authorities. If a person, while in desertion, enlists or accepts an appointment in the same or another armed force, and deserts while serving the enlistment or appointment, the person may be tried and convicted for each desertion. (2) Quitting unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid
hazardous duty or to shirk important service. (a) Hazardous duty or important service. Hazardous duty or important service may include service such as duty in a combat or other dangerous area; embarkation for certain foreign or sea duty; movement to a port of embarkation for that purpose; entrainment for duty on the border or coast in time of war or threatened invasion or other disturbances; strike or riot duty; or employment in aid of the civil power in, for example, protecting property, or quelling or preventing disorder in times of great public disaster. Such services as drill, target practice, maneuvers, and practice marches are not ordinarily hazardous duty or important service. Whether a duty is hazardous or a service is important depends upon the circumstances of the particular case, and is a question of fact for the court-martial to decide. (b) Quits. Quits in Article 85 means goes absent without authority. (c) Actual knowledge. Article 85 a(2) requires proof that the accused actually knew of the hazardous duty or important service. Actual knowledge may be proved by circumstantial evidence. (3) Attempting to desert. Once the attempt is made, the fact that the person desists, voluntarily or otherwise, does not cancel the offense. The offense is complete, for example, if the person, intending to desert, hides in an empty freight car on a military reservation, intending to escape by being taken away in the car. Entering the car with the intent to desert is the overt act. For a more detailed discussion of attempts, see paragraph 4. For an explanation concerning intent to remain away permanently, see subparagraph 9c(1)(c). (4) Prisoner with executed punitive discharge. A prisoner whose dismissal
or dishonorable or bad-conduct discharge has been executed is not a member of the armed forces within the meaning of Articles 85 or 86, although the prisoner may still be subject to military law under Article 2(a)(7). If the facts warrant, such a prisoner could be charged with escape from confinement under Article 95 or an offense under Article 134. d. Lesser included offense. Article 86 absence without leave e. Maximum punishment. (1) Completed or attempted desertion with intent to avoid hazardous duty or to shirk important service. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 5 years. (2) Other cases of completed or attempted desertion. (a) Terminated by apprehension. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 3 years. (b) Terminated otherwise. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 2 years. (3) In time of war. Death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. f. Sample specifications. (1) Desertion with intent to remain away permanently. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, on or about ____________20____________, (a time of war) without authority and with intent to remain away there from permanently, absent himself/herself from his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty), to wit: ____________, located at (____________), and did remain so absent in desertion until (he/she was apprehended) on or about ____________ 20____________.
(2) Desertion with intent to avoid hazardous duty or shirk important service. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, on or about ____________ 20____________, (a time of war) with intent to (avoid hazardous duty) (shirk important service), namely: ____________, quit his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty), to wit: ____________, located at (____________), and did remain so absent in desertion until on or about ____________ 20____________. (3) Desertion prior to acceptance of resignation. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data) having tendered his/her resignation and prior to due notice of the acceptance of the same, did, on or about ____________ 20____________, (a time of war) without leave and with intent to remain away there from permanently, quit his/her (post) (proper duties), to wit: ____________, and did remain so absent in desertion until (he/she was apprehended) on or about ____________ 20 ____________. (4) Attempted desertion. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did (at/onboardlocation), on or about ____________ 20____________, (a time of war) attempt to (absent himself/herself from his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty) to wit: ____________, without authority and with intent to remain away there from permanently) (quit his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty), to wit: ______________, located at ______________, with intent to (avoid hazardous duty) (shirk important service) namely ____________) (____________). 10. Article 86Absence without leave
a. Text. Any member of the armed forces who, without authority (1) fails to go to his appointed place of duty at the time prescribed; (2) goes from that place; or (3) absents himself or remains absent from his unit, organization, or place of duty at which he is required to be at the time prescribed; shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. b. Elements. (1) Failure to go to appointed place of duty. (a) That a certain authority appointed a certain time and place of duty for the accused; (b) That the accused knew of that time and place; and (c) That the accused, without authority, failed to go to the appointed place of duty at the time prescribed. (2) Going from appointed place of duty. (a) That a certain authority appointed a certain time and place of duty for the accused; (b) That the accused knew of that time and place; and (c) That the accused, without authority, went from the appointed place of duty after having reported at such place. (3) Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty. (a) That the accused absented himself or herself from his or her unit, organization, or place of duty at which he or she was required to be; (b) That the absence was without authority from anyone competent to give him or her leave; and (c) That the absence was for a certain period of time. [Note: if the absence was terminated by apprehension, add the following element] (d) That the absence was
terminated by apprehension. (4) Abandoning watch or guard. (a) That the accused was a member of a guard, watch, or duty; (b) That the accused absented himself or herself from this or her guard, watch, or duty section; (c) That absence of the accused was without authority; and [Note: if the absence was terminated by apprehension, add the following element] (d) That the accused intended to abandon his or her guard, watch, or duty section. (5) Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises. (a) That the accused absented himself or herself from his or her unit, organization, or place of duty at which he or she was required to be; (b) That the absence of the accused was without authority; (c) That the absence was for a certain period of time; (d) That the accused knew that the absence would occur during a part of a period of maneuvers or field exercises; and (e) That the accused intended to avoid all or part of a period of maneuvers or field exercises. c. Explanation. (1) In general. This article is designed to cover every case not elsewhere provided for in which any member of the armed forces is through the members own fault not at the place where the member is required to be at a prescribed time. It is not necessary that the person be absent entirely from military jurisdiction and control. The first part of the articlerelating to the appointed place of dutyapplies whether the place is appointed as a rendezvous for several or for one only. (2) Actual knowledge. The offenses of failure to go to and going from
appointed place of duty require proof that the accused actually knew of the appointed time and place of duty. The offense of absence from unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises requires proof that the accused actually knew that the absence would occur during a part of a period of maneuvers or field exercises. Actual knowledge may be proved by circumstantial evidence. (3) Intent. Specific intent is not an element of unauthorized absence. Specific intent is an element for certain aggravated unauthorized absences. (4) Aggravated forms of unauthorized absence. There are variations of unauthorized absence under Article 86(3) which are more serious because of aggravating circumstances such as duration of the absence, a special type of duty from which the accused absents himself or herself, and a particular intent which accompanies the absence. These circumstances are not essential elements of a violation of Article 86. They simply constitute special matters in aggravation. The following are aggravated unauthorized absences: (a) Unauthorized absence for more than 3 days (duration). (b) Unauthorized absence for more than 30 days (duration). (c) Unauthorized absence from a guard, watch, or duty (special type of duty). (d) Unauthorized absence from guard, watch, or duty section with the intent to abandon it (special type of duty and specific intent). (e) Unauthorized absence with the intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises (special type of duty and specific intent). (5) Control by civilian authorities. A member of the armed forces turned over to the civilian authorities upon request
under Article 14 (see R.C.M. 106) is not absent without leave while held by them under that delivery. When a member of the armed forces, being absent with leave, or absent without leave, is held, tried, and acquitted by civilian authorities, the members status as absent with leave, or absent without leave is not thereby changed, regardless how long held. The fact that a member of the armed forces is convicted by the civilian authorities, or adjudicated to be a juvenile offender, or the case is diverted out of the regular criminal process for a probationary period does not excuse any unauthorized absence, because the members inability to return was the result of willful misconduct. If a member is released by the civilian authorities without trial, and was on authorized leave at the time of arrest or detention, the member may be found guilty of unauthorized absence only if it is proved that the member actually committed the offense for which detained, thus establishing that the absence was the result of the members own misconduct. (6) Inability to return. The status of absence without leave is not changed by an inability to return through sickness, lack of transportation facilities, or other disabilities. But the fact that all or part of a period of unauthorized absence was in a sense enforced or involuntary is a factor in extenuation and should be given due weight when considering the initial disposition of the offense. When, however, a person on authorized leave, without fault, is unable to return at the expiration thereof, that person has not committed the offense of absence without leave. (7) Determining the unit or organization of an accused. A person undergoing transfer between activities is ordinarily considered to be attached to the activity to which ordered to report. A person on temporary additional duty
continues as a member of the regularly assigned unit and if the person is absent from the temporary duty assignment, the person becomes absent with out leave from both units, and may be charged with being absent without leave from either unit. (8) Duration. Unauthorized absence under Article 86(3) is an instantaneous offense. It is complete at the instant an accused absents himself or herself without authority. Duration of the absence is a matter in aggravation for the purpose of increasing the maximum punishment authorized for the offense. Even if the duration of the absence is not over 3 days, it is ordinarily alleged in an Article 86(3) specification. If the duration is not alleged or if alleged but not proved, an accused can be convicted of and punished for only 1 day of unauthorized absence. (9) Computation of duration. In computing the duration of an unauthorized absence, any one continuous period of absence found that total not more than 24 hours is counted as 1 day; any such period that totals more than 24 hours and not more than 48 hours is counted as 2 days, and so on. The hours of departure and return on different dates are assumed to be the same if not alleged and proved. For example, if an accused is found guilty of unauthorized absence from 0600 hours, 4 April, to 1000 hours, 7 April of the same year (76 hours), the maximum punishment would be based on an absence of 4 days. However, if the accused is found guilty simply of unauthorized absence from 4 April to 7 April, the maximum punishment would be based on an absence of 3 days. (10) Terminationmethods of return to military control. (a) Surrender to military authority. A surrender occurs when a person presents himself or herself to any military authority, whether or not a
member of the same armed force, notifies that authority of his or her unauthorized absence status, and submits or demonstrates a willingness to submit to military control. Such a surrender terminates the unauthorized absence. (b) Apprehension by military authority. Apprehension by military authority of a known absentee terminates an unauthorized absence. (c) Delivery to military authority. Delivery of a known absentee by anyone to military authority terminates the unauthorized absence. (d) Apprehension by civilian authorities at the request of the military. When an absentee is taken into custody by civilian authorities at the request of military authorities, the absence is terminated. (e) Apprehension by civilian authorities without prior military request. When an absentee is in the hands of civilian authorities for other reasons and these authorities make the absentee available for return to military control, the absence is terminated when the military authorities are informed of the absentees availability. (11) Findings of more than one absence under one specification. An accused may properly be found guilty of two or more separate unauthorized absences under on specification, provided that each absence is included within the period alleged in the specification and provided that the accused was not misled. If an accused is found guilty of two or more unauthorized absences under a single specification, the maximum authorized punishment shall not exceed that authorized if the accused had been found guilty as charged in the specification. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80-attempts e. Maximum punishment.
(1) Failing to go to, or going from, the appointed place of duty. Confinement for 1 month and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 1 month. (2) Absence from unit, organization, or other place of duty. (a) For not more than 3 days. Confinement for 1 month and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 1 month. (b) For more than 3 days but not more than 30 days. Confinement for 6 months and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 6 months. (c) For more than 30 days. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 1 year. (d) For more than 30 days and terminated by apprehension. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 18 months. (3) From guard or watch. Confinement for 3 months and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 3 months. (4) From guard or watch with intent to abandon. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. (5) With intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises. Bad conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. f. Sample specifications. (1) Failing to go or leaving place of duty. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did (at/on board location), on or about ____________20____________, 28. Article 104Aiding the enemy a. Text. Any person who (1) aids, or attempts to aid, the enemy with arms, ammunition, supplies, money, or other things; or
without authority, (fail to go at the time prescribed to) (go from) his/her appointed place of duty, to with: (here set for the appointed place of duty). (2) Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty. In that _____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, on or about ___________20____________, without authority, absent himself/herself from his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty at which he/she was required to be), to wit: ____________, located a ____________, and did remain so absent until (he/she was apprehended) on or about ____________20____________. (3) Absence from unit, organization, or place of duty with intent to avoid maneuvers or field exercises. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, on or about ___________20____________, without authority and with intent to avoid (maneuvers) (field exercises), absent himself/herself from his/her (unit) (organization) (place of duty at which he/she was required to be), to wit: ____________ located at (____________), and did remain so absent until on or about ____________20____________. (4) Abandoning watch or guard. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), being a member of the ____________ (guard) (watch) (duty section), did, (at/on boardlocation), on or about _____________20____________ without authority, go from his/her (guard) (watch) (duty section) (with intent to abandon same).
(2) without proper authority, knowingly harbors or protects or gives intelligence to or communicates or corresponds with or holds any intercourse with the enemy, either directly or indirectly; shall suffer death or such other punishment as a court-
martial or military commission may direct. b. Elements. (1) Aiding the enemy. (a) That the accused aided the enemy; and (b) That the accused did so with certain arms, ammunition, supplies, money, or other things. (2) Attempting to aid the enemy. (a) That the accused did a certain overt act; (b) That the act was done with the intent to aid the enemy with certain arms, ammunition, supplies, money, or other things; (c) That the act amounted to more than mere preparation; and (d) That the act apparently tended to bring about the offense of aiding the enemy with certain arms, ammunition, supplies, money, or other things. (3) Harboring or protecting the enemy. (a) That the accused, without proper authority, harbored or protected a person; (b) That the person so harbored or protected was the enemy; and (c) That the accused knew that the person so harbored or protected was an enemy. (4) Giving intelligence to the enemy. (a) That the accused, without proper authority, knowingly gave intelligence information to the enemy; and (b) That the intelligence information was true, or implied the truth, at least in part. (5) Communicating with the enemy. (a) That the accused, without proper authority, communicated, corresponded, or held intercourse with the enemy, and;
(b) That the accused knew that the accused was communicating, corresponding, or holding intercourse with the enemy. c. Explanation. (1) Scope of Article 104. This article denounces offenses by all persons whether or not otherwise subject to military law. Offenders may be tried by court-martial or by military commission. (2) Enemy. For a discussion of enemy, see paragraph 23c(1)(b). (3) Aiding or attempting to aid the enemy. It is not a violation of this article to furnish prisoners of war subsistence, quarters, and other comforts or aid to which they are lawfully entitled. (4) Harboring or protecting the enemy. (a) Nature of offense. An enemy is harbored or protected when, without proper authority, that enemy is shielded, either physically or by use of any artifice, aid, or representation from any injury or misfortune which in the chance of war may occur. (b) Knowledge. Actual knowledge is required, but may be proved by circumstantial evidence. (5) Giving intelligence to the enemy. (a) Nature of offense. Giving intelligence to the enemy is a particular case of corresponding with the enemy made more serious by the fact that the communication contains intelligence that may be useful to the enemy for any of the many reasons that make information valuable to belligerents. This intelligence may be conveyed by direct or indirect means. (b) Intelligence. Intelligence imports that the information conveyed is true or implies the truth, at least in part. (c) Knowledge. Actual knowledge is required but may be proved by circumstantial evidence.
(6) Communicating with the enemy. (a) Nature of the offense. No unauthorized communication, correspondence, or intercourse with the enemy is permissible. The intent, content, and method of the communication, correspondence, or intercourse are immaterial. No response or receipt by the enemy is required. The offense is complete the moment the communication, correspondence, or intercourse issues from the accused. The communication, correspondence, or intercourse may be conveyed directly or indirectly. A prisoner of war may violate this Article by engaging in unauthorized communications with the enemy. See also paragraph 29c(3). (b) Knowledge. Actual knowledge is required but may be proved by circumstantial evidence. (c) Citizens of neutral powers. Citizens of neutral powers resident in or visiting invaded or occupied territory can claim no immunity from the customary laws of war relating to communication with the enemy. d. Lesser included offense. For harboring or protecting the enemy, giving intelligence to the enemy, or communicating with the enemy. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Death or such other punishment as a court-martial or military commission may direct. f. Sample specifications. (1) Aiding or attempting to aid the enemy. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/onboard location), on or about ____________20____________, (attempt to) aid the enemy with (arms) (ammunition) (supplies) (money) (____________), by (furnishing and delivering to ____________, members of the enemys armed forces____________) (____________).
(2) Harboring or protecting the enemy. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on board location), on or about ____________20____________, without proper authority, knowingly (harbor) (protect)____________, an enemy, by (concealing the said ____________in his/her house) (____________). (3) Giving intelligence to the enemy. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on board location), on or about ____________20____________, without proper authority, knowingly give intelligence to the enemy, by (informing a patrol of the enemys forces of the whereabouts of a military patrol of the United States forces) (_____________). (4) Communicating with the enemy. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on board location), on or about ____________20____________, without proper authority, knowingly (communicate with) (correspond with) (hold intercourse with) the enemy (by writing and transmitting secretly through the lines to one ____________, whom he/she, the said ____________, knew to be (an officer of the enemys armed forces) (____________) a communication in words and figures substantially as follows, to wit: ____________)) ((indirectly by publishing in ____________, a newspaper published at ____________, a communication in words and figures as follows, to wit: _____________, which communication was intended to reach the enemy)) ((____________)).
a. Text. Any person subject to this chapter who, with intent to deceive, signs any false record, return, regulation, order, or other official document, knowing it to be false, or makes any other false official statement knowing it to be false, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. b. Elements. (1) That the accused signed a certain official document or made a certain official statement; (2) That the document or statement was false in certain particulars; (3) That the accused knew it to be false at the time of signing it or making it; and (4) That the false document or statement was made with the intent to deceive. c. Explanation. (1) Official documents and statements. Official documents and official statements include all documents and statements made in the line of duty. (2) Status of victim of the deception. The rank of any person intended to be deceived is immaterial if that person was authorized in the execution of a particular duty to require or receive the statement or document from the accused. The government may be the victim of this offense. (3) Intent to deceive. The false representation must be made with the intent to deceive. It is not necessary that the false statement be material to the issue inquiry. If, however, the falsity is in respect to a material matter, it may be considered as some evidence of the intent to deceive, while immateriality may tend to show an absence of this intent. (4) Material gain. The expectation of material gain is not an element of this offense. Such expectation or lack of it, however, is circumstantial evidence
bearing on the element of intent to deceive. (5) Knowledge that the document or statement was false. The false representation must be one which the accused actually knew was false. Actual knowledge may be proved by circumstantial evidence. An honest, although erroneous, belief that a statement made is true, is a defense. (6) Statements made during an interrogation. (a) Person without an independent duty or obligation to speak. A statement made by an accused or suspect during an interrogation is not an official statement within the meaning of the article if that person did not have an independent duty or obligation to speak. But see paragraph 79 (false swearing). (b) Person with an independent duty or obligation to speak. If a suspect or accused does have an independent duty or obligation to speak, as in the case of a custodian who is required to account for property, a statement made by that person during an interrogation into the matter is official. While the person could remain silent (Article 31(b)), if the person chooses to speak, the person must do so truthfully. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 5 years. f. Sample specification. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on board location), (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, with intent to deceive, (sign an official (record) (return) (____________), to wit: ____________) (make to _______________, an official statement, to wit: ______________), which (record) (return) (statement)
32. Article 108Military property of the United Statessale, loss, damage, destruction, or wrongful disposition a. Text. Any person subject to this chapter who, without proper authority (1) sells or otherwise disposes of; (2) willfully or through neglect damages, destroys, or loses; or (3) willfully or through neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of, any military property of the United States, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. b. Elements. (1) Selling or otherwise disposing of military property. (a) That the accused sold or otherwise disposed of certain property (which was a firearm or explosive); (b) That the sale or disposition was without proper authority; (c) That the property was military property of the United States; and (d) That the property was of a certain value. (2) Damaging, destroying, or losing military property. (a) That the accused, without proper authority, damaged or destroyed certain property in a certain way, or lost certain property; (b) That the property was military property of the United States; (c) That the damage, destruction, or loss was willfully caused by the accused or was the result of neglect by the accused; and (d) That the property was of a certain value or the damage was of a certain amount. (3) Suffering military property to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of. (a) That certain property (which was a firearm or explosive) was lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of; (b) That the property was military property of the United States; (c) That the loss, damage, destruction, sale, or wrongful disposition was suffered by the accused, without proper authority, through a certain omission of duty by the accused; (d) That the omission was willful or negligent; and (e) That the property was of a certain value or the damage was of a certain amount. c. Explanation. (1) Military property. Military property is all property, real or personal, owned, held, or used by one of the armed forces of the United States. If is immaterial whether the property sold, disposed, destroyed, lost, or damaged had been issued to the accused, to someone else, or even issued at all. If it is proved by either direct or circumstantial evidence that items of individual issue were issued to the accused, it may be inferred, depending on all the evidence, that the damage, destruction, or loss proved was due to the neglect of the accused. Retail merchandise of service exchange stores is not military property under this article.
B3O4818
Military Law
(2) Suffering military property to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of. To suffer means to allow or permit. The willful or negligent sufferance specified by this article includes: deliberate violation or intentional disregard of some specific law, regulation, or order; reckless or unwarranted personal use of the property; causing or allowing it to remain exposed to the weather, insecurely housed, or not guarded; permitting it to be consumed, wasted, or injured by other persons; or loaning it to a person, known to be irresponsible, by whom it is damaged. (3) Value and damage. In the case of loss, destruction, sale, or wrongful disposition, the value of the property controls the maximum punishment which may be adjudged. In the case of damage, the amount of damage controls. As a general rule, the amount of damage is the estimated or actual cost of repair by the government agency normally employed in such work, or the cost of replacement, as shown by government price lists or otherwise, whichever is less. d. Lesser included offenses. (1) Sale or disposition of military property. (a) Article 80attempts (b) Article 134sale or disposition of non-military government property (2) Willfully damaging military property. (a) Article 108damaging military property through neglect (b) Article 109willfully damaging non-military property (c) Article 80attempts (3) Willfully suffering military property to be damaged. (a) Article 108through neglect suffering military property to be damaged (b) Article 80attempts (4) Willfully destroying military property. (a) Article 108through neglect destroying military property (b) Article 109willfully destroying non-military property (c) Article 108willfully damaging military property (d) Article 109willfully damaging non-military property (e) Article 108through neglect damaging military property (f) Article 80attempts (5) Willfully suffering military property to be destroyed. (a) Article 108through neglect suffering military property to be destroyed (b) Article 108willfully suffering military property to be damaged (c) Article 108through neglect suffering military property to be damaged (d) Article 80attempts (6) Willfully losing military property. (a) Article 108through neglect, losing military property (b) Article 80attempts (7) Willfully suffering military property to be lost. (a) Article 108through neglect, suffering military property to be lost (b) Article 80attempts (8) Willfully suffering military property to be sold. (a) Article 108through neglect, suffering military property to be sold (b) Article 80attempts (9) Willfully suffering military property to be wrongfully disposed of. (a) Article 108through neglect, suffering military property to be wrongfully disposed of in the manner alleged (b) Article 80attempts
59
B3O4818
Military Law
e. Maximum punishment. (1) Selling or otherwise disposing of military property. (a) Of a value of $100.00 or less. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowance, and confinement for 1 year. (b) Of a value of more than $100.00 or any firearm or explosive. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 10 years. (2) Through neglect damaging, destroying, or losing, or through neglect suffering to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of, military property. (a) Of a value or damage of $100.00 or less. Confinement for 6 months, and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 6 months. (b) Of a value or damage of more than $100.00. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 1 year. (3) Willfully damaging, destroying, or losing, or willfully suffering to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of, military property. (a) Of a value or damage of $100.00 or less. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 1 year. (b) Of a value or damage of more than $100.00, or of any firearm or explosive. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 10 years. f. Sample specifications. (1) Selling or disposing of military property. In that ____________(personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ___________ 20____________, without proper authority, (sell to ____________) (dispose of by ____________)____________, ((a firearm) (an explosive)) of a value of (about) $ ____________, military property of the United States. (2) Damaging, destroying, or losing military property. In that _____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about _____________ 20 ____________, without proper authority, ((willfully) (through neglect)) ((damage by _____________) (destroy by ____________)) (lose)) ____________ (of a value of (about) $ ____________,) military property of the United States (the amount of said damage being in the sum of (about) $ ____________). (3) Suffering military property to be lost, damaged, destroyed, sold, or wrongfully disposed of. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________ 20 ____________, without proper authority, (willfully) (through neglect) suffer, ((a firearm) (an explosive)) (of a value of (about) $ ____________) military proper t y of the United States, to be (lost) (damaged by ____________) (destroyed by ____________) (sold to ____________) (wrongfully disposed of by ____________) (the amount of said damage being in the sum of (about $ _____________).
46. Article 121Larceny and wrongful appropriation a. Text. (a) Any person subject to this chapter who wrongfully takes, obtains, or withholds, by any means, from the possession of the owner or of any other person any money, personal property, or article of value of any kind
60
B3O4818
Military Law
(1) with intent permanently to deprive or de-fraud another person of the use and benefit of property or to appropriate it to his own use or the use of any person other than the owner, steals that property and is guilty of larceny; or (2) with intent temporarily to deprive or de-fraud another person of the use and benefit of property or to appropriate it to his own use or the use of any person other than the owner, is guilty of wrongful appropriation. (b) Any person found guilty of larceny or wrongful appropriation shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. b. Elements. (1) Larceny. (a) That the accused wrongfully took, obtained, or withheld certain property from the possession of the owner or of any other person; (b) That the property belonged to a certain person; (c) That the property was of a certain value, or of some value; and (d) That the taking, obtaining, or withholding by the accused was with the intent permanently to deprive or defraud another person of the use and benefit of the property or permanently to appropriate the property for the use of the accused or for any person other than the owner. [Note: If the property is alleged to be military property, as defined in paragraph 32c(1), add the following element] (e) That the property was military property. (2) Wrongful appropriation. (a) That the accused wrongfully took, obtained, or withheld certain property from the possession of the owner or of any other person; (b) That the property belonged to a certain person; (c) That the property was of a certain value, or of some value; and (d) That the taking, obtaining, or withholding by the accused was with the intent temporarily to deprive or defraud another person of the use and benefit of the property or temporarily to appropriate the property for the use of the accused or for any person other than the owner. c. Explanation. (1) Larceny. (a) In general. A wrongful taking with intent permanently to deprive includes the common law offense of larceny; a wrongful obtaining with intent permanently to defraud includes the offense formerly known as obtaining by false pretense; and a wrongful withholding with intent permanently to appropriate includes the offense formerly known as embezzlement. Any of the various types of larceny under Article 121 may be charged and proved under a specification alleging that the accused did steal the property in question. (b) Taking, obtaining, or withholding. There must be a taking, obtaining, or withholding of the property by the thief. For instance, there is no taking if the property is connected to a building by a chain and the property has not been disconnected from the building; property is not obtained by merely acquiring title thereto without exercising some possessory control over it. As a general rule, however, any movement of the property or any exercise of dominion over it is sufficient if accompanied by the requisite intent. Thus, if an accused enticed anothers horse into the accuseds stable without touching the animal, or procured a railroad company to deliver anothers trunk by changing the check on it, or obtained the delivery of anothers goods to a person or place designated by the accused, or had the funds of another transferred to the
61
B3O4818
Military Law
accuseds bank account, the accused is guilty of larceny if the other elements of the offense have been proved. A person may obtain the property of another by acquiring possession without title, and one who already has possession of the property of another may obtain it by later acquiring title to it. A withholding may arise as a result of a failure to return, account for, or deliver property to its owner when a return, accounting, or delivery is due, even if the owner has made no demand for the property, or it may arise as a result of devoting property to a use not authorized by its owner. Generally, this is so whether the person withholding the property acquired it lawfully or unlawfully. See subparagraph c(1)(f) below. However, acts which constitute the offense of unlawfully receiving, buying, or concealing stolen property or of being an accessory after the fact are not included within the meaning of withholds. Therefore, neither a receiver of stolen property nor an accessory after the fact can be convicted of larceny on that basis alone. The taking, obtaining, or withholding must be of specific property. A debtor does not withhold specific property from the possession of a creditor by failing or refusing to pay a debt, for the relationship of debtor and creditor does not give the creditor a possessory right in any specific money or other property of the debtor. (c) Ownership of the property. (i) In general. Article 121 requires that the taking, obtaining, or withholding be from the possession of the owner or of any other person. Care, custody, management, and control are among the definitions of possession. (ii) Owner. Owner refers to the person who, at the time of the taking, obtaining, or with-holding, had the superior right to possession of the property in the light of all conflicting interests therein which may be involved in the particular case. For instance, an organization is the true owner of its funds as against the custodian of the funds charged with the larceny thereof. (iii) Any other person. Any other person means any personeven a person who has stolen the propertywho has possession or a greater right to possession than the accused. In pleading a violation of this article, the ownership of the property may be alleged to have been in any person, other than the accused, who at the time of the theft was a general owner or a special owner thereof. A general owner of property is a person who has title to it, whether or not that person has possession of it; a special owner, such as a borrower or hirer, is one who does not have title but who does have possession, or the right of possession, of the property. (iv) Person. Person, as used in referring to one from whose possession property has been taken, obtained, or withheld, and to any owner of property, includes (in addition to a natural person) a government, a corporation, an association, an organization, and an estate. Such a person need not be a legal entity. (d) Wrongfulness of the taking, obtaining, or withholding. The taking, obtaining, or withholding of the property must be wrongful. As a general rule, a taking or withholding of property from the possession of another is wrongful if done without the consent of the other, and an obtaining of property from the possession of another is wrongful if the obtaining is by false pretense. However, such an act is not wrongful if it is authorized by law or apparently lawful superior orders, or, generally, if done by a person who has a right to the possession of the property either equal to or greater than the right of one from whose possession the property is taken, obtained, or withheld. An owner of property who takes or withholds it from the possession of another, without the consent of the other, or who obtains it there from by false pretense, does so wrongfully if the other has a superior rightsuch as a liento possession of the property. A person who takes, obtains, or withholds property as the agent of another has the same rights and
62
B3O4818
Military Law
liabilities as does the principal, but may not be charged with a guilty knowledge or intent of the principal which that person does not share. (e) False pretense. With respect to obtaining property by false pretense, the false pretense may be made by means of any act, word, symbol, or token. The pretense must be in fact false when made and when the property is obtained, and it must be knowingly false in the sense that it is made without a belief in its truth. A false pretense is a false representation of past or existing fact. In addition to other kinds of facts, the fact falsely represented by a person may be that persons or anothers power, authority, or intention. Thus, a false representation by a person that person presently intends to perform a certain act in the future is a false representation of an existing factthe intentionand thus a false pre-tense. Although the pretense need not be the sole cause inducing the owner to part with the property, it must be an effective and intentional cause of the obtaining. A false representation made after the property was obtained will not result in a violation of Article 121. A larceny is committed when a person obtains the property of another by false pretense and with intent to steal, even though the owner neither intended nor was requested to part with title to the property. Thus, a person who gets anothers watch by pretending that it will be borrowed briefly and then returned, but who really intends to sell it, is guilty of larceny. (f) Intent. (i) In general. The offense of larceny requires that the taking, obtaining, or withholding by the thief be accompanied by an intent permanently to deprive or defraud another of the use and benefit of property or permanently to appropriate the property to the thiefs own use or the use of any person other than the owner. These intents are collectively called an intent to steal. Although a person gets property by a taking or obtaining which was not wrongful or which was without a concurrent intent to steal, a larceny is nevertheless committed if an intent to steal is formed after the taking or obtaining and the property is wrongfully withheld with that intent. For example, if a person rents anothers vehicle, later decides to keep it permanently, and then either fails to return it at the appointed time or uses it for a purpose not authorized by the terms of the rental, larceny has been committed, even though at the time the vehicle was rented, the person intended to return it after using it according to the agreement. (ii) Inference of intent. An intent to steal may be proved by circumstantial evidence. Thus, if a person secretly takes property, hides it, and denies knowing anything about it, an intent to steal may be inferred; if the property was taken openly and returned, this would tend to negate such an intent. Proof of sale of the property may show an intent to steal, and therefore, evidence of such a sale may be introduced to support a charge of larceny. An intent to steal may be inferred from a wrongful and intentional dealing with the property of another in a manner likely to cause that person to suffer a permanent loss thereof. (iii) Special situations. (A) Motive does not negate intent. The accuseds purpose in taking an item ordinarily is irrelevant to the accuseds guilt as long as the accused had the intent required under subparagraph c(1)(f)(i) above. For example, if the accused wrongfully took property as a joke or to teach the owner a lesson this would not be a defense, although if the accused intended to return the property, the accused would be guilty of wrongful appropriation, not larceny. When a person takes property intending only to return it to its lawful owner, as when stolen property is taken from a thief in order to return it to its owner, larceny or wrongful appropriation is not committed.
63
B3O4818
Military Law
(B) Intent to pay for or replace property not a defense. An intent to pay for or replace the stolen property is not a defense, even if that intent existed at the time of the theft. If, however, the accused takes money or a negotiable instrument having no special value above its face value, with the intent to return an equivalent amount of money, the offense of larceny is not committed although wrongful appropriation may be. (C) Return of property not a defense. Once a larceny is committed, a return of the property or payment for it is no defense. See subparagraph c(2) below when the taking, obtaining, or withholding is with the intent to return. (g) Value. (i) In general. Value is a question of fact to be determined on the basis of all of the evidence admitted. (ii) Government property. When the stolen property is an item issued or procured from Government sources, the price listed in an official publication for that property at the time of the theft is admissible as evidence of its value. See Mil. R. Evid. 803(17). However, the stolen item must be shown to have been, at the time of the theft, in the condition upon which the value indicated in the official price list is based. The price listed in the official publication is not conclusive as to the value of the item, and other evidence may be admitted on the question of its condition and value. (iii) Other property. As a general rule, the value of other stolen property is its legitimate market value at the time and place of the theft. If this property, because of its character or the place where it was stolen, had no legitimate market value at the time and place of the theft or if that value cannot readily be ascertained, its value may be determined by its legitimate market value in the United States at the time of the theft, or by its replacement cost at that time, whichever is less. Market value may be established by proof of the recent purchase price paid for the article in the legitimate market involved or by testimony or other admissible evidence from any person who is familiar through training or experience with the market value in question. The owner of the property may testify as to its market value if familiar with its quality and condition. The fact that the owner is not an expert of the market value of the property goes only to the weight to be given that testimony, and not to its admissibility. See Mil. R. Evid. 701. When the character of the property clearly appears in evidencefor instance, when it is exhibited to the court-martialthe court-martial, from its own experience, may infer that it has some value. If as a matter of common knowledge the property is obviously of a value substantially in excess of $100.00, the court-martial may find a value of more than $100.00. Writings representing value may be considered to have the valueeven though contingentwhich they represented at the time of the theft. (iv) Limited interest in property. If an owner of property or someone acting in the owners behalf steals it from a person who has a superior, but limited, interest in the property, such as a lien, the value for punishment purposes shall be that of the limited interest. (h) Miscellaneous considerations. (i) Lost property. A taking or withholding of lost property by the finder is larceny if accompanied by an intent to steal and if a clue to the identity of the general or special owner, or through which such identity may be traced, is furnished by the character, location, or marketing of the property, or by other circumstances. (ii) Multiple article larceny. When a larceny of several articles is committed at substantially the same time and place, it is a single larceny even though the articles belong to different persons. Thus, if a thief steals a suitcase containing the property of
64
B3O4818
Military Law
several persons or goes into a room and takes property belonging to various persons, there is but one larceny, which should be alleged in but one specification. (iii) Special kinds of property which may also be the subject of larceny. Included in property which may be the subject of larceny is property which is taken, obtained, or withheld by severing it from real estate and writings which represent value such as commercial paper. (iv) Services. Theft of services may not be charged under this paragraph, but see paragraph 78. (v) Mail. As to larceny of mail, see also paragraph 93. (2) Wrongful appropriation. (a) In general. Wrongful appropriation requires an intent to temporarily as opposed to permanentlydeprive the owner of the use and benefit of, or appropriate to the use of another, the property wrongfully taken, withheld, or obtained. In all other respects wrongful appropriation and larceny are identical. (b) Examples. Wrongful appropriation includes: taking anothers automobile without permission or lawful authority with intent to drive it a short distance and then return it or cause it to be returned to the owner; obtaining a service weapon by falsely pretending to be about to go on guard duty with intent to use it on a hunting trip and later return it; and while driving a government vehicle on a mission to deliver supplies, withholding the vehicle from government service by deviating from the assigned route without authority, to visit a friend in a nearby town and later restore the vehicle to its lawful use. An inadvertent exercise of control over the property of another will not result in wrongful appropriation. For example, a person who fails to return a borrowed boat at the time agreed upon because the boat inadvertently went aground is not guilty of this offense. d. Lesser included offenses. (1) Larceny. (a) Article 121wrongful appropriation (b) Article 80attempts (2) Larceny of military property. (a) Article 121wrongful appropriation (b) Article 121larceny of property other than military property (c) Article 80attempts (3) Wrongful appropriation. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. (1) Larceny. (a) Military property of a value of $100 or less. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 1 year. (b) Property other than military property of a value of $100 or less. Badconduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. (c) Military property of a value of more than $100 or of any military motor vehicle, aircraft, vessel, firearm, or explosive. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 10 years. (d) Property other than military property of a value of more than $100 or any motor vehicle, air-craft, vessel, firearm, or explosive not included in subparagraph e(1)(c). Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for five years. (2) Wrongful appropriation.
65
B3O4818
Military Law
(a) Of a value of $100.00 or less. Confinement for 3 months, and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 3 months. (b) Of a value of more than $100.00. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. (c) Of any motor vehicle, aircraft, vessel, firearm, or explosive. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 2 years. f. Sample specifications. (1) Larceny. In that ____________(personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, steal _____________, (military property), of a value of (about) $ ____________, the property of ____________. (2) Wrongful appropriation. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, wrongfully appropriate ____________, of a value of (about) $ _____________, the property of ____________.
78. Article 134(False pretenses, obtaining services under) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) That the accused wrongfully obtained certain services; (2) That the obtaining was done by using false pretenses; (3) That the accused then knew of the falsity of the pretenses; (4) That the obtaining was with intent to defraud; (5) That the services were of a certain value; and (6) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. This offense is similar to the offenses of larceny and wrongful appropriation by false pretenses, except that the object of the obtaining is services (for example, telephone service) rather than money, personal property, or articles of value of any kind as under Article 121. See paragraph 46c. See paragraph 49c(14) for a definition of intent to defraud. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Obtaining services under false pretenses. (1) Of a value of $100.00 or less. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. (2) Of a value of more than $100.00. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 5 years. f. Sample specification. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, with intent to defraud, falsely pretend to ____________ that ____________, then knowing that the pretenses were false, and by means thereof did wrongfully obtain from ____________ services, of a value of (about) $ ____________, to wit: ____________.
66
B3O4818
Military Law
79. Article 134(False swearing) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) That the accused took an oath or equivalent; (2) That the oath or equivalent was administered to the accused in a matter in which such oath or equivalent was required or authorized by law; (3) That the oath or equivalent was administered by a person having authority to do so; (4) That upon this oath or equivalent the accused made or subscribed a certain statement; (5) That the statement was false; (6) That the accused did not then believe the statement to be true; and (7) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. (1) Nature of offense. False swearing is the making under a lawful oath or equivalent of any false statement, oral or written, not believing the statement to be true. It does not include such statements made in a judicial proceeding or course of justice, as these are under Article 131, perjury (see paragraph 57). Unlike a false official statement under Article 107 (see paragraph 31) there is no requirement that the statement be made with an intent to deceive or that the statement be official. See paragraphs 57c(1), c(2)(c) and c(2)(e) concerning judicial proceeding or course of justice, proof of the falsity, and the belief of the accused, respectively. (2) Oath. See Article 136 and R.C.M. 807 as to the authority to administer oaths, and see Section IX of Part III (Military Rules of Evidence) concerning proof of the signatures of persons authorized to administer oaths. An oath includes an affirmation when authorized in lieu of an oath. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 3 years. f. Sample specification. In that _____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, (in an affidavit) (in ____________), wrongfully and unlawfully (make) (subscribe) under lawful (oath) (affirmation) a false statement in substance as follows: ____________, which statement he/she did not then believe to be true. 80. Article 134(Firearm, dischargingthrough negligence) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) That the accused discharged a firearm; (2) That such discharge was caused by the negligence of the accused; and
67
B3O4818
Military Law
(3) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. For a discussion of negligence, see paragraph 85c(2). d. Lesser included offenses. None e. Maximum punishment. Confinement for 3 months and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 3 months. f. Sample specification. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20_____________, through negligence, discharge a (service rifle) (____________) in the (squadron) (tent) (barracks) (____________) of _____________.
81. Article 134(Firearm, dischargingwillfully, under such circumstances as to endanger human life) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) That the accused discharged a firearm; (2) That the discharge was willful and wrongful; (3) That the discharge was under circumstances such as to endanger human life; and (4) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. Under circumstances such as to endanger human life refers to a reasonable potentiality for harm to human beings in general. The test is not whether the life was in fact endangered but whether, considering the circumstances surrounding the wrongful discharge of the weapon, the act was unsafe to human life in general. d. Lesser included offenses. (1) Article 134firearm, dischargingthrough negligence (2) Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 1 year. f. Sample specification. In that_____________ (personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, wrongfully and willfully discharge a firearm, to wit: _____________, (in the mess hall of _____________) (_____________), under circumstances such as to endanger human life.
82. Article 134(Fleeing scene of accident) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) Driver. (a) That the accused was the driver o f a vehicle; (b) That while the accused was driving the vehicle was involved in an accident;
68
B3O4818
Military Law
(c) That the accused knew that the vehicle had been in an accident; (d) That the accused left the scene of the accident without (providing assistance to the victim who had been struck (and injured) by the said vehicle) or (providing identification); (e) That such leaving was wrongful; and (f) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. (2) Senior passenger. (a) That the accused was a passenger in a vehicle which was involved in an accident; (b) That the accused knew that said vehicle had been in an accident; (c) That the accused was the superior commissioned or noncommissioned officer of the driver, or commander of the vehicle, and wrongfully and unlawfully ordered, caused, or permitted the driver to leave the scene of the accident without (providing assistance to the victim who had been struck (and injured) by the said vehicle) (or) (providing identification); and (d) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. (1) Nature of offense. This offense covers hit and run situations where there is damage to property other than the drivers vehicle or injury to someone other than the driver or a passenger in the drivers vehicle. It also covers accidents caused by the accused, even if the accuseds vehicle does not contact other people, vehicles, or property. (2) Knowledge. Actual knowledge that an accident has occurred is an essential element of this offense. Actual knowledge may be proved by circumstantial evidence. (3) Passenger. A passenger other than a senior passenger may also be liable under this paragraph. See paragraph 1 of this Part. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Bad-conduct discharge, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 6 months. f. Sample specification. In that ____________ (personal jurisdiction data), (the driver of) (a passenger in*) (the senior officer/noncommissioned officer in) (____________ in) a vehicle at the time of an accident in which said vehicle was involved, and having knowledge of said accident, did, at-____________ (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________ 20____________ (wrongfully leave) (by _____________, assist the driver of the said vehicle in wrongfully leaving*) (wrongfully order, cause, or permit the driver to leave) the scene of the accident without (providing assistance to ____________, who had been struck (and injured) by the said vehicle) (making his/her (the drivers) identity known). [Note: This language should be used when the accused was a passenger and is charged as a principal. See paragraph 1 of this part.] 83. Article 134(Fraternization) a. Text. See paragraph 60.
69
B3O4818
Military Law
b. Elements. (1) That the accused was a commissioned or warrant officer; (2) That the accused fraternized on terms of military equality with one or more certain enlisted member(s) in a certain manner; (3) That the accused then knew the person(s) to be (an) enlisted member(s); (4) That such fraternization violated the custom of the accuseds service that officers shall not fraternize with enlisted members on terms of military equality; and (5) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces. c. Explanation. (1) In general. The gist of this offense is a violation of the custom of the armed forces against fraternization. Not all contact or association between officers and enlisted persons is an offense. Whether the contact or association in question is an offense depends on the surrounding circumstances. Factors to be considered include whether the conduct has compromised the chain of command, resulted in the appearance of partiality, or otherwise undermined good order, discipline, authority, or morale. The acts and circumstances must be such as to lead a reasonable person experienced in the problems of military leadership to conclude that the good order and discipline of the armed forces has been prejudiced by their tendency to compromise the respect of enlisted persons for the professionalism, integrity, and obligations of an officer. (2) Regulations. Regulations, directives, and orders may also govern conduct between officer and enlisted personnel on both a service-wide and a local basis. Relationships between enlisted persons of different ranks, or between officers of different ranks may be similarly covered. Violations of such regulations, directives, or orders may be punishable under Article 92. See paragraph 16. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Dismissal, forfeiture of all pay and allowances, and confinement for 2 years. f. Sample specification. In that ____________(personal jurisdiction data), did, (at/on boardlocation), on or about _____________, 20 _____________, knowingly fraternize with ____________, an enlisted person, on terms of military equality, to wit: _____________, in violation of the custom of (the Naval Service of the United States) (the United States Army) (the United States Air Force) (the United States Coast Guard) that officers shall not fraternize with enlisted persons on terms of military equality. 84. Article 134(Gambling with subordinate) a. Text. See paragraph 60. b. Elements. (1) That the accused gambled with a certain service member; (2) That the accused was then a noncommissioned or petty officer; (3) That the service member was not then a non-commissioned or petty officer and was subordinate to the accused; (4) That the accused knew that the service member was not then a noncommissioned or petty officer and was subordinate to the accused; and (5) That, under the circumstances, the conduct of the accused was to the prejudice of good order and discipline in the armed forces or was of a nature to bring discredit upon the armed forces.
70
B3O4818
Military Law
c. Explanation. This offense can only be committed by a noncommissioned or petty officer gambling with an enlisted person of less than noncommissioned or petty officer rank. Gambling by an officer with an enlisted person may be a violation of Article 133. See also paragraph 83. d. Lesser included offense. Article 80attempts e. Maximum punishment. Confinement for 3 months and forfeiture of two-thirds pay per month for 3 months. f. Sample specification. In that _____________(personal jurisdiction data), did (at/on boardlocation) (subject-matter jurisdiction data, if required), on or about ____________20____________, gamble with ____________, then knowing that the said ____________ was not a noncommissioned or petty officer and was subordinate to the said ____________.
71
B3O4818
Military Law
Notes: (1) Officers-in-charge, regardless of rank, have company grade NJP authority over only enlisted members (2) May be imposed only if member is embarked on or attached to a vessel (3) May not be imposed in combination with other forms of deprivation of liberty (4) Amount of forfeiture calculated from the pay grade to which reduced, if any Reduction authority limited to commanding officers with the authority to promote to grade from which reduced. *See handout* Reduction limited to one pay grade by JAGMAN (6) May be imposed in combination with, or in lieu of, any other permissible punishment (7) Extra duties and restrictions may be imposed concurrently, but only to maximum imposed for extra duties (8) When imposed on officers, must be in writing
72
B3O4818
Military Law
73
B3O4818
Military Law
Activity/Unit
Date of Birth
Name (Interviewer)
SSN
Rate/Rank
Service (Branch)
Organization
Billet
Location of Interview
Time
Date
Rights I certify and acknowledge by my signature and initials set fort below that, before the interviewer requested a statement from me, he warned me that: (1) I am suspected of having committed the following offense(s): ______________________________________________________________________ (2) I have the right to remain silent: ____________________________________ (3) Any statement I do make may be used as evidence against me in trial by court-martial: ___________________________________________________________ (4) I have the right to consult with lawyer counsel prior to any questioning. This lawyer counsel may be a civilian lawyer retained by me at my own expense, a military lawyer appointed to act as my counsel without cost to me, or both; and _____________________________________________________________________ (5) I have the right to have such retained civilian lawyer and/or appointed military lawyer present during this interview. __________________________________
74
B3O4818
Military Law
(3) I expressly do not desire to consult with either a civilian lawyer retained by me or a military lawyer appointed as my counsel without cost to me prior to any questioning. __________________________________________________________ (4) I expressly do not desire to have such a lawyer present with me during this interview, and ______________________________________________________ (5) This acknowledgment and waiver of rights is made freely and voluntarily by me and without any promises or threats having been made to me pressure or coercion of any kind having been used against me. _____________________________
Signature (Accused/Suspect)
Time
Date
Signature (Interviewer)
Time
Date
Signature (Witness)
Time
Date
The statement, which appears on the following ________________________ pages, all of which are signed by me, is made freely and voluntarily without any promises or tretas having been made or pressure or coercion of any of any kind having been used against me.
75
B3O4818
Military Law
76
B3O4818
Military Law
77
B3O4818
Military Law
78
Notes
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS TRAINING COMMAND CAMP BARRETT, VIRGINIA 22134-5019
B3P4878
Importance
B3P4878
Importance (Continued)
this class, you will learn how to plan and execute a convoy, and be introduced to specific planning requirements for the employment of vehicles in motorized operations. The movement of Marines and supplies is a continuous requirement whether in support of air, ground, or combat logistics units. All convoys must provide their own security and be prepared for contact with the enemy. However, convoy commanders must balance their security considerations and offensive-mindset against logistical requirements and their overall mission, often with limited resources. Convoy operations demand deliberate, thoughtful planning, keen METT-TC analysis, thorough training/rehearsals, and decisive execution. In order to be successful, it is necessary to understand the unique considerations of convoy operations. In this lesson, you will learn how to apply METT-TC and the five paragraph order format to convoy operations. The class will introduce: the two convoy movement formations, suggested task organization for a convoy, and the responsibilities of key personnel. The class will also discuss immediate action drills and general considerations. A sand table exercise follows the class and reinforces the concepts and principles in preparation for the convoy field exercise. This lesson covers the following topics: Topic Convoy Planning The Convoy Order Formations Key Personnel Tasking Statements Coordinating Instructions Immediate Action Drills Pre-Combat Actions Communications Summary References Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Notes Page 5 8 13 15 20 21 21 32 35 36 38 38 39
In This Lesson
B3P4878
B3P4878
Convoy Planning
Motorized operations are defined as the application of combat power from motorized vehicles, which is characterized by the ability to alternate rapidly between fighting from vehicles and fighting on foot and also to combine these two methods of combat. These operations rely upon mobility to maximize speed and firepower in the execution of operations. A tactical convoy is a deliberate planned combat operation to move personnel and/or cargo via ground transportation in a secure manner under the control of a single commander. Tactical convoys must have access to the current common operational picture and maintain an aggressive posture that is both agile and unpredictable. All Marine Corps convoys are tactical in nature and assume that enemy contact is probable or imminent. Therefore, security considerations must be planned commensurate with the threat. As discussed below, METT-TC analysis should determine the appropriate security posture. Tactical convoys are combat operations and should be planned and executed as such. The convoy and its personnel must be able to defend themselves, prepared to inflict harm and damage on the enemy if the opportunity arises, and must always keep in mind its assigned mission. Several measures, both active and passive, contribute to the security of a convoy: Dispersion. Speed. Vehicle hardening. Aggressive, alert security posture. Crew-served weapons. Supporting arms.
Warning Order
As with any other operation, as soon as the convoy commander receives the mission, he or she should issue a warning order to subordinates so that they can also begin preparations. The convoy commander should continuously update subordinates on the enemy situation, immediate logistical requirements pertaining to the mission, and route and weather conditions.
B3P4878
B3P4878
B3P4878
performance of your vehicles, and your Marines. Time is an important planning factor in mission preparation. Clearly, the amount of time available will determine the level of detail in the planning and preparation process. Additionally, the convoy commander may have time restraints pertaining to the arrival time at the objective, return time, or travel restrictions along certain routes.
B3P4878
Route
Route selection. This is one of the most important elements of the convoy commanders planning process. Often times, the convoy commander wont get to choose a route, instead it will be dictated by higher headquarters. However, when feasible, the convoy commander should always plan for both a primary and alternate route that considers both speed and security. Route Reconnaissance. The convoy commander should strive to conduct a route reconnaissance. The convoy commander should ask the S-2 for overhead imagery or footage from unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) flights. At a minimum, the convoy commander must conduct a map reconnaissance. This map reconnaissance will help determine the appropriate speed, dispersion, and order of march for the convoy as well as identify alternate routes, danger areas, or potential targets for indirect fires.
Checkpoints As with a patrol, the convoy commander should use designated checkpoints along the route in order to help both the convoy commander and higher headquarters keep track of the convoys location at all times. Often in large convoys, the convoy commander will have the lead and rear vehicle call when they have passed each checkpoint. Rally Points Rally points are also useful to control the convoy if there is enemy action, if part of the convoy becomes separated, or if there is some type of breakdown or vehicle accident. In the event of enemy contact, the convoy commander may establish a floating rally point a set distance ahead of or behind the kill zone. This information must be passed in the convoy order brief: In the event of enemy contact, I will set a rally point 1km ahead of the kill zone. All non-essential vehicles will push through the kill zone and provide security at the rally point until the rest of the convoy joins you.
B3P4878
Unit Boundaries Along with designating his or her own control measures, the convoy commander must pay particular attention to those of adjacent units. The convoy commander must be aware of unit boundaries the convoy will cross through and other important control measures in that units area of operations (AO), such as phase lines. It is imperative that the convoy commander check in and out with each unit as the convoy crosses its battlespace. The convoy is essentially a guest in another units territory and must inform that unit of its presence to de-conflict any current operations and avoid friendly fire incidents. Also, that unit may be able to provide assistance to the convoy if needed in the form of fire support, CASEVAC, recovery support, or QRF. Coordination with other units is one of the most important tasks of the convoy commander during the execution of the convoy.
10
B3P4878
Task Organization
Convoys are task organized to meet the requirements of the assigned mission. The task organization should consist of the following: Lead Security, Main Body Security, and Rear Security. Within the security units vehicles should be organized into buddy pairs for tactical employment. The Lead and Rear Security Units need to be prepared to rotate based on the convoy commander SOM and IA Drills.
Vehicle Employment/Capabilities:
There are several variants of vehicles that can be found in Marine Corps convoys, ranging from tracked and wheeled tactical vehicles to civilian tractor-trailers. Below are some of the Marine Corps wheeled vehicles that are commonly used in convoy operations today: MAS MTVR (7-Ton): Marine Armor System Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement. This vehicle is the most common cargo and personnel carrying vehicle in the Marine Corps. It is commonly found in the Main Body Security Unit, as a cargo or personnel carrier. Additionally, it can be used in the Lead Security Unit as a lead vehicle due to its survivability against IEDs. Below are specific characteristics of the MTVR: Employment: Troop/Cargo carrier, Lead convoy vehicle Payload: 7.1 tons off-road, 15 tons on improved surfaces Personnel: 17 troops (including Machine Gunner) Weight: 36,000-42,000 lbs Armor: Flank protection from 7.62, 360-degree protection from frag/blast Pros: Armor and ground clearance provide good protection from undercarriage blasts (IEDs) Cons: Limited maneuverability due to height/weight
11
B3P4878
12
B3P4878
Formations of Movement:
The column utilized will be determined through METT-TC analysis and may vary throughout the route. When determining which column to use, the convoy commander must balance the requirement for dispersion as a passive security measure along with his or her ability to command and control the convoy. Although an infinite variety of intervals exist, there are two basic formations for the column: Open Column Distance between vehicles is approximately 100m-200m. This formation works best in open terrain and on roads that allow for travel at higher rates of speed. The advantages of the open column are: Greater dispersion provides greater protection against enemy indirect fire, IEDs, and air attack. The farther the vehicles are spread out, the less chance more than one vehicle will be caught in a kill zone. An IED utilizing a 155 round would only have effects on one vehicle vice two or three. The increased intervals provide the drivers more stopping distance and greater room to maneuver, thus reducing the chance of accidents.
The disadvantages of the open column are: Larger footprint Difficult command and control Intervals can be hard to maintain Harder for vehicles to keep visual contact with vehicles to their front and rear.
13
B3P4878
Closed Column Distance between vehicles is approximately 50m-100m. This formation works best at night, in urban areas, or in high traffic areas. The advantages of the close column are: Smaller footprint Greater control Vehicles can mutually support one another more effectively/mass fires More difficult for civilian traffic to enter convoy The disadvantages of the close column are: More vulnerable to indirect fire and IEDs More vehicles may be caught in the kill zone Less stopping and maneuvering distance between vehicles Exhausting for drivers to maintain interval for long periods of time Actions on Objective The convoy commander must also consider what actions need to occur on the objective. A few considerations: Has the objective been cleared and is secure, or are we doing it? Who is the unit receiving the convoys cargo on the objective and what is the plan for link-up? How will the convoy occupy the objective? What is the plan for offloading/onloading the convoys cargo? How long will the members of the convoy remain on the objective and is there billeting?
14
B3P4878
The convoy commander must be focused outward and on the overall picture and mission. While the convoy commander may delegate a number of tasks, he or she must also take time to supervise actions, such as doing a final inspection of the vehicles and personnel once they are staged. Some responsibilities of the convoy commander include: Overall command of the convoy Assess enemy situation; plan the convoy: formation, route, fire support plan Develop and issue the convoy order (and warning orders) Conduct COC and cross-boundary coordination (both during preparation and execution) Coordinate actions on the objective (link up plan, offload/upload plan, destination of cargo and personnel, return cargo/personnel) Develop IA drills, ensure Marines are trained to standard, constantly evaluate IA drills and change if necessary
Submit a detailed manifest (name, rank, SSN, blood type, and location in the convoy of all personnel to include attachments; type, serial number, and order of vehicles, all serialized gear, type and location of cargo)
15
B3P4878
The assistant convoy commander is more focused inward on details that ensure the unit is properly prepared and able to respond to the convoy commanders orders. The assistant convoy commander strives to assume many of the more routine items in preparation and execution in order to allow the convoy commander to maintain an outward focus. Some responsibilities of the assistant convoy commander include: Second in command Responsible for vehicle preparation, loading, and staging Conduct rehearsals prior to execution Assess and attempt to repair or recover down vehicles or ones with maintenance problems Maintain formation, dispersion, and order of march Make recommendations to the convoy commander as appropriate Compile detailed manifest for convoy commander
Lead Security Unit Leader Controls all vehicles and personnel that make up the lead security unit Responsible for forward security Performs convoy navigation duties Communicate checkpoints, turns, danger areas, etc. to Convoy Commander Maintains convoy speed/interval for the Lead Security Unit Understand and rehearse convoy commanders IA drills and contingency plans for that specific mission, to include vehicle unloading drill. Train and rehearse with rest of convoy if required. Analyze the route and make recommendations to the convoy commander on potential danger areas or critical points. Accompany the convoy commander on any route reconnaissance if possible Tactically control and employ the Lead Security Unit vehicles in accordance with IA drills Secure landing zone (LZ) for CASEVAC Provide security at the objective if required
16
B3P4878
Maintains convoy speed/interval for the Main Body Security Unit Understand and rehearse convoy commanders IA drills and contingency plans for that specific mission, to include vehicle unloading drill. Train and rehearse with rest of convoy if required. Analyze the route and make recommendations to the convoy commander on potential danger areas or critical points. Accompany the convoy commander on any route reconnaissance if possible Tactically control and employ the Main Body Security Unit vehicles in accordance with IA drills Provide security at the objective if required Rear Security Unit Leader Controls all vehicles and personnel that make up the rear security unit Responsible for rear security Maintains rear security for the convoy Communicate the convoys passing of checkpoints, turns, danger areas, etc., to Convoy Commander Maintains convoy speed/interval for Rear Security Unit Understand and rehearse convoy commanders IA drills and contingency plans for that specific mission, to include vehicle unloading drill. Train and rehearse with rest of convoy if required. Analyze the route and make recommendations to the convoy commander on potential danger areas or critical points. Accompany the convoy commander on any route reconnaissance if possible Tactically control and employ the Trail vehicles in accordance with IA drills Secure landing zone (LZ) for CASEVAC Provide security at the objective if required Vehicle Commanders Because the traditional fire team, squad, platoon task
17 Basic Officer Course
B3P4878
organization does not easily translate to convoy operations in which small groups of Marines are spread across several vehicles, the convoy commander must put a Marine in charge of each vehicle. The vehicle commander is responsible for all aspects of that vehicle including C2, individuals, weapons, and tactical employment. Some responsibilities of the vehicle commander include: As the senior individual in the vehicle, take charge of the vehicle Know the route Defend the driver and the vehicle; ensure 360 degree security is maintained Ensure the vehicle follows IA drills and commands of the convoy commander Account for all personnel and equipment in that vehicle Handle communications within the vehicle and between the vehicle and the convoy commander Gunners A convoy must maintain 360 degree security at all times. The convoy commander must put serious thought into how to best employ organic fires and, like a fire plan sketch in the defense; the convoy commander must assign sectors of fire to maximize fire power while ensuring security. Some responsibilities of gunners include: Maintain assigned sectors of fire Positively identify and engage targets per Rules of Engagement (ROE) Ensure weapons are manned at all times Properly maintain and employ weapons
18
B3P4878
All drivers must be licensed operators and, in many cases, they are professional motor transport operators per their Military Occupation Specialty (MOS). The convoy commander must ensure that the drivers know their responsibilities. Some of the responsibilities of drivers include: Drive the vehicles. That is their primary duty. If at all possible, other tasks like talking on the radio or returning fire should be assigned to someone else. Maintain correct interval and speed. Always keep vehicle to the front and rear in sight. Know vehicles capabilities and limitations and employ it accordingly Conduct all required checks and service on vehicles. Ensure vehicles are roadworthy. Follow directions of the vehicle commanders.
19
B3P4878
Additional Duties
As with other operations, the convoy commander may choose to task some of the Marines that have been assigned additional duties within the convoy. Some examples are: Aid and litter team LZ marking team Guardian angels Recovery team Secondary Vehicle Commanders Secondary Drivers
Attachments
The convoy may have attachments with unique roles or capabilities, and the convoy commander must understand what these attachments bring to the fight and how to properly task them. Some attachments include: Interpreter
20
B3P4878
Coordinating Instructions
Corpsman Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD) Forward Air Controller (FAC) Military Working Dogs (MWD)
As you learned in your Combat Orders class, coordinating instructions are pieces of information that apply to two or more units/personnel in your order. Because convoy operations involve so many moving parts, the coordinating instructions are often lengthy. This subparagraph of the order gives the convoy commander the opportunity to lay out some specific details about the operation or provide amplifying information. The list below is far from exhaustive, but it suggests some common coordinating instructions: IA drills Formation Task organization Vehicle order Route Route reconnaissance Control measures Speeds Dispersion Vehicle preparation Link up plan Bump plan Fuel/refuel plan Immediate action drills are an important element of convoy operations. Immediate action drills are pre-planned actions in response to common and anticipated events and enemy action. The key to successful execution of immediate action drills is that everyone knows them. IA drills are briefed and rehearsed numerous times prior to execution. The tactical principles you have learned thus far apply to convoy operations as well; however, introducing multiple vehicles separated over distance adds a layer of complexity to any coordinated action. This handout will cover the most common enemy threats and IA drills to counter them. However, the convoy commander must constantly evaluate the enemy threat and the validity of current IA drills to counter it. We must always be prepared to effectively counter the threat posed by a thinking, adaptive enemy who will change his tactics, techniques, and procedures.
21
B3P4878
Short security halts are defined as quick stops that are for 10 minutes or less. Examples of short security halts are as follows: stops to tighten a load, allow another convoy or traffic to pass, conduct a quick vehicle fix, allow the Lead Security Unit to deal with a situation, or refocus the drivers. The following steps should be taken when executing a short security halt: Set up road blocks at the front and rear of the convoy to warn traffic the convoy has stopped Maintain 360 degree security throughout the convoy and for each vehicle Maintain situational awareness and aggressive posture Identify at least one route of egress Conduct 5 and 25 meter checks and continually scan sector Dismounts protect vehicles from third party personnel/vehicle approach Drivers may do a quick check to tighten the load or check vehicle, but otherwise remain in the vehicles ready to drive. Crew-served weapons remain manned and have interlocking fields of fire
22
B3P4878
Long halts are longer than 10 minutes and could be situations such as: dealing with a vehicle breakdown or recovery, cordoning off an IED, or conducting actions on the objective. The longer a unit is static, the more vulnerable it is to enemy contact; therefore, the convoy commander should dictate an increased security posture during long halts. The following steps should be taken when executing a long security halt: Dismounts seek out and use hard cover, such as armored vehicles, buildings, or terrain Dismounts clear blind spots and cover adjacent alleys, streets, and buildings Crew-served weapons remain manned Drivers only dismount at a long halt when absolutely necessary, such as to conduct resupply, rig vehicle for tow, etc Dismounts push security out to establish a secure perimeter and maintain mutual support. Employ over watch and guardian angel principles. Dismounts protect vehicles from third party personnel/vehicle approach
23
B3P4878
Just as you learned in patrolling, a danger area is a specified area above, below, or within which there may be potential danger. Danger areas require additional situational awareness and control to allow a convoy to move through a point while both controlling third party traffic and remaining alert to potential threats. Examples are intersections, traffic circles, overpasses, and on/off ramps. There are several different ways to cross a danger area. The composition of the danger area, the threat, and the assets of the convoy all factors into which is the appropriate technique for crossing the danger area. One common technique is described below:
REAR SEC
MAIN BODY
LEAD SEC
3) Rear Security accelerates from the rear to provide over watch and posts on the flanks
24
B3P4878
MAIN BODY
LEAD SEC
4) Lead Security and Main Body accelerate and continue through danger area
REAR SEC
REAR SEC
REAR SEC
5) Lead Security and Main Body crosses danger area 6) Rear Security maintains security to the flanks until pre planned interval is achieved
25
B3P4878
By themselves, snipers can do little harm to a moving convoy. If, however, a sniper can cause a convoy to stop and deploy its forces, a more dangerous situation can arise. Snipers are often used as a deception to cause a convoy to stop in a larger enemy kill zone, i.e. a deliberate ambush. To properly react to a sniper:
26
B3P4878
There is be a clear difference between harassing fire and an ambush. An ambush will have a heavy, effective volume of fire concentrated in a specific area (the kill zone). The enemy often employs a combination of weapons, such as rifles, machine guns, and rocket-propelled grenades. Additionally, the enemy may combine his direct fire weapons with indirect fire or IEDs. Unblocked Ambush: This term refers to a situation when the convoys movement is not impeded by enemy actions and the convoy suppresses the enemy and continues on with its mission. These are the steps that should be taken in an unblocked ambush: Speed up Signal. Visually signal to indicate general direction of the enemy Return fire. Employ accurate fires within the ROE. Gun trucks within Main Body fire as they continue through the kill zone. Escort vehicles maneuver to concentrate fires on the enemy while the Main Body pushes through the kill zone Send a report. Vehicles receiving/returning fire report contact to the convoy commander, who in turn reports contact to higher Headquarters Move to a rally point away from the site based on SOP and METT-TC Send ACE report Continue the mission Blocked Ambush: If the movement is blocked by the enemys actions and the convoy is not able to execute its alternate route, the convoy may need to execute a hasty attack or a hasty defense, depending on the situation and the commanders intent.
27
B3P4878
Hasty Attack o Contact reported to convoy commander o Vehicles that can get out of the kill zone do so, vehicles trapped in the kill zone return fire from crew-served weapons (if they are gun trucks) or individual weapons o Marines in kill zone execute vehicle unloading drill and seek cover and concealment while returning fire. o Vehicles clear of the kill zone suppress the enemy. o o Designated Security Unit vehicles maneuver to provide effective fires against the enemy and lay down a base of fire for dismounted assault force o Convoy commander decides whether to dismount and assault through the enemy. o Convoy regroups at rally point, assesses casualties and damage, reports updates to higher, and continues on with mission Hasty Defense o Contact reported to higher, QRF requested o Convoy is unable to execute alternate route or continue forward and is confronted with superior enemy force, thus being forced to defend convoy in place until assistance arrives o Convoy commander organizes defensive position using crew-served weapons, vehicles, personnel, and terrain in order to best repel the enemy. Depending on the situation and time, the convoy commander may set up crew-served weapons on the ground vice mounted on the vehicles. Vehicle Dismount Drill
If a vehicle is immobilized and is taking fire, or if the assault force must dismount under fire, the steps below describe how to dismount a vehicle while under fire: o Return fire with crew-served weapon (if a gun truck) and individual weapons o Throw smoke to obscure friendly movement o Hot side (side taking fire) provides suppressive fire o Cold side (side opposite fire) dismounts using vehicle as cover o Marines on the ground provide suppressive fire o Marines on the hot side of the truck dismount using the vehicle for cover o Assault the enemy using fire and maneuver
28
B3P4878
Recovery of Down Personnel and Vehicles: There are two drills for recovering down personnel and vehicles. In one instance there is no obstacle to movement but the convoy itself is forced to stop to execute the recovery. In the second instance, there is an impediment to the convoys forward movement and the convoy commander must deal with that as well as with the recovery. o Convoy is forced to stop due to down vehicle or personnel, but there is no obstacle to movement o Convoy stops (if under fire, convoy commander may send unnecessary vehicles ahead to rally point) o Dismount o Dismounts establish 360 degree security. Maintain/scan sector of fire. Look for indications of enemy presence o Achieve fire superiority by maneuvering gun trucks and escort vehicles to support by fire positions o Report to higher headquarters and request assistance if needed o Dismounts recover casualties from cold side of vehicle o Recovery vehicle executes hasty recover with strap, chain, cable, tow bar, or have a rear vehicle push the disabled vehicle out of the kill zone o Convoy continues movement. Gun trucks/escort vehicles cover movement out of area o Convoy moves to rally point o Convoy establishes 360 degree security o Convoy commander sends ACE report o Convoy continues mission
29
B3P4878
30
B3P4878
Confirm whether or not the suspected object is in fact a possible IED. Binoculars or other optics, including thermal sights, can greatly assist in the process. Personnel should try to confirm the IED to the best of their ability, but do so from a safe distance and without taking unnecessary risks. After confirming the presence of an IED, contact higher headquarters using the Explosive Hazard 9-line report. Clear the area surrounding the IED, attempt to clear all 360 degrees if possible and clear to a minimum of 300m. Vary distance and formation to remain unpredictable. Clear the area of all military and civilian personnel and vehicles. Remember to conduct 5 and 25 Meter Checks at all areas occupied. Cordon the area off by a minimum of 300 meters. The purpose of the cordon is to prevent unauthorized personnel and vehicles from entering the site (for their own protection and for the safety of EOD), to preserve the scene for further exploitation, and to provide outward protection and security against commandinitiated IEDs. Check the immediate area around the site and cordoned positions for secondary devices using the 5 and 25 Meter Checks. Expand the search using the detailed search methods and optics as time/threat permits, looking for indicators, secondary devices, and suspicious personnel. Control to ensure only authorized access, control the area inside the cordon. All personnel and vehicles should enter and exit the cordoned area through the ECP. All civilian and non-essential military traffic should be diverted away from the cordon. Immediately report any personnel observed approaching the IED. A 360-degree security around the cordon should be maintained until EOD has given the all-clear signal.
31
B3P4878
Pre-Combat Actions
The foundation for success for any mission is the actions that are conducted prior to departing friendly lines. The Convoy Commander develops a detailed plan to support the convoy both operationally and logistically. Pre-Combat Checks and Inspections confirm that the plan is executable by verifying that all personnel and materials are present and operational. The Convoy Commander must determine which equipment to take for the mission and understand how to inspect that equipment. It will likely require subject matter experts such as mechanics, vehicle operators, and communicators to inspect specific items; however, the Convoy Commander and subordinate leaders will need to possess a basic knowledge of the inspectable items under their control. In addition to the items required for direct sustainment and accomplishment of the mission the Convoy Commander must plan for redundancy and contingency items to support the mission. The items can consist of the following: MREs, water, ammunition, medical supplies, batteries, fuels, oils, lubricant, repair parts, and spare tires. The Convoy Commander must determine how much extra can be carried, how it will be spread load on vehicles, how it will be marked, and how it should be secured for ease of access and retention. This extra equipment must be planned for in detail and briefed to the convoy to ensure that all know where to locate additional ammunition during an engagement or where to locate medical supplies for treating a casualty. For example the Convoy Commander may place additional Fragmentary Grenades in every other vehicle in the convoy. Those grenades will need to be placed in an ammo can, marked with paint or lettering, placed in a specific location, and secured by an effective method for both retention and access if needed. PCC/ PCI Pre combat checks and inspections are a crucial step in ensuring mission readiness. Both personnel and equipment (weapons, communication gear, vehicles, etc) must undergo checks and inspections prior to any mission in order to identify and correct any potential issues. Below is a sample check lists for vehicles:
32
B3P4878
33
B3P4878
MTVR Passenger Configuration o Compartment Clear of Debris and Trash o Seats Checked, Operational, and Secured o Stairs Checked, Operational, and Secured o Tarpaulin Sides Rolled and Secured Cargo Configuration o Sides Checked and Secured or Removed and Stowed o Mirror Obstructions Identified and Corrected if Possible o Load Items Clearly Marked and Loaded in Order of Offload o Load Secured with Straps or Chains to Griped Points o Chains and Straps Straight with No Catches or Twists o Nothing Hanging or Caught on Load or Vehicle o Additional Chains or Straps Checked, Loaded, and Secured on Vehicle MRAP Compartment Clear of Debris and Trash Seats Checked, Operational, and Secured Turret Function Checked With/Without Mounted Weapons (Verify Clear Field of Fire) Gunner Platform Checked, Operational, and Secured Stairs Checked, Operational, and Secured Rehearsals The purpose of conducting rehearsals is to enable final reinforcement of critical habits of action/thought before departing friendly lines. Rehearsals serve as an opportunity for commanders to practice critical tactical actions that are anticipated or expected while conducting their convoy. Because time is always of the essence, convoy commanders must have their rehearsals prioritized. Rehearsals also serve as an opportunity to implement new TTPs and work on tactical elements that the unit may have executed poorly in the past.
34
B3P4878
Communications
Communication is one of the most important planning considerations for the convoy commander. By the nature of a convoy, vehicles and personnel are spread out along a considerable distance, making radio communications the main method by which the convoy commander commands and controls the unit. Communications assets may be limited and the convoy commander will have to choose wisely where to position the radios. The ideal is one radio per vehicle. The convoy commander must know the capabilities and limitations of all the communications gear and how to properly employ it, keeping in mind the distance the convoy will cover and the length of the convoy itself. For example, in larger convoys, in order for the convoy commander to talk with the lead and rear vehicles there should probably be other radios positioned throughout the middle of the convoy to relay over the long distances. There are three types of communications in a convoy: External to the convoy: The convoy commander is the primary person talking to units external to the convoy in order to coordinate with higher, adjacent, and supporting units. The convoy commander talks externally to coordinate boundary crossing, keep higher headquarters informed, employ supporting arms, and call for external assets (i.e., CASEVAC, EOD, QRF, or recovery support). Vehicle to vehicle: Members within the convoy communicate with one another on the status of the convoy. The convoy commander issues orders to subordinates and members of the convoy report problems, observations, or enemy contact. Vehicle internal: Personnel inside the vehicles communicate among themselves, more often visually or by voice rather than by radio. The vehicle commander relays orders he or she received from the convoy commander over the radio to his crew. Gunners and drivers report their observations to the vehicle commander. Often times this communication is done by voice rather than radio within the vehicle.
35
B3P4878
Summary
General Convoy Considerations. The spectrum of convoy operations is complex and varied. Convoy operations can range from a four-vehicle convoy of HMMWVs conducting a rapid resupply of an infantry platoon in the assault to a fifty-vehicle convoy involving military, civilian contractor, and third-country national vehicles. The mission, size, task organization, route, and enemy threat will be unique in every convoy. This class offers basic planning considerations, principles, and techniques to conduct convoy operations; however it is only a starting point. Unit SOPs and the operating environment will dictate and shape much of the convoy operations you actually execute. The principles of convoy operations only build on the tactical and planning foundations you have gained thus far. Regardless of the specific convoys you will conduct, below are overarching themes that must be considered in every convoy operation. Detailed planning and preparation: Similar to a patrol, planning a convoy requires significant thought and time. Immediately upon receipt of the mission, the convoy commander should publish a warning order to subordinate leaders in order to effectively manage preparation time. The convoy commander should also begin coordination with the COC to get questions answered and begin formulating the convoy order. The convoy order will be lengthy and detailed, with specific tasking statements for key personnel and with extensive coordinating instructions. The convoy commander must plan for myriad contingencies that could arise in the execution of the convoy as well as for the numerous responsibilities inherent with command of a convoy. Well thought-out, well rehearsed IA drills: The ability to respond to those myriad contingencies will determine the success or failure of that convoy. The convoy commander must carefully consider what potential scenarios the convoy may face and the best way to confront them. Then the convoy commander must translate that plan into action by rigorously training convoy personnel in these IA drills and conducting rehearsals. Additionally, the convoy commander must constantly update his or her METT-TC and analyze the drills to ensure they are effective. Difficult command and control: Command and control of the convoy is one of the most challenging areas for the convoy commander. The convoy commander must communicate both internally and externally. The convoy commander primarily communicates with his or her subordinate leaders and vehicles through the radio, which can be difficult due to dispersion, the size of the convoy, and limited communications assets. Externally, the convoy commander must communicate with higher headquarters, adjacent units as the convoy crosses boundaries, and with supporting units such as aviation or fire support. Often times, the convoy commander will have multiple command and control systems at his or her disposal and must know the capabilities and limitations of each one.
36
B3P4878
Summary (Continued)
Battlefield geometry: Geometry of fires can become much more complicated with convoys than foot-mobile operations. The vehicles are spaced much farther apart than dismounted troops and a convoy possesses significantly more crew-served weapons (with longer ranges) than the average dismounted force. When the assault force dismounts to maneuver, coordination is imperative between gun trucks providing suppressive fire and the dismounted troops. Also, a convoy often travels through another units battle space where it may be difficult for that convoy commander to know or determine where all the friendly forces are located. The convoy commander and the Marines in the convoy must constantly be aware of the effects of their fires. End state and mission accomplishment: A convoy exists in order to tactically move supplies or personnel from one place to another in pursuit of a larger mission. Therefore, a convoy is one of the few instances in which engaging the enemy is secondary to overall accomplishment of the mission and fulfillment of the end state. Always consider the mission when making decisions during the execution of the convoy. The convoy must be able to defend itself: Convoys must be as self-sufficient as possible and must be prepared for contact with the enemy. While the bullet above stresses that engaging the enemy is secondary to mission accomplishment that does not mean that the convoy should avoid confrontation with the enemy. The convoy must be able to defend itself and if the opportunity arises, the convoy should inflict as much damage on the enemy as possible. An alert, aggressive posture and a willingness to confront and defeat the enemy will undermine the enemys perception of convoys as soft targets and reduce the likelihood of attacks. Ultimately, the convoy commander must balance this aggressive, offensive mindset with overall accomplishment of the mission.
37
B3P4878
References
Reference Number or Author MCRP 4-11.3F MCRP 4-11.3H Reference Title Convoy Operations Handbook Tactical Convoy Ops
Convoy
38
B3P4878
Notes
39
Notes